Tag Archives: CIA

“Electronic Slavery” in America: Military Neuro Weaponry Used Contractually by US Air Force Veteran to Abuse Exemplary and Highly Accomplished Tennessee Woman Pastor & Control Town

by Ramola D, with Dr. Millicent Black, and the International Joint Investigation Team
(This is a long article. Content links provided below for ease of reference. You can jump to the start of the article here.)

Content Links

Introduction

Neuro/Nano Technologies, Behavior Modification Technologies, and Microwave Weapons, in 2017

Non-Consensual Military, Intelligence, and Criminal Justice Brain Experimentation Ongoing Worldwide

Classified Military Technology used by “Super-Soldier Washout”

How Did This Epic Saga of Intimate Physical Abuse with Electronic Warfare Neuroweaponry Begin?

Covert Implantation, Brain Interference, Radio Hypnosis, and Post-Hypnotic Suggestions

Covert Implantation in American Hospitals

Remote Brain Interference and Local Collusion

Incrimination (Framing) by Way of Remote Brain Access & Manipulation

Brainstem Implants: “The Programming Is In Your Brainstem”

Radio Waves, Radio Stations, Radio Hypnosis

A Night to Change a Life

A Round of Surgeries and Covert Implantation

Physical Stalking and Remote Radiation

A Round of Doctors and Specialists: Evidence of Radio Frequency Transmissions

“Electronic Slavery”: Which an Entire Town Consents To Condone

Clandestine Surgeries: Without Consent, Without Consciousness

Non-Consensual Clandestine Heart Surgery and Implantation

SERE Torture Training & the MK ULTRA Connection

The Killing Fields of Tennessee

Research Projects and DOD/NASA Funding: How Universities are Also Involved

Medical and Psychological Evaluations Support Dr. Black’s Claims

Reports, Complaints, Pleas for Help—and the Response from Police, FBI, Church Elders, Senators, Domestic Violence Network, United Nations

Census Bureau, Military Police, FCC, AT & T Awareness of Implants, Remote Neural Monitoring, Microwave Weapon Use on Civilians

Military and Air Force Base Awareness of Satellite Technology in Remote RF Assault

High Awareness from the FBI: “We know whose chips are on”

Is the Pentagon Watching This?

Those Informed, Those Witnessing, Those Speaking Out

Local Police Responses and Inaction

Police Collusion in Psychiatric Commitment

Cyber Stalking and Cyber Hacking

Permission to Be a Criminal

What Exactly is Going on Here?

Investigation and Behavior Modification Cover Stories

Framed to Appear Criminal via Electronic Read-Write Access to Brain

Trauma Based MK ULTRA Torture and Manchurian Candidate Experimentation

Fingerprintless Homicides, Sadism, Satanism: “They call this the Living Death”

SERE Torture Masquerading as Classified Military/Academic Disease-Detection & Monitoring Research

How the Takeover of an Entire Town Went Down

Pedophilia and Child Sex Trafficking Rings

Reality TV, Simulated Controlled Warfare, Captivity, and SERE Torture

Memory Erasure from a Brain Chip: How All Crime Can be Erased from a Criminal’s Brain

Note to the Nation, Note to the World

Reporting These Crimes: A Call to Conscience & Right Action

Introduction

Every morning, Dr. Millicent Black, a pastor with a doctorate in Christian Education and Social Justice, sends her local Chief of Police a brief report on the latest abusive trauma she has suffered—for 14 years–at the hands of her known abuser, a former US Air Force Sergeant, Barrett Wolf (name changed to protect future litigation), in hopes of finally gaining a permanent order of protection and an official termination of Wolf’s abuse.

Barrett Wolf is no ordinary abuser of women. A distant relative of Dr. Black’s, Wolf once had a close relationship with her, but turned vindictive after the relationship ended. Using SERE (Survival Evasion Resistance Escape) training picked up at the Air Force, classic torture protocols outlined in various military and CIA manuals (including the Kubrick CounterIntelligence Interrogation Manual), and the deadly accoutrements of modern technology: satellite systems, tiny RFID microchips, Brain-Computer-Interface chips, nanobiosensors, and a variety of brain interference technologies, including V2K (called Synthetic Telepathy in the military), dream injection, electronic sensory transmission, and MK-ULTRA’s Dr. Evil legacy to the world: RHIC-EDOM (Radio Hypnotic Intra-Cerebral Control-Electronic Dissolution of Memory), Millicent reports that she has been and is being physically abused by Wolf remotely, in a variety of ways which include covert access of her body, non-consensual surgeries, covert implantation, intensive RF transmissions, implant activation, sleep-deprivation, crippling and disabling of limbs with long-term attacks to knees and hips, continuous joint injuries, and internal organ damage.

Dr. Black has made numerous reports of these assaults as cyberstalking, electronic harassment, and remote brain control with high-technology to local police, FBI, Congressmen and women, as well as Tennessee officials in county and state government, including with her reports extensive documentation on these or similar technologies from military sources, media reportage, and recorded patents.

These claims might sound futuristic and unbelievable were it not for the fact that remote-influencing and remote-accessing neurotechnologies, electromagnetic radiation (EMR), and radio-frequency tracking technologies are documented to exist, even in the public (unclassified) domain. Early scientific awareness of remote-influencing of human bodies and brains is recorded, for instance, in the remarkable paper published by E. Leon Chaffee and Richard U. Light in the 1930s: A Method for the Remote Control of Electrical Stimulation of the Nervous System.

Neuro/Nano Technologies, Behavior Modification Technologies, and Microwave Weapons, in 2017

Today, notice of neuro-technologies and EMR and sonic “non-lethal” weapons, long developed and partially acknowledged by Military and Intelligence agencies, in conjunction with Universities, is increasingly surfacing even in CIA-controlled mainstream media reports. Kept from CIA-media but well-known to researchers such as Dr. Nick Begich and John McMurtrey, mind control and behavior modification technology, once the domain of the CIA’s MK ULTRA, has gravitated across agencies and entered the realm of Neuroscience and Neuropsychiatry. As Obama’s Brain Initiative rolled out in 2013, with millions assigned to brain research, projects in Neuroscience have proliferated.

These include work on Brain Control Interfaces, Robotics, Deep Brain Stimulation, neural network mapping, neuro-imaging, brainwave frequencies, dreams, and more. University Neuroscience programs, DARPA, and various research institutions are working on interdisciplinary projects where experimentation in the areas of nanotechnology, “smart dust,”“neural dust,” medical implants, radio frequency transponders, bio-electronics or bionics, robotics, artificial intelligence, and cybernetics are converging.

Patents on remote-accessing neurotechnologies can be found online (some listed at end of article). Whistleblower scientists who have worked on Brain Control and Mind Control projects for the military such as John Norseen, Dr. Richard Alan Miller, and Dr. Robert Duncan have revealed the existence of such projects.

Non-Consensual Military, Intelligence, and Criminal Justice Brain Experimentation Ongoing Worldwide

Military participation in Neuroscience research is in fact noticeable, and can be seen openly acknowledged at Defence sites such as DARPA. University research projects are often supported by Defense grants—and today, despite a paucity of media coverage, there are many indications (inclusive of whistleblower and victim testimony) that Neuroscience, Social Science, Robotics/AI, Physics, Electronic Engineering, and Medical researchers in Universities are–unethically–working overtly and covertly on classified projects with “covered agencies” in Intelligence, Military, and the Department of Justice, permitting non-consensual experimentation and covert access to patients in their care (explored further below).

What Dr. Millicent Black is reporting in fact is tragically not unusual, for this beyond-Orwellian 21st-century we are living in. Her case however is emblematic, and offers insight into a modern-day holocaust of unethical and non-consensual brain experimentation being reported globally. As Brain Research and Surveillance by globally-connected Intelligence agencies is increasingly funded worldwide, thousands around the world are reporting very similar remote-influencing and remote-accessing technologies on their person.

Yet, this issue is deliberately avoided (or distorted and lied-about) today by co-opted and CIA-controlled mainstream media, and presented deceptively and repressively as indicative of mental illness by treasonous, State-servile psychiatrists. Explored exclusively at True-Media and informative Mind Control sites online, the existence and governmental operation of Remote Neuro-technology on world populations today is being treated as above top-secret, to be denied at all cost. But there are mass brain control implications here which all of humanity needs urgently to become informed about, and outraged about.

Classified Military Technology used by “Super-Soldier Washout”

What makes Dr. Black’s experience unique is that she appears to be being persecuted primarily by a single individual, characterized by NSA Intelligence analyst whistleblower and Human Rights investigator Karen Stewart as “a super-soldier washout” in possession of highly classified military technology he is now using on Dr. Black, as well as on other women in the town, children, and possibly an entire population (also explored below).

This use, which has persisted across decades, has been malicious, severe, and degrading; using V2K or synthetic telepathy (military technology fully acknowledged by the military today, while being denied by local law enforcement and complicit psychiatrists), ex-Sergeant Barrett Wolf frequently informs Millicent he aims to torture her to death, which he then demonstrates, with intense RF (Radio Frequency) transmissions and torturous implant activations. Millicent also holds Wolf responsible for the sudden, inexplicable deaths of many around her, including various relatives, deaths which he has, in narcissistic fashion, via V2K, actually confessed to—which would essentially make Wolf a psychopathic serial killer and modern-day covert assassin using the powerful (and unethical) weapons of 21st-century stealth warfare technology.

What also makes Dr. Black’s case extraordinary is her own tenacity and determination to find and report the truth behind this situation, despite enduring a 14-year period of continuous abuse. Dr. Black, whose every action of fighting back and persisting with her own life marks her as truly exceptional and a towering model of courage in the face of tremendous affliction, acquired her Doctor of Ministry degree from United Theological Seminary, Ohio, in 2015, despite continuous abuse through 3 years of doctoral studies, commenced at the age of sixty.

Tireless in her investigations, she early embarked on a long program of reporting the unusual medical symptoms she was experiencing, visiting a variety of doctors, toxicologists, Sleep Study specialists, chiropractors, and private investigators. Step by step, she collected physical evidence. Radio scans, EEGs, X-rays, nuclear scans, and toxicology analyses have now established the material presence of numerous non-consensual implants in her body and brain, as well as the continuous, pulsed transmission of external radio frequencies to her brain while in a sleep state.

Branching out into current-day sci-tech, Dr. Black studied the deleterious effects of microwave radiation, questioned the presence of satellites over her residence, made FOIA requests on neurotechnology and non-lethal weapons to DOD and the Air Force, and researched FCC allocations of frequencies. Keen to understand how Wolf could so invasively assault her with remote technologies, she has called up personnel at Air Force bases where Wolf has worked, sought information on the nature of his Air Force training and duties, spoken to Federal investigators, and combed through old and new Military documents. In the process, she has amassed an impressive body of research on all these technologies (listed partially at end of article) which indisputably prove their existence, as well as obtained much information on covert operations confided in her by police sergeants, US Marshals, USAF base staff, and others.

How Did This Epic Saga of Intimate Physical Abuse with Electronic Warfare Neuroweaponry begin?

In many ways, as Dr. Black tells it, this is a small-town story of distant cousins, gossipy relatives, and church friends sprinkled over town, threads of connection between police officers and citizens, a sense of kinship and Southern warmth binding the residents. But it is also a 21st-Century Surveillance State story of relations rift asunder, of people taking sides, of secrets looming large, and of remote brain- influencing radio technologies possibly being used on large portions of the population.

These mind-influencing radio technologies—largely unreported by our CIA-controlled press—are now almost seventy years old, yet impact on our collective American and global ignorance as “science-fiction.” (For this, we have six decades’ worth of lying, conniving, concealing Western “journalists”–read in-house editorial agent stand-ins – to blame.) Udo Ulfkotte, the German journalist whistleblower who was tragically murdered recently for his truth-telling about the corrupted, agency-controlled nature of modern journalism, has said, of contemporary journalists in Western media, “We all lied for the CIA.”

The early part of this story spans a small town and a larger city, both a little south of country music seat and home to Vanderbilt University, Nashville, Tennessee. Mt. Pleasant, where Dr. Black lived for many years, and where she has returned to live in an ancestral home bequeathed to her, is a small town nestled in a rural Tennessee landscape, replete with rolling hills, green pasture, and bales of hay rolled in autumn fields. Not far, and just ten miles north, lies Columbia, Tennessee, county seat of Maury County, where Dr. Black has resided occasionally in a daughter’s home, a larger, stately town which carries history in its pre-Civil War homes and colonial architecture, and was the childhood home of 11th President of the USA, James K. Polk.

Distant cousins, Barrett Wolf and Millicent Black were never around each other. Millicent says she knew of him but did not know him then. In 1981, Millicent, who was going through a divorce, ran into Wolf on a running track—he asked for her number and subsequently called her. She was not overly interested, for she had heard stories about this four-times removed cousin. He had gotten a young woman pregnant and not married her. But Wolf was persistent, insisting in conversation to her he was not the father (Almost thirty years later, Millicent met the woman in question and was assured he was indeed the father.)

Millicent and Barrett were in a dating relationship for three weeks, in 1981, before he left to enter the Air Force. When he came home on leave for thirty days later that year, things picked up briefly, but Millicent could tell he was not the committing kind and began to pull away. Between 1982 and 1988, Barrett was away on Air Force training, on a mission he revealed little about. Millicent later learned he was in Washington State on rigorous Survival training, which included SERE torture training—Survival Evasion Resistance Escape—supposedly designed to harden soldiers and airmen to the depredations of enemy torture protocols, if captured.

During this time they were not in touch. No letters, emails, phone-calls—no communication. Once, in 1982, on a visit home, Barrett told her he was proficient in Morse Code. He did not tell her Morse Code was used in Electronic Warfare, and had applications in the new military technologies of Voice to Skull (V2K) or Synthetic Telepathy and subliminal hypnosis using radio frequencies: RHIC-EDOM, which he was later to abuse her with.

Millicent's Earlier Home, Columbia, TN

“The house where I lived 2000-2004. This is where I was when the hi-tech torture started and where Barrett Wolf visited multiple times before the hi-tech torture started in 2003,  where he also came in August 2004 more than a year after.  The Ikonos satellite was sited over this house Jan. 2003, two days before Wolf made a pop-up visit to my home and six months before the torture started. He was stationed at Moody AFB, GA during this time.”

In 1988, at the end of his mystery stint in the Air Force, Wolf landed unannounced on her doorstep. She had company then, he waited to speak to her. A second time when he did the same thing, she refused him sexually, closed the door on him, would not let him in. This action of hers in claiming her selfhood apparently made a deep impact on Wolf. Twenty years later, in 2008, he would tell her he left that night in 1988 determined to destroy her.

Covert Implantation, Brain Interference, Radio Hypnosis, and Post-Hypnotic Suggestions

Although Millicent traces the beginning of high-technology torture that she began to experience to 2003, she has begun to wonder whether indeed she was not being set up for a lifetime of high-tech remote assault and influence much earlier.

All through the ’90s, Millicent reports that strange things happened around her. The first indications that she was possibly experiencing radio-frequency-induced brain interference or physical effects from energy beamed on her body were slight and slipped past her. It was only in retrospect, she says, that she began to put things together.

Covert Implantation in American Hospitals

In 1995, oddly persistent pain in her right thumb—significantly, just past a summer reunion where she encountered Barrett Wolf again, for the first time since 1988–led to her having surgery where a joint was removed, and replaced, she was told, with folded tendon from her arm. It was surgery for a work-related injury, she says, from her work at Vanderbilt University, which her employer refused to pay for.

A curious memory from this operation stands out. Just before surgery a man came into the room and introduced himself as the anesthesiologist, giving a name at odds with his name-tag which said “Michael Sutton.” Later she traced the name Michael Sutton to the Knox/Oak Ridge area—secretive military home to The Manhattan Project in the ’40s, current home to the Oak Ridge National Laboratory and Oak Ridge Hospital, one of the sites of human radiation experiments where plutonium was non-consensually injected into 18 patients nationwide. Also worth noting is a University consortium, the Oak Ridge Associated Universities, set up to share science and technology information on current-day government/military research and national security projects across the sciences being conducted at Oak Ridge National Laboratory for the Department of Energy, Homeland Security, and other agencies.

Was this man a legitimate medical professional or a covert Special Operative from the military? Could it be that, at this hospital and others, surgeons were being primed to step aside pre-surgery—not just for her, but for many unsuspecting Americans–to let covert operators from the military step in and perform non-consensual implantation?

The suspicion that such illicit implantation is indeed taking place in hospitals and operating-rooms in America today was confirmed to Dr. Black later, in 2011, by a Mt. Pleasant police officer, Sergeant Geoff Taylor, who told her he was a former Marine Intelligence officer, and knew very well about covert microchip implantation during surgery. This was a police officer who told her he would not give her the usual “spiel” he and his fellow officers gave to anyone else about being delusional when she reported experiencing remote directed-energy assault in her home, since, he said, looking at all her documentation, she “knew too much” and would therefore speak to her “intelligently.”

The irony is that the very same officer showed up in her home six weeks later, in August 2011, “with a fake detention warrant,” (which he showed her only when she got on the phone right then and called a Domestic Violence professional for advice, and which recorded a different judge’s name than what he gave her) and compelled Millicent to undergo a psychiatric examination at the local hospital—where a doctor released her in two hours after speaking to her, saying, “I see no reason for you to be here.” Also of note though is the fact that a Crisis Intervention nurse came afterward, spoke to her, then wrote in her report that she was delusional. (Not long after that Sergeant Taylor was demoted, mysteriously, to Corporal—a condition which lasted a whole year.) The nurse, Millicent says, is the wife of a local judge. (This apparent collusion between police and psychiatric staff at hospitals will be explored shortly in a separate article.)

Many years later, Millicent found on a whole body scan an implant in her right thumb (site of this operation) – nothing that she had consented to. A renowned private investigator scanned her body in 2014 for the transmission of radio frequencies and identified 53 frequency-emitting/receiving possible implant sites on her body, including on her upper arm.

Remote Brain Interference and Local Collusion

During the ’90s, friends and cousins said odd things to her. A family member confided, in 1996: “They told us we can blame anything on you.” Another cousin said, “The devil is playing with your mind, and when he is through (playing) with you he will destroy you.” Her mother would say later, in 2015, “You know Barrett Wolf is the devil.”

In the late ’90s, Millicent began to experience oddly lucid dreams and mental images. A calm, stable individual with no mental health history, no phobias, no anxiety, she was suddenly being wakened in the night with intense bouts of fear. Can fear be technologically induced? As are other patented systems, the chief intent of a 1991 patent titled Method and System of Altering Consciousness is concerned with “stimulating the brain to exhibit specific brain wave rhythms and thereby alter the state of consciousness of the individual subject.” Brains, it is now known, can be entrained with sonic or photic input, as this 1990 patent, Method of inducing mental, emotional and physical states of consciousness, including specific mental activity, in human beings, suggests. Inducing fear or anxiety today—or any other emotion–by means of remote radio transmissions is not science fiction, it is patented RF technology.

One morning lying on her bed she saw in her mind’s eye an image of her brain being split in half, then only the right side of it in view. In later years, she says, MRIs she took only revealed to her the left side of her brain, never the right—she doesn’t know why.

Another night, in 1990, she was awakened with the words to a song in her head. It was not a familiar song and it was three months after her second marriage. The words floated in as if in a thought (or email) inside her head: “If I can help somebody as I pass along, then my living will not be in vain.”

That day, the 20th of January, 1990, she wrote:

“I was awakened this morning with the words to a song going off inside me. “If I can help somebody as I pass along, then my living will not be in vain.”

I felt this held some meaning for me, but I did not pursue it. As the day wore on, I let the dream slip without writing it down.

It’s now 9:10 Sat night and a 99-year-old man just sang the song on Robert Schaller. “If I can help Somebody.” I’m jolted back to remembrance. And begin to call around to see if I can find the words.”   1/20/1990, Journal of Millicent Black

In 2013, an article in the local newspaper lauded Wolf–now Chairman of the City Planning Commission, Minister of Music and Bible Study Instruction as well as assistant to the pastor at his home church, and recent developer of a reading program in the local middle school–and named him Citizen of the Month. The article cited the opening words to this song as his stated “life vision.”

Incrimination (Framing) by Way of Remote Brain Access & Manipulation

How did she wake up so long ago then with the words to Wolf’s favorite song, voiced subliminally in her brain? Millicent’s speculation is that she had possibly been implanted sometime in the ’90s with some kind of neurological implant, something like a read-write chip with a programmable interface. This speculation is not unfounded, particularly since Wolf expressly said to her later that during the late ’90s, he was “loading her brainstem” with whatever he knew would incriminate her so as to put her on an “extermination list” which would then permit him to “torture (her) to death and not be blamed for it.” FBI-style Parallel Construction with brain hacking? Perhaps this should be the definition of Neuro Crime.

bci-2BCI (Brain Computer Interface) communication is fully acknowledged by the military, as this research report by an Air Force Major Patrick Cutter for Air University at Maxwell Air Force Base, Alabama explains:

“Networked BCI also allow for direct messaging between brains, a form of computer assisted telepathy. Practical direct brain to brain communication currently exists at a simple ‘morse-code’ level. It has been demonstrated that a subject using a non-invasive BCI can transmit thought generated stimulus over the internet into a second BCI-using operator, where the data is translated into stimulus projected into that subject’s visual cortex. In one experiment, the data was interpreted by the receiver as flashes of light within the peripheral vision. The first operator could control the transmissions and successfully sent messages to the second through this method. (57) Other civilian institutions have shown that not only intended speech, but covert speech or ‘the inner voice’, could also be detected by BCI, and be translated by software. (58) Other projects have been conducted to determine the possibility of ascertaining information such as passwords and PIN codes directly from the human brain. (59) The potential for this research is the development of the capability to transmit high quality complex data and ideas at a rapid rate and directly to the receiver’s mind. Synthetic telepathy may prove to be a revolutionary step in communications well before 2040.”The Shape of Things to Come, The Military Benefits of the Brain-Computer-Interface in 2040

But there are other technologies to put voices into heads, into the subconscious, into the auditory cortex. The military has been working to develop these technologies for years, as this document, Bio-Effects of Selected Non-Lethal Weapons, provided to Millicent on FOIA request (and earlier, in 2006, notably, to activist Donald Friedman, also on FOIA request) details. The US Air Force has pursued “synthetic telepathy” or artificial telepathy with remote EEGs and remote transmission of audio into skulls, with a passion, as this extraordinary USAF Wright Patterson Air Force Base translation of a Russian document from 1963 by B. B. Kashinsky, Biological Radio Communications, details. News articles in the propaganda mouthpiece of mainstream media have recorded selective details about the Army and Air Force’s capabilities in the areas of synthetic telepathy and brain mapping, such as this NBC News article from 2008 or this more recent Defense One article from 2014 demonstrate. Conscious brain to brain communication research is also recorded in the public domain.

Patents for voices in heads however go back to 1970 and, via the Neurophone, to 1968. This patent describes the microwave hearing effect: Patent No. 6587729 Apparatus for audibly communicating speech using the radio frequency hearing affect (V2K) O’Loughlin, et al., Jul 1, 2003

(Most readers of military documents are aware that military news on weaponry is carefully trickled out into the public domain, through the subservient filter of agented mainstream media, always concealing the reality of completed full life-cycle development, replete with field-testing and experimentation, including the human, non-consensual aspects thereof—it’s always “classified” until it’s worked over enough in the PR department to be somewhat palatable in the public domain, and even then, only partially revealed. Today, “targeted individuals” being non-consensually experimented-on and operated-on with clearly military technology bear absolute witness to this. There is also a Massive Establishment Cover-Up ongoing about the sophistication of current-day military neurotechnologies being used on humanity, explored at length by this writer here.)

Brainstem Implants: “The programming is in your brainstem”

There was another night, in 1995, when she woke in the middle of the night to the smell of coffee although no coffee was brewing nearby. The smell was distinctive, it was not till later that she learned smells could be neurally simulated with stimulation of olfactory centers in the cerebral cortex. At the time, as a student of Christian theology, she had been taking a course on spiritual warfare involving demonology and spirits, and wondered if the phenomenon was demonic. But it was that temporal juxtaposition of the course she was taking with an unexplained neural phenomenon that she now believes was deliberate, intended for her to attribute to the demonic or paranormal, rather than to concrete, remote-accessing neuro technology.

In person, Barrett Wolf told her, in 1999, after a fateful hotel rendezvous, that “the software is on my dad’s computer.” Was he referring to the software associated with a brainstem read-write implant?

Such chips or ICT (Information and Communication Technologies) implants as they are termed, in the medical world, are not fantasy. A classic 2005 report assessing implantable microchip technology from the European Group on Ethics, titled “Ethical Aspects of ICT Implants in the Human Body,” details the various kinds of microchips in medical and surveillance use, including auditory brainstem implants and neurostimulators for Parkinson’s.

“– Auditory Brainstem implant (ABI) is an auditory prosthesis that bypasses the cochlea and auditory nerve to help individuals who cannot benefit from a cochlear implant because the auditory nerves are not working. The brainstem implant stimulates directly the cochlear nucleus situated in the brainstem….

— Implantable Neurostimulation Devices: the term “neurostimulation” relates to technologies that do not directly stimulate a muscle as a functional electrical stimulation device (i.e., cardiac pacemakers). Rather, neurostimulation technologies modify electrical nerve activity….

Read-Write: this type of microchip would be capable of carrying a set of information which could be expanded as necessary. It allows the storage of data and is programmable at distance. For example, when the microchip carries a person’s medical history and the history evolves, the subsequent information could also be added to the microchip without the necessity of removing the implanted chip. It could also facilitate and record financial transactions. The third important set of information that a read-write microchip could carry might be criminal records.” – Ethical Aspects of ICT Implants in the Human Body

But when could a chip like that have been loaded into her brainstem? Millicent is not certain, but she recalls that years ago, in 1984, she had had carpal tunnel surgery on both hands, procedures for which she had been fully anesthetized, as a consequence of which she does not know if she was covertly implanted then. Oddly, while recovering from that surgery, she started to feel a specific and recurring compulsion, as if thought-injected—again, possibly through either radio hypnosis or chip neurotechnology—to go find work at Vanderbilt University (where she eventually ended up working, variously in different departments, including the medical library, law school, and the Department of Pediatrics in the medical school, for almost 16 years). Wolf said to her in 2008 that he had “sent her” to Vanderbilt so he could “get his hands on a satellite,” and use her for a research project (more later on this).

Millicent reports that this was subliminal or V2K communication; prior to 2008, between 1999 and 2008, everything he said was to her face. Post-2008, everything was via V2K.

One of the most extraordinary aspects of Millicent’s story is that, while much is still shrouded in secrecy and speculation, she often encountered people and moments where little bits of disclosure and confidence were aired to her. One such moment occurred in 1999, after Wolf’s visit to her home, when an Ohio psychologist told her, “The programming is in your brainstem.” This psychologist clearly had access to some information Millicent was not privy to—for she had consented to no such programming, nor had she consented to any kind of experimental research on her brain or body. But in those years, she says, she was too restrained—or radio-hypnotized into “deep trance,” as Wolf would tell her she was–to ask further questions. In 2003, she reports, she was told by staff at the very same organization that she was being used as a guinea pig. Millicent notes: “The hi-tech torturers called me guinea pig and lab rat, around this time when the energy weapon torture and V2K had already started in July.”

This was around the time that a cousin of Millicent’s who lived in Ohio told her to get on the Internet and research what was being done to her.

Again, she emphasizes, this use is, was, and has always been without Informed Consent; she had never consented in any way, in writing or verbally, to any of the doctors or hospitals she visited, to becoming a test subject for anyone or anything. In fact, since 2001 when she had her right shoulder surgery, and later was seemingly informed by a flash of V2K she had an ocular implant, she specifically would write that nothing was to be implanted in her body while signing papers of consent for treatment or surgery.

Radio Waves, Radio Stations, Radio Hypnosis

There were other oddities. One night in 1999 she dreamt of driving down a lane that ended at a cliff. Then she heard Barrrett Wolf’s voice say, “Lights, Camera, Action!” as if an unknown crew was beginning to record her dream that night as it played out in her brain. Later, after years of being woken in the night to the sound of Wolf’s monotone in her ear, engaging in what she learned from research could well have been radio hypnosis, she felt, looking back, she had been hit all those years with radio frequencies, felt she had been hypnotized even, through subliminal messaging means—persuaded by an external party (then in 1997 following her second divorce)—into quitting her job.

MB-SilentSoundThese reports can no longer be considered idle claims or delusional ideas. The CIA’s MK ULTRA invention, Radio Hypnosis Intra-Cerebral Control– Electronic Dissolution of Memory (RHIC-EDOM) consists of conveying a hypnotist’s voice and words over radio frequencies, delivered subliminally, often during sleep cycles. RHIC-EDOM thrives on post-hypnotic suggestion:

“A 350-page CIA manual dating from 1963 asserted that the Agency had mastered a technology called RHIC-EDOM (Radio Hypnotic Intra-cerebral Control and Electronic Dissolution of Memory). Together, these techniques can allegedly remotely induce hypnotic trance, deliver suggestions to the subject and erase all memory for both instruction period and the act which the subject is asked to perform. During 1977 Senate hearings on CIA drug testing, Dr. Sidney Gottlieb, an important MKULTRA administrator, admitted the possibility of the existence of Agency research involving hypnosis using radio beams and the use of microwaves to erase memory, alter brain functions, and disrupt behavior patterns.”Mind Control and the American Government, Martin Bannon, Lobster Magazine, 1992/Wikispooks

“In 1974, J. F. Scapitz, a scientist funded by the Department of Defense, had a chilling vision. He sought to combine earlier MK-ULTRA hypnosis studies with emerging microwave technologies. In an outline to the DoD, Scapitz said “It will be shown the spoken word of the hypnotist may be conveyed by modulated electromagnetic energy directly into the subconscious parts of the brain”. He claimed this could be achieved without employing any technical devices for ‘receiving or transcoding messages’.

“For the first time, US agents had the ability to remotely tamper with an individual’s mind. Scapitz went even further, claiming that this could be achieved without the target even becoming aware of what was happening.” —Mind Control and MK ULTRA, Richard B. Gall, Skywatch

By 1998, reports Millicent, the Black gospel station in Columbia had been open for about 4 years. The broadcast of frequencies from this AM radio station, it was suggested to her by an activist and researcher, was used to get into her head—and into the heads of others in the town. AM and FM frequencies, she notes, can be used for mind control, by way of signals carried on them. Patents bear witness to this, including the 1992 patent for Silent Subliminal Presentation System, which states that non-aural carriers “are amplitude or frequency modulated with the desired intelligence and propagated acoustically or vibrationally, for inducement into the brain”.

This is yet another aspect of Millicent’s story—there are many!–that is absolutely astounding. That a whole town could be radio-hypnotized, remote-influenced, subliminally thought-injected and spoken to, night after night, by a single Dr. Strangelove is almost too futuristic to contemplate. But the technology to make this happen exists today. According to Millicent, the radio station was left on at night, although no (audible) audio broadcasts were made. During this time, someone could indeed hack in and broadcast, using a range of possibly classified military frequencies, sending out subliminal radio hypnosis over the radio waves, stealing into people’s brains as they slept: Barrett Wolf. Night after night, his voice, modulated in stealth Silent Subliminal fashion, was whispering into minds all across town, awake and asleep. People stayed up to hear Barrett, Millicent says. People confided as much in her.

“We listened to what had happened that day, what he had done to you.” It wasn’t an audible transmission, it wasn’t like songs playing on the radio. It was someone hacking into a band of frequencies and using them as carrier to send voices or coded hypnosis into brains. Was it possible a whole town could be fed subliminally-voiced broadcasts, was it possible for one man to so capture attention, privately, internally, inside a thousand skulls? Some appeared to have choices, to be able to view images floated out from Millicent’s brain. “It was too late for me to stay up,” one person told Millicent. “I just opened the software on my computer in the morning to see what happened.”

Interestingly—perhaps ominously—the call letters for this radio station are WMRB-AM. MRB, Millicent notes, initial her married name then: Millicent Russell Black. Russell was still her married name at the time she was going through her divorce and was involved with Barrett Wolf, between 1981 and 1988. Perhaps a coincidence. Perhaps not.

There was also an awareness of shared dreams. Millicent reports the sensation of synthetic dreams being pumped into her brain at night, and things people said alerted her to their awareness of these too. They seemed to see her dreams at night. “Looks like they would give you some good dreams sometime.” This was her father, speaking to her one morning as she entered his room. Not merely were they hearing her words and seeing the images being pumped into her brain, possibly to the read-write chip, and then transmitted out, as if they were images and thoughts floating out from her own head, they were experiencing the false processing of that imagery through electronic dreams.

With sleep-deprivation (being woken up at night specifically at times of REM cycles, when dreaming starts) going on since 2003, Millicent notes: “I didn’t have dreams at night definitely since 2003, it seemed that the dreams only came after 5 am, as people were up getting ready for work or after 7 am if I went back to sleep.” Significantly, in about 2002, she reports, Wolf turned to her as he was leaving her Columbia home after one of those pop-up visits he subjected her to, and said, mockingly: “Don’t let nobody steal your dreams.”

A Night to Change a Life

But worse was to come. In 1999, the unrepentant “Proud Peacock of the East” as she named him, re-appeared in Millicent’s life only to ravage her physically and launch a series of covert assaults on her body destined to create recurring physical repercussions. Just after sleep one day, Millicent woke to a phone-call, and uncharacteristically accepted a dinner invitation from Wolf. She met him at his hotel after work and later stayed the night with him, although she told him she would use her own bed (there were to be two) and wear her pyjamas. She had told a girlfriend where she would be that night, although he had said to her, Tell no-one you’re with me. She has no memories succeeding of that night; she woke, she says, feeling used; he handed her her pyjamas from under his pillow. Looking back, she feels the whole enterprise was choreographed against her will; in classic RHIC-EDOM fashion, she had been hypnotized to accept his invitation; in her sleep before his phone-call, she believes, silent sound radio suggestions had ensured her unnatural receptivity and compliance.

Many years later he told her he had loaded her body with microchips that night. A lawyer she visited pulled out a syringe for insulin and, indicating the back of her neck, told her it would be as easy as that, to inject microchips into a body.

Before he left town that week in April 1999 after the fateful hotel stay, Wolf came by to her house and made the remark about “the software” being on his dad’s computer. His tone seemed to have become proprietorial overnight. “Put your girls out,” he said to her. “You are a loner now.” Later she wondered if he had also surreptitiously meant “loaner,” given that he was able to procure a grant in order to operate remotely on her body, if he had meant that in the sense of her being loaned or lent out, shared. Later, oddly enough, when she was studying in Ohio and experiencing various kinds of cyberhacking, she noticed emails she was writing were tampered with, her name on them changed from Millicent to Millilent—a coded way of saying she was being shared out? At time of going to press, pointedly, she notes, “This happened twice this week as well.”

Physical problems began to emerge shortly after that night in April, often the most unexpected. Millicent, who was then only 47, started to experience pain in both feet, localized in the little toes. Nothing would stop the pain, not rest, cold or hot compresses, topical ointments. A podiatrist offered to operate. Both toes were operated on the next year, with the middle bones removed. Pain at these sites recurred eight years later, and again in 2013, when X-rays revealed the presence of foreign objects in both toes, at the exact sites of the earlier surgery. Were these implants? She had not consented to any.

In recalling this surgery, Millicent reports that for years prior as well she had suffered from joint pains, in knees, hands. Years earlier she had had that carpal tunnel surgery on both hands, after experiencing acute symptoms—which she understands now can be induced remotely by precision radio weapons or Directed-Energy Weapons (DEWs). It makes her wonder whether she and others in Mt. Pleasant had been experimented on for years, without their knowledge. “We are right between two army bases, “ she says, “Redstone Arsenal, Huntsville, Alabama and Fort Campbell, Kentucky.” The implication being she and the whole town indeed had long become test subjects in a military experiment—as many others close to military and Air Force bases often attest.

After that night of endless repercussions in Columbia, for a year or so, Barrett, who was stationed then at Moody Air Force Base, called her often. He would tell her to open the door, then show up at her doorstep, with her always saying, “Why are you here?” She was told by a therapist friend this was classic hypnosis, triggered by key words; her own responses she felt were programmed post-hypnotic responses. As before, he made cryptic remarks he would not fully explain. “We are joined at the hip.” “We have the same chemistry.” “I want to teach you something new.” Sometimes, his statements were pointers: “Watch Hunt for Red October to know what I do for a living.” “I write sermons.” Once, he said, “I’m in Intelligence.”

For two summer months in 1999, Millicent attended a retreat in Auburn, Ohio, the Wellspring Retreat, which seeks to empower people undergoing spiritual or cult abuse. Millicent was then, she says, experiencing social betrayals and a sense of psychological abuse from close family while changing churches after her divorce, but wonders if she had been primed or hypnotically induced to attend this retreat by Wolf. Staff at the retreat worked on Mind Control issues at the spiritual level. Participants learned about thought reform and had classes in Mind Control de-programming. Millicent notes that they didn’t call it Mind Control and rejected that they were a deprogramming ministry, but their instruction, she said, was wholly valuable in that regard.

One thing they did was watch the film The Wave (1981) which highlighted the creative efforts of a young history teacher, Ron Jones, in 1967 Palo Alto, California, to bring Nazi Germany alive by demonstrating how whole communities could be persuaded into fascism. An extraordinary film, the “Wave” of voluntary consent to militaristic repression it highlights points up the ease with which people—in this case high school students—could be co-opted to snitch, surveill, censor, and repress others. The Wave rushing though the school was finally stopped only by the teacher himself—students, completely duped, were in shock. News articles and films memorialized the experiment, including this one: Remembering the Third Wave (Leslie Penfield, Peninsula Magazine, 1991), which references another famous psychology experiment: “Jones’ Third Wave also caught the attention of Stanford University psychologist Philip Zimbardo, whose famous prison experiment several years later resulted in college students lapsing into sadism and eventual emotional breakdown after being assigned the role of guard in prison.”

It was here in Wellspring that Millicent confided in a psychologist that she was confused about peculiar unsavory thoughts that seemed to be popping up in her brain, and was told, “The programming is in your brain-stem,” and where, later, another staff person suggested that she was being used as a guinea pig.

Questions of all kinds surface. How could they know this? Were they told that Millicent was a Mind Control research subject—something she herself had not been told, by anyone, nor given consent to being? And who told them? How was Wolf and this psychologist connected? Or were these covert programs just something this psychologist was fully aware about? Some amount of complicity seems evident.

A Round of Surgeries and Covert Implantation

A series of internal injuries and inflammation, physical mishaps, and corrective surgeries followed. Between 2000 and 2002, Millicent reports that she had five surgeries, and after each, she believes, more implants were placed in her body, non-consensually, during surgery.

In one of many detailed affidavits meticulously recording her experience, this one written in Englewood, Ohio and updated in September 2015,  speaking of the year 2001, Millicent writes:

“I remember having a spinal injection, to alleviate what I was told was a bulging disc in my neck. The physician seemed to be having a hard time “getting it” as he put it, this injection just happened to be at the base of my brain stem.” –Affidavit, Dr. Millicent Black, 9/24/2015

When covert implants made for operation sites stubborn to heal, they were dismissed by doctors as keloids, or calcification, or simply became invisible.

“It took me two surgeries to get my right shoulder repaired. After the second surgery, the surgeon referred to the “keloid” on my shoulder. I never keloid, and doesn’t it take them a while to form, not immediately after surgery?” – Affidavit, Dr. Millicent Black, 9/24/2015

After that surgery, in February 2001, as she drove down the highway, a brief moment of V2K or microwave hearing in a man’s voice alarmed her. “They can see through your eyes, quick, don’t read the signs.”

There was a left thumb surgery also in 2001, where the surgeon made an incision on her forearm that took six weeks longer than the operation site to heal, to “harvest a tendon” which he said he later discarded. But he left a tumid spot there. “I could feel something in there and still can, for it stays tender to touch.” She suspects a chip or a wire, part of a Body Area Network. Non-consensually implanted.

In 2017 she had a second thumb surgery to remove something that was implanted, although this something was not identified, and it is still being held at a medical facility until Millicent can afford to have a surgeon identify it.

Bi-lateral knee replacement surgery followed in 2002. Millicent later learned the artificial components of the knee implants could contain GPS monitoring devices. Radio-frequency transmissions were indeed recorded from both her knees on her 2015 scan.

Dental work on crowns in the late ’90s one time seemed to precede a peculiar circumstance, where, often, she was led to understand that each time she opened her mouth, strangers knew every word she spoke. She recalls this dentist inserting something in her mouth in accompaniment to a clove-like taste. It wasn’t till many years later when she had an unusual open-mouth X-ray done at a chiropractor’s office that the truth was revealed; this X-ray indisputably reveals a foreign object in her jaw, possibly a transponder, possibly implanted. (This X-ray has been viewed by this writer.)

Barrett Wolf would tell her one day, in 2008, via V2K, that “he was the instigator of those surgeries.” The hospital where these surgeries were mostly performed was linked by way of common professional pursuit with Vanderbilt University, which sought at one point to acquire it. What would any of this imply? That these hospitals—or certain professional medical staff working there, on her surgeries–were fully aware and themselves complicit in the further implantation of Dr. Millicent Black? It would appear so.

Physical Stalking and Remote Radiation

From 2010 on, Millicent noticed that Wolf was never more than a mile or two away from her, even though she moved occasionally between Mt. Pleasant and Columbia. Around 2001 he was stationed in Moody Air Force Base in Valdosta, Georgia and seemed to be moving closer to her. He indicated to her he wanted to resume a relationship with her but she had already told him she was not interested.

Regardless, he began to insinuate himself into her world, often dropping by at her house. Millicent recalls especially an occasion when he dropped by supposedly to take her youngest daughter out to dinner for her birthday but ended up taking the whole family out to see the movie, Training Day, a move that seemed significant much later, when he told her she was being used “to train a whole state.”

The greater bulk of her high-technology torture, with the activation of internal implants, directed-energy from satellites and cell towers, and radio frequencies being sent into her body began, she says, with a remarkable moment at her home, in Columbia in July 2003, in the middle of the night, when Barrett Wolf seemed to appear, in hologram form, as if in a dream, at the head of her bed. “This is whistleblower training,” he said. He was still working for the Air Force at this time.

(Five years later he was to show up at her daughter’s house in Columbia as if through an opened wormhole. This was after he retired from the Air Force. He announced himself, saying his name, as if wormholing in was a perfectly normal occurrence. He said he was from the Defense Intelligence Agency, he was a Commissioned Officer, and he had “permission” to do whatever he wanted to her.)

It was right after her daughters had moved out, she was alone at her own home in Columbia. At night she started to feel an intense, interior heat in her body, on certain areas. She woke inexplicably, several times a night, right in the middle of dreams. She soon began to feel sleep-deprived, waking continuously at night to a sense of electromagnetic pulsing on her body, her brain. She began to experience pain on different parts of her body, burning sensations, weakening of her bones and joints, sudden fatigue, migraines, anxiety attacks. Her hands and fingers sometimes moved by themselves. She began to go to doctors of all kinds for relief. She started to keep a journal.

A Round of Doctors and Specialists: Evidence of Radio Frequency Transmissions

Dr. Black was finishing up her Master’s degree then, a three-year program in Marriage and Family Therapy at Trevecca Nazarene University of Nashville.

In addition to physical attacks, she had started to experience psychological and social assaults, just as others covertly targeted with radiation weaponry today assert. A highly accomplished, civic-minded, and community-spirited person, she battled unemployment even as she experienced sudden withdrawals from previously congenial friends and colleagues, sudden isolation as a result.

High-tech voicing via synthetic telepathy or microwave hearing told her she didn’t fit in, she wasn’t a team player. As if in reassurance, a woman’s voice also told her nobody wanted her dead. She was offered that nugget about training in 2003, that she was being used to train a state, and if that is the case, she says, that would explain why the general public here would be afraid to speak out. Interestingly, she was told not to talk, although not what she wasn’t to talk about. All this via V2K.

She was not to live in her own home long. A series of circumstances converged to ensure that she lost her house in 2004, primary among them her inability to land lasting employment, thanks to being blacklisted everywhere.

She had already begun to visit the unemployment office in Columbia, before she lost her house. On a few occasions, remarkable events occurred.

Judy Vick, a County Commissioner who also worked at the Tennessee Department of Employment Security where Millicent went to find work, said “We did have a 1-year contract with a retired Air Force man,” after Millicent mentioned she was being stalked by a retired Air Force man. On her first visit in 2004, she went with a man, Kevin Gardner, who escorted her in, then went over and shook someone’s hand, a Larry X. The moment appeared to have peculiar import. Oddly, she felt as if she had been set up to go there. Later, at night, through synthetic telepathy, she heard the voice of this man, Larry X, say, “She’s going to lose her house.” Another time a woman said the person she came to see “had not tried RHIC as yet”–Rick or RHIC? Millicent did not get any further details because she says she was in a trance all those years, hypnotized into passivity.

Wolf dropped by often to sit and talk to her for hours, his voice a monotone—in retrospect she believes she was being conditioned to accept the sound of his voice, droning on, 24/7 in the back of her head, a circumstance that began to occur in August 2007, when he retired from the Air Force, when she was suddenly hit with audible V2K regularly every night. He told her she was going to become a girl again. He showed up in synthetic dreams streamed through her brain with a plastic bag on his head. By email he told her he was her only “pen-pal”. Later he told her by V2K that meant he was the only one who could read and write to her chip. He meant, her brain chip—the programmable one, non-consensually implanted in her brainstem.

After her house was foreclosed on, she moved to her daughter’s house, also in Columbia, not far from where she was, where, through all of 2005, she used tinfoil to shield the window and her head. The beams and pulses still came through, with the foil on her head and at the window becoming riddled with tiny holes. The furniture vibrated.

Hit with continuous radiation, often dizzy and fatigued, her knees assaulted, internal organs burning up, vague pains assaulting her every day, heart congested, sleep-deprived, Millicent embarked on a long round of visiting doctors and specialists: neurologists, hematologists, urologists, psychologists, neuro-psychologists, pulmonologists, orthopedic surgeons, gynecologists, endocrinologists, toxicologists, ENT specialists. She also visited Sleep specialists and enrolled in Sleep Studies twice, in 2011 and 2013, both in Tennessee and in 2013 in Ohio, where she moved when she began her doctoral studies in Christian Education and Social Justice at United Theological Seminary.

Driving from Dayton, Ohio to Columbia, Tennessee in 2013-15 every month to visit her family, she felt always as if incinerated from above, seeming to feel an intense beam of radiation—from a satellite or cell tower—locked alternately on her right jaw and pubic area, causing intense pain. The car seemed to vibrate. Her body vibrated too.

Slowly, she began to gather evidence for the panoply of covert assaults being carried out on her person. X-rays, MRIs, and radiological scans revealed implants or foreign objects in her jaw, her brain, and on 53 sites on her body. Orthopedic specialists noted that inflammation of her joints appeared to be occurring internally, as if imploding outward—as if emanating from a radio-frequency transponder implantable. Doctors often ignored what appeared as unidentifiable objects on scans, but here and there some made remarks acknowledging them.

What emerged from those sleep studies is especially significant. Both times, her sleep patterns were found to be highly irregular. The first study showed she was aroused 24 times an hour while she slept; in other words, the pattern of waves recorded as emanating from her brain showed spikes related to being-woken that many times—evidence of external radio transmissions to her brain, spiking in frequency from sleep state to alpha wake-up state, and used, Millicent says, to transmit spoken words directly into the auditory cortex in her brain, bypassing the ear. The second study in Ohio showed she was woken 49 times over six hours while she slept. The brief state of arousal during waking, says Millicent, calling on her undergraduate studies in Behavioral Science, is known to be a highly suggestible state.

Today, neuroimaging studies, mentioned here in this article by clinical psychologist Dr. Matthew Wheeler on states of consciousness, can demonstrate waking suggestibility in patients through EEGs and controlled experiments. Images, sounds, and other sensory data can also be inserted easier in this state. Hypnotists—and radio hypnotists—take advantage of this waking suggestibility as patients (or victims, as the case may be) are just waking, to insert suggestions, instructions, images into their subconscious. Millicent reports images and names being flashed into her mind during another liminal state, the dozing state just before falling asleep.

Another anomaly reported from her sleep study scans show dream-onset occurring rather rapidly, literally five minutes into sleep state, as opposed to the more normal 90-minute onset after falling asleep.

Electronic Slavery”: Which an Entire Town Consents To Condone

What is curious about Millicent’s experience is that the people around her, in the small rural community of Mt. Pleasant and in Columbia seemed to know exactly what was happening to Millicent, and why—even if she herself didn’t. Remarks made to her by family members suggested they had been actively deceived, in very deliberate ways, about Millicent’s character. In other words, they had been fed stories about her, and they had also been fed stories about what was being done to her. For they all seemed to know something was being done. But they didn’t seem to care.

A mutual cousin of hers and Barrett’s said to her at various times: “It’s about who’s you are. Your hands are tied. This is only for a season. Everything you say can be heard by others Kindly, at other times: “You’re fighting for your life. You’ve had way more than your share of it.” A former, very close friend said, “I know that every area of your life is being messed with–your financial life, your spiritual life, and your relationships. They want to make you fail!”

An aunt of Wolf’s said, aphoristically: Picked out to be picked on. She often said the name Barrett, with no explanation. “She and her daughter talked to each other about what was being “thought” in (Millicent’s) head in 1997-98.”

Those references were to the strange thoughts and images that had started to enter her brain, thoughts she had shared as unusual with the Wellspring Retreat psychologist, and with another Ohio psychologist who advised her to laugh at those thoughts, if she had never experienced distressing thoughts like those before, saying, “Of course you think there is a conspiracy against you, and you may be right.”

Another psychologist said to her, “Millicent you are going to know what it is like to be blamed for things you did not do and be blamed for it.” Someone else said, “You’ll be damned if you do and damned if you don’t, so just do the right thing.”

Barrett’s great-aunt told her she was “helping that boy” meaning Barrett.

A hand-written note from a co-worker to her in 2001 indicated that she was being exposed to radiation. Another co-worker named a person higher-up in the administration and said “he is telling us what to do to you.” Another said, “If you knew all that Vanderbilt has done to you, you won’t have to work another day in your life.”

Clearly her employers knew and were complicit. Vanderbilt was both her employer and owner/affiliate of hospitals where she had had surgeries, and where she suspected covert implantations had taken place. Vanderbilt, she learned first through Wolf, houses a NASA facility on its campus, and takes in millions of dollars in funding for neuroscience and mind control projects. NASA launches all satellites; were some being used for brain monitoring and mind control? The PBS series Brains on Trial, hosted by Alan Alda, profiled and consulted a Neuroscience and Law professor from Vanderbilt, Owen Jones, also profiled in this New York Times article by Jeffrey Rosen, Brain on a Stand.

Tiny details call out for connection. At Vanderbilt she had worked for a group of psychologists with a grant for what was called The Mind Project. Across from her home in Columbia, there was a house where a blue light was left burning on the porch night and day. New York license plates marked a car pulled into the driveway. She later learned, after a visual scan of her eye revealed a foreign object, a blue disc, inserted, with the toxicologist exclaiming that she had “the blue eye,” that blue light might have been a pointer to the Blue Brain project, a Swiss Brain Initiative which used the supercomputing facilities at Oak Ridge to run simulation modeling experiments in aid of brain mapping.

Recorded in a 2007 letter to the Senate Judiciary Committee, Dr. Black noted this information:

“Three things I heard while on the campus of my former employer (via voice-to-skull technology) before I was terminated during medical leave.

    1. We cannot afford to allow you to hurt our funding.
    2. Anybody can call the 800 number to report you as a terrorist. (This was just after 911 and just after the Patriot Act took effect.)
    3. Nobody will risk losing their retirement, their job, or their family for you. (They implied that bribes and blackmail would be used to gain cooperation.)”

Also noted is insight into the insidiousness of the brain scanning technologies being used against her:

“To my face, a co-worker, who had been brought in over me to wreak havoc in my department made light of my plans to contact Johnny Cochran for help. I had not breathed that idea to anyone. She could have only acquired that knowledge by using technology to read my thoughts, either brain-computer link or brain-brain link, both of which are violations which prove that an employee would not stand a chance of any kind of plans to fight injustices or abuse of the institution.”

Many years later, her sister let her in on a secret. Early in these operations of secrecy and covert assault on her, her family, including her mother, sister, and daughters, had been called in to a meeting by Wolf’s sister at Chief of Police Tommy Goetz’ place. It was a briefing meeting, and to this day, Millicent does not know exactly what was said; it appeared the participants were sworn to secrecy. Her own family refused to tell her what had actually transpired. Snippets let fall here and there apprised her they were questioned on what they knew about Millicent’s complaint about Wolf. She had been referred to as “crazy” by the police Chief. Earlier, her brother had told her Wolf had a five-inch dossier on her. What could this possibly be? Wolf had let slip that he was framing her–possibly with images he sent to the read-write chip, as stalking him. Was he framing her in other ways? She did not know. But her family cued her in: some kind of weird Behavior Modification experiment was being carried out on her.

She recalls something her mother said to her, as if reassuringly: “Mother said there is no way you could have killed Ida.” Ida was her five-month-old baby sister who died in her crib directly after a vaccination. Millicent had been four years old at the time, and loved her baby sister. Was it possible she was now being framed for the death of that infant child, at the age of four? Her own suspicion, filled with angst at this intimate betrayal from her closest family, who were being turned against her by a man with apparent “official” backing against her: “They’ve been told, this is an investigation and if you interfere you can go to jail.”

Something else that stood out comes to her mind. There was a day when she came home and found her windows unlocked. Millicent was told by Wolf later via V2K that her sister had given her house key to Barrett Wolf, saying Wolf was “making the house safe for her” in terms of what was going to be done to her.

Safe or unsafe? In 2003, when she first began to be hit with directed-energy weapons, radiation burning through her skin, she was told via V2K or microwave hearing or whatever synthetic technology put voices in her brain: We had to make people hate you in order to do to you what we wanted to. We had to lie to get it started and lie to keep it going. If they believe one lie, they’ll believe them all. People would rather believe a lie than the truth.” At that time Wolf had been making uninvited and unwanted visits to Millicent’s home beginning in 1999.

That day when he was permitted by her sister to enter her house and, she suspected, change around the wiring—which she did not learn about until many years later–what had he really done? Barrett Wolf was an electrician by training, a HVAC/R (Heating Venting Air-Conditioning/Refrigeration) specialist in the Air Force. Millicent reports that she frequently felt as if she was standing in an electromagnetic field in her home, or held in a broad beam of sizzling, low-voltage electric current.

In 2004 Barrett Wolf popped up at her house only once that she can remember. On this occasion, he took her out on a drive to look at some property he said he wanted to buy. On that drive he said a few things she never forgot. “I deal in body bags,” he said. A little later he turned to her in the car and said, without preamble, “Electronic Slavery.”

In 2003, Jerome Dobson, Geography researcher who helped develop the GIS or Geographic Information System, published an article titled Geoslavery with Peter Fisher, founder of the IEEE, in an issue of the IEEE magazine, where he talked about the dangers of these tracking and location technologies in the wrong hands.

“By combining GIS technology with a global positioning system (GPS) and a radio transmitter and receiver, someone easily can monitor your movements with or without your knowledge. Add to that a transponder — either implanted into a person or in the form of a bracelet — that sends an electric shock any time you step out of line, and that person actually can control your movements from a distance.

….One of the greatest dangers of geoslavery is that it doesn’t apply just to governments. For example, individuals could use the technology to perpetuate various forms of slavery, from child laborers to sex slaves to a simple case of someone controlling the whereabouts of his or her spouse, Dobson said.

“Many people have concerns today about privacy but they haven’t put all the pieces together and realized this means someone can actually control them — not just know about them, but control them,” Dobson said.

As the price of these products gets cheaper and cheaper, the likelihood rises that the technology will be abused, he said.”KU researcher warns against potential threat of ‘geoslavery’, Ranjit Arab, March 5, 2003, University Relations

Clandestine Surgeries: Without Consent, Without Consciousness

Few people know that the CIA is not the only agency conducting clandestine Intelligence operations, both domestically in the US and globally.

“But the CIA has not been operating alone in the sphere of human intelligence. Throughout the Cold War and beyond, the Department of Defense and the military services have also conducted HUMINT operations…the most important DoD issuance was the April 20, 2012, memo (Document 50) signed by Secretary of Defense Leon Panetta establishing the Defense Clandestine Service (DCS).”The Pentagon’s Spies, Jeffrey Richardson

“On April 20, 2012, Secretary of Defense Leon Panetta formally established a new Department of Defense spy organization — the Defense Clandestine Service (DCS). That memo marked yet another in the multiple starts, stops, and reversals in the human intelligence activities of the Department of Defense and the military services. The defense community’s rocky history of involvement with HUMINT includes both war-related and non-war missions, overt and covert programs, conflicts with Congress over the lack of transparency, and inevitable bureaucratic tensions among the uniformed services.” — The Pentagon’s Spies/Newly Available Documents Trace Evolution of Spy Units through Obama Administration/National Security Archive Electronic Briefing Book No. 520/Updated – July 6, 2015

Is it possible that Barrett Wolf was engaging in clandestine actions under a Defense contract with a Defense agency? Or perhaps, with multiple agencies? Twice he told Millicent he was with the DIA. On several occasions he informed Millicent via V2K that he was running a research project.

In early 2012, in Mt. Pleasant, via synthetic telepathy, he said to her: “I’ve made millions off of you. You’re the best little moneymaker I’ve ever had.” Several days after that she was told, “I have framed you twice.” In Dayton, Ohio, he informed her he had framed her four or five times with his subliminal radio messaging broadcasting (to the whole town), which she notes also is Psychological Operations.

In a recent email sent April 18, 2017, Millicent writes:

“I was just awakened to hear Barrett Wolf V2k say that I was cleared of everything in 2004. Which is why my brother told me I would get back everything I had lost. But this horror has gone on and on since Barrett retired in 2007 and started what seems to be his racketeering business using me for training perpetrators. He’s not only sold me but the entire County, only most people get to have normal lives and don’t know that he’s killing them slowly. They all know what he’s doing to me. And people are waiting for him to be exposed.”

Non-Consensual Clandestine Heart Surgery and Implantation

The term “clandestine” in military parlance apparently goes beyond “covert,” into the realm of active deception to conceal all evidence of. In other words, when the Clandestine Services swing into action, they feel entitled to deny any hint of their existence, let alone involvement, or technology—and possibly, draw all co-opted and collaborative parties they solicit into their intricate web of deceit.

Millicent woke up once in March 2008 to the sound of Wolf’s voice inside her head, using military synthetic telepathy to say, “I need you to lie on your right side for eight hours. You have just had heart surgery.” There was a 4-inch-long incision on her chest. She had no memories of this surgery. Was something implanted clandestinely in or near her heart?

She could not investigate this scar immediately for lack of health insurance. She had applied for disability benefits through Social Security years before, after incessant attacks by Wolf on her knees and hips had disabled her to the point where she was unable to work a permanent full-time job.

In 2009, she finally received health insurance and other disability benefits; astonishingly, the woman processing her case at Social Security told her she had been approved way back in 2002, the delay must have been with her State. She had been cut off at the County level—why? Was Maury County, Tennessee involved in this covert research project on her body? Why had they withheld Millicent’s disability benefits for seven years?

Another question must be raised here: Was Vanderbilt University involved in withholding her benefits, deliberately? Millicent says, “ If I had gotten disability in 2002, Vanderbilt would have had to pay me my full salary of $45,000 per year. Not getting it then dropped my benefits to just over $14,400 per year in 2009…So, the difference between 2002 and 2009 in me getting SSDI was it forced me to take a lower settlement from Vanderbilt. I was terminated while recovering from bi-lateral knee replacement surgery in 2002 and my worker’s comp. lawsuit did not settle for almost a year later.” (Millicent had been compelled to sue her employer, Vanderbilt University, because they would not cover the cost of a right shoulder surgery for an injury sustained on the job.)

Three doctors she later consulted agreed the line near her heart was a surgical scar. Much equivocation attended their remarks however, for none would venture that her heart had been operated on in any way, and all suggested issues with her lungs instead. Except for the first, her own doctor, who referred her to a cardiologist and suggested a scan. In April 2012, an “artifact” was found in the basal wall of her heart by a nuclear cardiac scan accompanying a stress test monitored by this cardiologist. Her general physician asked her to go back to this cardiologist and ask him to remove it. When she did, she now found him taking two steps back; he now told her she was “delusional”–despite the fact that he himself had documented the presence of an “artifact” embedded in her heart. Had the covert agencies Wolf was working for visited him, perhaps?

A new primary doctor she saw confirmed the scar and sent her to an imaging facility to get an MRI where they did a CT (Computerized Tomography) scan of her chest. They found some measurable “nodules” in her lungs and also a “nodule” in her heart and a “nodule” in her spleen. Additionally, a pulmonologist she saw in Dayton, Ohio monitored her lungs, measuring breathing rates and air volume. On a CT lung scan shown to her on a monitor, she saw several “nodules” in the lung itself, in the center.

The toxicologist she later consulted said these were actually implants. Her primary doctor said the same thing: If the human body is invaded by an implant, it builds tissue around it which then ends up as a calcification nodule.

On another occasion, she remembers hearing a woman’s voice, in the middle of the night, saying to her, “You need to forget.” When she woke the next morning she found a red bump on her right arm which looked “like a needle prick, as if something had been injected into (her) body.” She has woken at other times to find needle marks on her body, as if someone had entered her home at night and “shot chemicals into (her) body.”

She was treated to another appearance of Wolf telling her he was going to remove a chip from her right ear, in “tele-surgery.” Literally she says, a wormhole opened in her room and an ethereal version of Wolf, seemingly reaching from another dimension into this one, reached down to operate on her ear—something he was surely not medically licensed to do!

The most egregious holographic display she recalls was tied not to surgery, but rape.

“In early 2007, (Wolf) was in another holographic display at the foot of my bed watching while I was being raped by five men. This time (Wolf) was standing next to a white man looking at what was being done to me. The synthetic telepathic message that was sent to me was, ‘Every man that you have ever said NO to will have his way with you.'” —Affidavit, Dr. Millicent Black, 2/24/14

Were these experiences real or virtual? Millicent has woken, she says, to find her private parts “swollen shut.” Is this sexual enslavement and sex trafficking, then, in addition to everything else?

In a recent email sent on May 22, 2017, Millicent writes, speaking of remote electronic access to women:

“In 2008 Barrett Wolf said he had sex with most of his victims and all he had to do was put himself inside them. He doesn’t want them to have an orgasm and seems to pride himself at leaving a woman hanging. He picks women up at churches, and even has been seen at a brothel in Nashville. He spoke of just putting himself inside my youngest child telling her that he would save my life for her letting him do that to her.”

SERE Torture Training & the MK ULTRA Connection

In the course of her anguished, extensive quest to find out more about what was being done to her and why, Millicent filed a FOIA request for Barrett Wolf’s Discharge Document from the Air Force. This document, on a generic form DD-214, was sent to her redacted of personal detail but fully recording the kind of training he had received.

Wolf’s DD-214 records, among other details, that Wolf, noted to have HVAC/R certifications and NCO (Non-Commissioned Officer) leadership school certifications, was a trained Airborne Morse Systems Operator, and held Global War on Terrorism medals, which suggests, Millicent notes, that Wolf worked in Signals Intelligence and was trained in radar sensing and Electronic Warfare weaponry of the kind being used on her. Morse Code is used in electronic brain communications, and is a feature of synthetic telepathy, as per patents.

Another aspect of his training reads as significant–Basic Survival Training, Special Survival Training, Water Survival Training, and Physiological Training, at Fairchild Air Force Base in Washington State.

Air Force Survival training is SERE training, where soldiers and airmen are put through a program of simulated capture and interrogation under extreme conditions of heat, cold, sleep-deprivation, hunger, thirst, and yes, waterboarding in order to put into practice Survival, Evasion, Resistance, and Escape techniques being imparted to them. Military veterans and current enlistees have published a few articles online and left comments on message boards variously praising and decrying this intensive program.

This analysis of what SERE training leads to, in terms of a military force accepting of torture, and with reference to the depredations at Abu Ghraib, offers insights into the psychological effects of SERE training:

“..the problem with SERE extends far beyond its questionable relevance to the threats that the war on terrorism pose to American soldiers. The school, which all pilots and special-forces soldiers attend, unintentionally serves to legitimize the use of torture by U.S. personnel in the field. In at least one documented case, special-forces soldiers in Afghanistan modeled their interrogations on the SERE training they received. The unit, the “20th Special Force Group,” forced prisoners to kneel outside in wet clothing and repeatedly kicked and punched prisoners in the kidneys, knees, and nose if they moved, resulting in the death of one detainee, according to Mayer’s book.

The experience of torture at SERE surely plays a role in the minds of the graduates who go on to be interrogators, and it must on some level help them rationalize their actions. It’s not hard to imagine them thinking,Well, if I survived this, then it’s OK to do it to this guy. This acceptance of abuse from up high down to the lowest levels is the root of our military’s torture problem.”                                                                  –David A. Morris, Cancel Waterboarding 101, Slate.com

Torture and abuse during interrogation as a pretend-POW are highlighted here in this remembrance of SERE training by a Naval flight officer, and illustrate how stress positions, verbal abuse, and solitary confinement combine to demoralize pretend-detainees. The horrors of waterboarding, submitted to voluntarily by Vanity Fair writer Christopher Hitchens seem to delineate essentially its ability to wreak false confessions from tortured subjects.

SERE training is also understood to have given rise to the Enhanced Interrogation techniques used by the CIA, DIA, and DoD at black sites around the world including Bagram, Guantanamo, and Abu Ghraib. In fact the two USAF psychologists John “Bruce” Jessen and James Mitchell, notorious now for the $81 million they were paid by the CIA to develop a torture menu which included waterboarding, sleep-deprivation, sexual abuse, and humiliation, drew on classic SERE techniques.

“The Senate Intelligence Committee report explained the CIA did not use experienced interrogators to design their program. Instead they turned to experts in SERE. This is a training program meant to prepare Air Force pilots and other personnel to deal with capture. According to the Senate report, SERE “exposes select US military personnel to, among other things, coercive interrogation techniques that they might be subjected to if taken prisoner by countries that did not adhere to Geneva protections.”The US Military’s Forgotten Sex-Abuse Scandal That Foretold CIA Torture in the War on Terror, Solomon Hughes/Vice, March 4, 2015

Ironically, it appears US Torture was now coming full circle—from the CIA to the CIA—since SERE techniques can be traced to the CIA’s MK ULTRA and Project Artichoke programs, with their emphasis on sensory deprivation and psychological isolation, according to Wisconsin History Professor Alfred McCoy:

“They (Mitchell and Jenssen) were the latest in a long history of American and Canadian psychologists helping the CIA design its interrogation protocols. This is an extraordinarily long history that goes back to 1951, when the CIA, in alliance with British and Canadian psychologists, set out to crack the code of human consciousness. And they worked with a very famous Canadian psychologist named Donald O. Hebb. And he conducted a series of experiments from 1951 to ’54 that discovered the basic concept of sensory deprivation or sensory disorientation, which, when you read the Senate report, that is the core of the CIA’s tactics.” —Professor Alfred McCoy, After Duo Created CIA Torture Methods, Did World’s Largest Psychological Group Enable Abuses?/Democracy Now, December 16, 2014

Sensory deprivation experiments that Hebb set up, in their turn, can be traced back to Dachau, and were pursued by Hebb for a certain quality found to be very attractive to CIA scientists, that of suggestibility to external influence—exposing here rather explicitly the link to classic hypnosis, and eventually leading forward, via MK ULTRA’s SubProject 119 EMF experiments, to mind control via radio hypnosis:

“Dr. Donald O. Hebb, chief of DRB Behavioral Research and chair of Psychology at McGill, whose experiments using extreme sensory deprivation laid the foundation for a new paradigm for psychological torture. In March 1951, the CIA initiated a “top secret” research program — ARTICHOKE — to study “all aspects of special interrogation”— CIA’s euphemism for torture.

McCoy reports that according to minutes of the Montreal meeting (1951), Hebb spoke at length, suggesting that: “sensory isolation might lead to some clues” “intervention in the individual mind together with methods concerned in psychological coercion.” Hebb suggested that by “cutting off all sensory stimulation . . . the individual could be led into a situation whereby ideas, etc. might be implanted.” (McCoy, Science in Dachau’s Shadow, 2007, p. 404)/From 1951: CIA’s psychological torture is rooted in experiments at Dachau, Project ARTICHOKE & MK-ULTRA, Alliance for Human Research Protections

It is significant that at the start of the invasive program of physical torture Millicent has been subjected to, Wolf announced he was from the DIA and that this was “whistleblower training.” While his meaning there can only be guessed at—did he mean DIA recruits were made to witness or participate in such torture in unsubtle warning of what they themselves could expect if they whistleblew?—he was more explicit by V2K many years later in 2015, when he told Millicent he had expected to re-enter her life in 1988 and “that he planned to start his plan to destroy (her) with his SERE training.” It was the 11th of August, 2015, and Millicent, who has kept impeccable journals of all her experiences, documented that statement in a text to a friend.

Early in his assault, to Millicent, he said, “You don’t know how to conduct yourself during an investigation.” One year in, he said directly to her while she was in his car: “It’s a test and you’re not doing too well right now.” In the same breath, he spoke to her about buying and selling graves and cemetery plots, and said “You’re going to pass.”

Further disclosure trickled in a few years later. By V2K in 2008 he said he had told his mother he could kill someone in front of her and get away with it. He said he was going to show his family everything he could do that he learned in the military. He wanted to do interrogations by hypnosis, he said, he would let others do the physical things, the things that Directed-Energy Weapons let them do: irradiate bodies, burn bodies, create lesions, scars, scratches. V2K said, “The boys have new toys.” Was this a reference to local Law Enforcement receiving military-grade surveillance and assault weaponry under new DOD/DOJ agreements? Or was it a reference to having access to a BCI-CBI system, a satellite, a radio station? In a journal entry, Millicent also considers the possibility that “toys” meant “victims” as in new victims to toy with. When she wrote to Senator John McCain in 2006 on the subject of torturing detainees, including her own account, the senator ignored the personal account and responded virtuously on the general subject. At this time, V2K responded too: “The torturers declared to me: ‘we didn’t mean no harm,’ ‘we were just playing.’”

Referencing the 2008 report, Broken Laws, Broken Lives, on “Medical Evidence of Torture by US Personnel and Their Impact” by Physicians for Human Rights (P4HR), as well as the statement presented in 2007 to the Senate Select Committee on Intelligence by P4HR member Allen S. Keller, MD, Associate Professor of Medicine at New York University (NYU) and Director of the Bellevue/NYU Program for Survivors of Torture, Millicent notes the close relation of radio frequency weapon assault and neurological assault as practiced by Wolf on her body and brain to the methodologies of torture noted therein.

Stress positions, violent shaking, electric shocks, sensory deprivation, sexual humiliation, waterboarding all have been imposed on her in counterpart, she says, citing being forced to sit in a car for long periods (seemingly in a hypnotized trance as she obeyed Wolf’s directives to check on her granddaughter while her daughter was away, yet not being permitted to enter the house, and forced to stay in her car for hours instead), violent shaking of her car, shocks on various parts of her body, overwhelming of her nervous system and brain with the continuous signals of radio hypnosis even during sleep, constant synthetic telepathy (V2K) of an abusive, sexual nature, remote sexual assault, and radio frequency transmissions to close airways and invoke sensations of suffocation, as being the electronic equivalent of “enhanced interrogation” methods of the kind the SERE trainers used, and the CIA subsequently used.

No less shocking and no less violatory of international human rights conventions and treaties, the remotely-invoked atrocities she has suffered, she notes, most certainly warrant the selfsame label of Torture.

The Killing Fields of Tennessee

There is yet another facet to the treatment visited on Millicent by Wolf. Several factors point openly to the possibility of Wolf being an unhinged serial killer with an unhealthy inclination to torture women and children especially but also men—who is actually being supported in this by the Federal or military agency supporting his research grant. He has openly and via V2K confessed to her that he has been responsible for the death of many from their large extended family, and many in their town. He has also made several statements to the effect that he has the names of over 2000 people in his computer that he is using as targets to pursue till death, and is constantly looking for new victims.

9-15-2015: Barrett Wolf V2K says he gets paid to put cancer on me and paid to get the cancer off. Yesterday he said he sends them a ticket whenever he kills someone. In 2008 he said his computer holds 2000 people and he’s constantly getting some out by killing them, and picking up women to put in it as he sets them up to torture them. He said (…)

9-16-2015: (…) (t)hat’s what he did with the volunteer 5th Grade class at Mt. Pleasant Middle School. Chose the ones he wanted to succeed and discard the rest.Journal of Millicent Black, 2015

There is further evidence from V2K that Barrett Wolf is in reality “broadcasting” and radio-hypnotizing large swaths of the populace of Mt. Pleasant, including children at different schools.

He said he started taking over all the people who had ever gone to the all-black Clarke Training School in Mt. Pleasant, TN.” Email, May 2017, Dr. Black

Millicent believes he is responsible for her father’s death, and says she witnessed occasions when it appeared her father was being tortured as she was. She has also witnessed scars and similar evidence of torture on her mother’s body, and feels certain her children have also been tortured by Wolf. He once told her it was easier to take over the minds of children, and that he had been inside her younger daughter’s mind since she was five. Suspicions that he may indeed have been hypnotizing her child for years in the same way as herself, with radio hypnosis, were confirmed for her in 2001 when he called her now grown-up daughter one night and asked her to make dinner for him, by this time a virtual stranger to her household, and, unquestioningly, she did—as if she had been used, Millicent says, to the tenor and voicing of directives from him inside her head, for years.

Over the years Millicent began to notice the abruptness and seeming inexplicability of deaths in her family, which appeared to mushroom about her. Great-aunts, aunts, cousins, uncles, all suddenly “dropped dead.” Wolf seemed to show up at all the funerals, often making it a point to make himself noticeable, standing or seated in front of the choir she sang in.

Between 2009 and 2011, Wolf’s V2K openly took credit for seven deaths around Millicent, explicitly stating that her support system was being cut from around her: her ex-mother-in-law, a close, long-time friend, an aunt more beloved than her mother, a close cousin, other relatives. Two of them died three days after surgery, one from a heart attack. Others died from sudden cancers, one supposedly from one-year-long Lyme Disease which suddenly killed her. Later the uncle of another rape victim of Wolf’s–the one he date-raped and got pregnant, then abandoned: “(Barrett) said he killed him before I could give him documents that would protect Sheila (name changed).”

It must be noted here that microwave weapons have long been known to cause sudden and invasive cancers, while remote radiation heart attack weapons, explored here in this article on the possibly targeted deaths of holistic doctors, could well be classified Air Force and CIA technology.

In 2008 via subliminal messaging at night, he made the statement that he could kill his own family. Two years later, his dad died of lung problems. When my grandson was 4 years old, Barrett said he was giving him the same kind of lung problems his dad died with.

Below is my family who have died, I suspect, by murder using military technology. Not included is my stepdaughter and uncle–married my mother’s sister, who both dropped dead. My stepdad died while I was on holiday in Ohio in 1998, and my uncle died right after I had knee replacement surgery in 2002.” – Email, May 19, 2017, Dr. Millicent Black

“This morning he has been bragging about how he brought the whole county into what he was doing to me so that he could mess over them the rest of their lives in case any of them were to tell on him. In 2008, he explained how he got rid of the men, including his grandmother’s brothers so that he could control the women. In 2010, his dad died. Barrett said via V2K that he knew he would tell on him.” –2/28/2017, Email, Dr. Millicent Black

Reverend James Walker was the only person who invited Wolf to a meeting at the church with Millicent in order to find out whether he was indeed stalking her as Millicent had informed him earlier, to get to the bottom of it with Wolf. Wolf did not show up at this proposed meeting, and in January 2014, about three years later, Walker died of induced heart trouble.

This afternoon I was thinking of how Mother said that Barrett Wolf was the devil in 2007 and Barrett Wolf V2K spoke up and said, that’s why I took her out of herself. He had said when she had thyroid surgery in 2007 that he had killed her. At best he put her in a deep trance and had her cash in her life insurance.” — 9/16/2015, The Journal of Millicent Black

When I was in the library, Barrett Wolf V2K was bragging about how he killed Judy Durden (name changed) in 2011. He said he was heating her body as she walked around the house. When she sat down by the wall, he said he heated her until all her organs were bursted. He says he did this with his thinking while he lay in bed at Vanderbilt Hospital.” –4:30 pm, 11/25/2015, The Journal of Millicent Black

Barrett Wolf V2K says he’s been killing people the way he’s doing me forever. –5:27 am, 11/26/2015, The Journal of Millicent Black

“This same person who is or uses the voice of Barrett Wolf told me this morning that he killed my cousin Eric Lyles (nephew of former Columbia Police Lieutenant Lonnie Lyles) to keep me around Tennessee so he can pick on me. Often, I am forced to hear of people he says he murdered, perhaps with MEDUSA, which has a beam that can be used to kill, or with the microwave or other frequencies that are used to assault me.” – Email, July 6, 2015, to Mt. Pleasant, TN and Englewood, OH Police Departments, Dr. Millicent Black

Many threats were directed her way, via V2K. “You kill people with your mouth,” indicating that people around her would be killed and she herself blamed if she started talking about what was being done to her. She was also told that if she continued her routines of visiting her aunt and visiting the sick, someone would be killed and she would be blamed for it.

“He’s talked about how he promised people in Maury Co. that he would give me $1M for using me, this was in the 90’s, then turned around and threatened to kill anyone who tells on him after 2007. He now tells me that he’s been killing anyone who he thinks will tell on him.” –9/18/2015, The Journal of Millicent Black

Research Projects and DOD/NASA Funding: How Universities are Also Involved

“They gave you to me.” The unmistakeable voice of Wolf, on a confession stint. Barrett Wolf started at Nellis Air Force Base in 1999, says Millicent, and was there, she believes, when he wrote a grant proposal and secured a contract in 2008, after his retirement from the Air Force in 2007. According to Wolf, it was a 3-million-dollar grant. He said he set up his family to watch her. Apparently he also said to various church elders, relatives, and friends, that he would fully reimburse Millicent to the tune of one million dollars at the end of his test on her, a statement that seems to have been believed by many. A few went so far as to openly ask her not to forget them when the million came in.

“4:23 am. Awakened from an electronic dream with Barrett Wolf V2K talking in my head and broadcasting in the air. He says he has been getting paid to do this to me which was already established. He says he signed the grant for the first $3M back in the ’90s and he used the money to set me up, then to set his family up to help him monitor me. He taught them how to scan my body without my permission. He said this in 2008 and yesterday. He keeps saying that he’s doing me exactly as he planned.” —9/17/2015, The Journal of Millicent Black

Wolf, who now works for the GSA (General Services Administration), had given her a business card when he visited her in 2003 while at Moody Air Force Base in Georgia, which said Vision Properties, Inc. on it, with a Post Office Address sited at Moody Air Force Base. Among the discoveries made by a private investigator, an environmental scientist with training in SCADA (Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition) detection, were two small, iridescent discs in Millicent’s eyes, detected in ultraviolet light with her lower eyelids pulled down, in the area of the sclera (white of the eye), with an area of bruising close-by. Millicent often says she has a camera implanted in her right eye, and has been told that everything she sees is picked up and broadcast (just as everything she says and hears is being broadcast, she says—evidence for which claim was indeed found in the possible transponder detected by X-ray in her jaw). Also found in UV light is a unique turquoise hue at the rim of her pupil, which an industrial toxicologist reports as being related to nano systems using quantum dot dyes to detect DNA protein changes indicative of cancer.

Also found by the environmental scientist are thirty-six sites on her body that appeared to be receiving specific radio signals in a certain range, which could be postulated to be the sites of implanted microchip transceivers, and which included a number of wave guide signals, which the toxicologist relates again to the kind of nano robotics technology used currently or being explored currently in endoscopy, in the detection of neuro degeneration in brain diseases like ALS (Amylotrophic Lateral Sclerosis), and in abdominal pain and gastrointestinal disease monitoring. Wave guide signals from specific bodily locations also relate to nanosensors used to stimulate the skin, to restore blood pressure, and to monitor cell membranes.

It is remarkable that the particular signals detected on Millicent’s body can be related to biosensor and nanosensor technology currently in use or under research, reported today also in scientific papers that exist both online in the public domain and on special-access academic and science sites. Nanotechnology is an exploding universe of possibilities currently and is being used in all sorts of industries, including the health industry and the surveillance industry. Links between University research conducted in robotics, artificial intelligence, bio-electronics, nanotechnology, and the medical and forensic sciences are made evident in papers published by researchers.

Notable in the toxicologist’s findings are signals at her knees related to paramagnetic materials used to create superconductivity rings utilized in nano and micro SQUIDs (Super-conducting Quantum Interference Devices–magnetometers used to measure highly subtle magnetic fields), and which can be activated by microwave transmissions. The biosensors found in Millicent’s body, by virtue of the specific wave guide signals they are identified by, relate to implantable radio-telemetry systems using a network of sensors for remote diagnostic monitoring, as reported in research papers on this subject, including one authored by Pierre Valdostri, Chief of Robotics and AI at Vanderbilt University.

Notably, Vanderbilt, where Millicent worked, and whose hospitals are plausibly implicated in covert implantation during surgeries she has had, also has a connection with NASA, who has a facility on the Vandy campus, something Wolf informed Millicent about, back in 2008. Further, the toxicologist’s report concludes that Millicent is being exposed to nano CMOS (Complimentary Metal Oxide Semiconductor) systems using a software interface with mobile and satellite transmissions.

Does this suggest—or essentially prove–non-consensual research and experimentation by Vanderbilt and NASA on Millicent’s body? The signals measured on her body certainly point to the reception of those specific microwave signals used for those specific radio-telemetry implantable systems. And all use of her body is certainly non-consensual: Millicent states in affidavits and verbal testimony that she did not at any time consent to having her body used for research of any kind.

There is more. Recorded as being received on Millicent’s body also are several high-frequency radio signals in the 2670 MHz range, which have been traced by FCC frequency allocation tables to tropospheric scatter signals linked to US military and air force bases in Azerbaijan, Kyrgyzstan and Turkmenistan, as well as specific Universities and University consortia—namely, Princeton, Stanford, Vanderbilt, the White Rose Research consortium, and specific companies, MITRI Systems, and Corning, Inc. (Tropospheric scatter is a specific means of transmitting certain ranges of microwave signals from one point on the Earth to another, using the natural scatter mechanisms of ions in the troposphere, from Low Earth Orbit of 22,000 miles and above, to do so.) These frequencies have also been found to be separately associated as SCADA (Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition) frequencies with a cluster of school systems scattered across the country as well as with the Northern Arizona University Foundation, associated with NASA-run educational research programs such as the Arizona Space Grant and the STEM program both of which involve schools in research in a variety of sciences.

Is it possible that Millicent has been and is being used and exploited non-consensually by a plethora of Universities, Defence organizations, NASA, and partnering school systems for robotics, bio-electronics, endoscopic (disease detection), and radio-telemetry research, not just one? Is she being used non-consensually for cancer-detection and brain-disease-detection research, using nano bio sensors?

Nanobiosensors, their history and use in cancer detection are meticulously explained in this comprehensive 2007 article by Priya Pathak, V.K. Katiyar, and Shibashish Giri, Cancer Research – Nanoparticles, Nanobiosensors and Their Use in Cancer Research. Apparently, nanobiosensors used in medical monitoring offer the same kind of SCADA (Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition) systems used in industrial control systems, and can be hacked, as this article details.

Which suggests therefore that an inescapable aspect of these findings must be spelled out: the non-consensual implantation of such invasive nanosensors and bio-MEMS offers the opportunity, not just for remote diagnostic monitoring of phsyiological status, but for remote accessing, hacking, activation, and injuring of organs, joints, and tissues, in modalities essentially of Torture, by such “Principal Investigator” psychopaths as Barrett Wolf, which—as evidenced by her medical records of internal bruising, bleeding, inducement of pain, and tissue deterioration—is indeed exactly what she is reporting.

Medical and Psychological Evaluations Support Dr. Black’s Claims

As a critical side-note, succeeding the radio frequency scanning and toxicology analyses that Dr, Black has undergone, which have proved both implantation and exposure to nanobiotechnology and microcircuitry, she also underwent neurospychology and psychology evaluations from experts in these specific fields, and was found by a psychologist to be not merely perfectly sane but “emotionally grounded, self-actualizing, rational and living with purpose.”

A physician and electronics engineer with experience in examining individuals with similar presentation, who evaluated all her studies and medical evidence, collected over the years, has attested to the fact that the kind of multi-organ distress Dr. Black has reported could indeed be inflicted by hyperstimulation of nanotechnology and microcircuitry embedded in human tissue, which is indeed what she is reporting.

Despite the daily suffering Dr. Black has been non-consensually subjected to, the psychologist notes that she found Dr. Black, as this writer can gladly attest, “very intelligent, fully attentive and engaged, non-histrionic, serious regarding details of her complaints and ongoing physical debilities, savvy to current affairs, and having rational informed opinions regarding subjects of electronic surveillance and harassment, consistently pleasant in demeanor, and logical in outlook.” Indeed, Dr. Black’s warmth and intelligence may currently be experienced live, as she converses with other members of the Joint Investigation Team on Google Hangouts at the Techno Crime Forums on Thursdays at World Beyond Belief.

Reports, Complaints, Pleas for Help—and the Response from Police, FBI, Church Elders, Senators, Domestic Violence Network, United Nations

One of the most extraordinary aspects of Millicent’s experience, along with the fact that she has been outstandingly pro-active in reaching out to complain to police, FBI, Senators, State Representatives, human rights groups, church elders, military personnel, Air Force bases, is the fact that so many she spoke to have confirmed and corroborated her experience with disclosures of their own.

Census Bureau, Military Police, FCC, AT & T Awareness of Implants, Remote Neural Monitoring, Microwave Weapon Use on Civilians

A Federal investigator from the Census Bureau told Millicent in Mt. Pleasant, after hearing her story in 2011, that Barrett Wolf was a bald-faced liar, that he was not a commissioned officer, not DIA, he was not running a real investigation, he did not have clearance to do these things to her. “If this were a real investigation, it would have been done within three days,” he said. He named two missiles that could be used “to get him out of the air.”

A US Marshall in Nashville told Millicent in 2013 that Barrett Wolf just wanted “to control y’all.”

Sergeant Geoffrey Taylor, of the Mt. Pleasant Police Department, who had earlier told Millicent that people in car wrecks taken to hospital had chips put in them in surgery, asked if Wolf did not have a circle of friends and did they not get together to compare data, implying that was the general modus operandi on such covert assault programs. He also remarked that Wolf could turn her car over. A key discovery from Wikileaks’ Vault 7, of course, details car hacking abilities by the CIA.

Todd Sterling, a former Army military policeman told her in 2013 that Wolf “was in the neurons of (her) brain, and that (she) was being Remote Neural Monitored.”

An AT&T Customer Service Representative told Millicent that Wolf was using Wifi or broadband, that he was “mimicking an NSA letter,” and that he was really stalking her. A high-ranking employee in the AT & T President’s office stated to Millicent that Wolf was “destroying (her) life.”

A high-ranking employee at the FCC (Federal Communications Commission) told Millicent that, based on her information, Wolf was probably using his Radio Frequency training on her, that he would be using high-powered microwave energy, and that a microwave could be configured to a satellite dish on a house to assault her. He asked her to check to see if the wiring in her house had been reconfigured to be used against her, and to purchase a frequency meter. She did, and says “even power bills revealed a pattern of excessive use.”

Military and Air Force Base Awareness of Satellite Technology in Remote RF Assault

In August 2011, Kevin Swenson at the Joint Non-Lethal Weapons Directorate told Millicent he had checked, and there were, one, “no rules of engagement concerning (her),” two, she was “not an enemy combatant,” and three, there were “no human use protocols concerning (her).” He told her he had sent her email to the Air Force and to his Chief of Technology there at Quantico, Virginia.

Several times between 2009 and 2010, Millicent called Military OneSource, a DoD organization for the military community, and was told to get some protection for herself. “One man said to another, It’s the Sergeant, referring to (Barrett Wolf) when I did not call his name to them.” She was referred to the Fort Campbell Military Police, the Joint Attorney General, the (VA) Veterans Affairs hospital, and local police. The Fort Campbell police told her to call the JAG as well as Arnolds Air Force Base.

Millicent called around to several Air Force bases, all the ones where Wolf had worked at, over the course of his USAF career. It is significant that personnel at these Air Force bases never refuted or challenged what Millicent was calling to report and in fact offered pointed information and awareness of the widespread use of BCI (Brain Computer Interface), implant, and satellite technology against civilians. At Arnold Air Force Base, Millicent received assistance in Spring 2013 from a staff-person who forwarded her email to the main Inspector General’s office in DC because email from her own computer was being blocked. This person had been told the entire story in June 2012. On hearing that Millicent only saw Wolf at church, she remarked: “Oh, so he’s going from church to church.”

Information from the Air Force also suggested that the small matter of “jurisdiction” was paramount. Air Force personnel frequently declared this was a civil, not military issue, and that the local police and FBI needed to address it.

Special Agent Geoffrey Stoddard at Arnold Air Force Base informed Millicent that since Wolf was retired, he was no longer a part of the Department of Defense, this was a civil matter, and the Chief of Police at Mt. Pleasant needed to call him, since it was a civil matter, and they could not get involved.

Staff at the Sexual Assault Response Coordinator (SARC) Office at Robins Air Force Base, Georgia asked Millicent to take her evidence to the FBI and tell them Wolf was using “biological weapons” on her.

The SARC office at Nellis Air Force Base in Nevada told Millicent in 2013—with no follow-up, as of date—they were “trying to decide who has jurisdiction” over Barrett Wolf.

The SARC office at Wright Patterson Air Force Base in Ohio (close to where she resided, in Englewood, Ohio, while doing her doctorate in Theology) told Millicent, also in 2013—to go to the police, report Wolf, and tell them Wright Patterson would help them track him. They also told her to get a complaint number from the police, then go to Montgomery County’s Victim Witness program and ask for an advocate. Staff there also looked into getting her a stalking order or protection but found their contracts did not cover this matter. They did take the step of contacting the local Police Department in Englewood, Ohio, to tell them she was receiving threatening emails, which Millicent had not alluded to. Researching this matter, Millicent says, “There is such a thing as brain-brain email, military technology.”

Brain-Brain Emails:

Scientists Prove that Telepathic Communication is Within Reach/Smithsonian Magazine/October 2, 2014

Brain to Brain Communication Using EEG Waves and the Internet/Liberty Voice, August 23, 2014

Scientists Found a Way to Email Brain Waves/Motherboard/August 20, 2014

High Awareness from the FBI: “We know whose chips are on”

Distinct evidence that the FBI was aware of Wolf’s usage of implantable chips and satellite technology on her was provided when a cousin, a retired police officer persuaded her to call the Memphis Terrorism Bureau of the FBI in Memphis, TN. FBI personnel explicitly stated in response, “we know whose chips are on.”

From an email in 2011, Millicent records:

“(I)n March 2008 I spoke with an agent in the Terrorism Division who asked me, “Did you Agree”? After I told him “NO,” he replied, “We know whose chips are on.”

“All the while the FBI Terrorist Division in Memphis 2008 told me they know whose chips are on, meaning that Barrett did not have to kill me to “get his chips out of my body” as he was telling people in Maury County, the implication was that he needed to turn it or them off….The FBI-Census Bureau agent told me that Barrett did not have clearance to do this to me, that it was not a real investigation he was running and that he did not represent the DIA or the Air Force. The Birmingham Electronic Crime Task Force (Secret Service) told me the same thing about Barrett not having clearance to do this to me, so did a retired commissioned Army officer who had White House clearance.” – Email to Sandy Hunt, Victim/Witness Division Director, Montgomery County Prosecutor’s Office, Ohio, from Dr. Millicent Black, Oct 16, 2013

Is the Pentagon Watching This?

Further disclosure followed. Interestingly, when Millicent complained about the excessive assaults coming from Wolf and his covert technologies, Rand Bathea at Langley, Air Force Base in 2012 said to her, “But I thought the Pentagon was watching this.”

A moment of silence is perhaps warranted, right here. Clearly, Barrett Wolf is not, as the FBI frequently likes to delineate, “a lone wolf.” Not merely does he appear to represent the USAF, thanks to his SERE training, and the DIA, by self-proclaimed notions of being in “Intelligence,” and unknown military or Intelligence agencies from whom he extracted a $3 million grant, apparently, according to USAF personnel, “the Pentagon” is perfectly aware of Wolf’s project to terrorize and assault Dr. Black as well as her entire community.

Military OneSource had, it must be recalled, simply acknowledged: “It’s the Sergeant.”

Representative John Tidwell intervened on Millicent’s behalf in May 2012 and asked the Tennessee Bureau of Investigation (TBI) on two occasions to look into what Wolf was doing to Millicent. Subsequently, Millicent was blocked from being able to send email to his Capitol Hill address at the State Capitol. Providing his home email address to Millicent, he let her know that the TBI had told him “there was nothing to it.”

Those Informed, Those Witnessing, Those Speaking Out

Attorney Greg Seneff witnessed the continuous cyberstalking Millicent was subjected to by Wolf, when having to forward her emails continuously to the TBI, and staff at CARE, Inc.

Lieutenant Andre Martin was often informed about Wolf’s stalking and harassment of Millicent. He passed on a flash drive filled with documentation to the District Attorney’s office in Columbia, TN, who told him they “could not do anything about what Wolf was doing to (her).”

Reverend James Scruggs, informed about USAF veteran Wolf’s actions and reading about the use of degrading themes in an article on Psychological Manipulation informed Millicent he was retired from the Air Force, and they were trained in these techniques.

Some of the techniques recorded in this article, linked here, on this particular subject are listed below:

“Degrading Themes and Indirect Threats: Verbal Maneuvering to Hide Direct Threats
Degrading Themes: Inducing Degrading Images and Intrusive Thoughts
Degrading Themes: The Pedophilia Weapon
Degrading Themes: Attack Pattern to Put the Victim on the Psychological Defensive”

Millicent writes in an email:

“You’ll see my notes throughout this document of what Barrett did to me. When Rev. Scruggs returned this document to me, he did not bring it to me immediately. Barrett Wolf, who was surveiling me and him, told me that Rev. Scruggs had left the document in Rev. James Walker’s study for Rev. Walker to look at. Rev. Walker ended up dying while I lived in Dayton, Ohio in 2014. It was Rev. Walker who had Rev. Rose Taylor to call Barrett Wolf to a meeting at church on a Wednesday night during lent season, 2011. Rev. Walker wanted to confront Barrett about my accusations. Barrett W. refused to come to the meeting though Rose Taylor did reach him by phone.

In 2012, my then pastor, Rev. J D and his wife Rev. J D, told me that the two of them confronted Barrett about stalking me and he told them, “she is crazy.” Google how many women in the Air Force were labeled as crazy after they reported being raped by airmen. Many were forced into silence, others were placed on psychotropic drugs and dismissed from the service.”

United Nations Special Rapporteur on Torture, Attorney Juan Mendez, was contacted and informed by Millicent, along with a group of 15, in August 2013, at American University School of Law in Washington, DC, about the crimes of remote brain and body manipulation with military technology being committed on them. Subsequently, Millicent included him in her daily reports of torture sent everyday to Chief Potts, something she continues to do.

An alternative healer who helped with physiotherapy after an accident which Millicent believes was staged by Wolf–when her Toyota Camry was totaled on being broadsided by a motorist running a red-light–said “the men at the local Army base told her to tell him to come fight the men for a change.”

Local Police Responses and Inaction

On Millicent’s request, Dr. Cynthia Spanier, a psychologist, called the Mt. Pleasant police department in 2011 after she called local police to report domestic violence by remote assault, to affirm to them that she was a victim of domestic violence at the hands of Wolf, whom she diagnosed as a narcissistic abuser and sociopath with homicidal inclinations, that she had high concern for Millicent’s safety and life and that questioning Millicent’s sanity in reporting crime as well as attempting thereby to institutionalize her was a case of victimizing a victim.

Police at Mt. Pleasant consistently named Millicent mentally disturbed when she called to complain about stalking, cyber stalking, military synthetic telepathy, RF assaults, or implant activation, logging in her sleep deprivation by making 911 calls at night when she was assaulted remotely by Wolf.

However, it must be highlighted that two policemen admitted—one, that she was being surveilled—this was a Lieutenant Gideon—and two, that people routinely got chips put in them when rescued by police from accidents and taken to ER rooms and surgery—Lieutenant Geoff Taylor, who said he had been in Marine Intelligence during the Vietnam war, and helped the CIA with LSD experiments on hapless civilians.

Further, an examination of police records of Millicent’s calls over a two-year period—in itself reveals that on various occasions, her complaint had been logged under a code for “Civil Defense Test.” What could that possibly be? Chief Potts of the Mt. Pleasant Police Force did not return phone calls and voice messages from this writer, seeking clarification on this particular code. Wikipedia defines Civil Defense Siren Test as the testing of an air-raid siren during World War II and general emergencies. And although it does seem like stealth asymmetric warfare is taking place in the USA and worldwide, currently, on the surface we are not in the middle of a war to warrant a Siren Test. Civil Defense however is defined by Wikipedia as “the organization and training of civilians for the protection of lives and property during and after attacks in wartime.” Is this the protocol label then by which people around her were being trained to engage in actions of hostility against her?

Police Collusion in Psychiatric Commitment

In July 2012, following Domestic Violence workshops at the Mt. Pleasant Police Department, Millicent spoke to the Domestic Violence representative, Detective Richmond, who initially appeared sympathetic and helpful; when she relayed to him information on the non-consensual cardiac surgery performed on her in March 2008 which had left a visible scar on her chest, he reported her as mentally unstable, contacted her children and maneuvered to get a judge address her case; on court order from this judge requiring a 2-day evaluation at a local hospital and release within 48 hours, he then transported her to a private psychiatric hospital instead—significantly one that partnered with Vanderbilt Universiy–where she was held illegally for 8 days.

Millicent states that this police officer lied openly to the reporting doctor and night court at the hospital that she was suicidal, and needed to be put on psychiatric shots. At that time, Millicent—far from suicidal–was just days from starting her doctoral program in Ohio, and speculates that she was being deliberately detained in efforts to sabotage her plans for a doctorate. A psychiatric evaluation clearing her of these charges and an ethical judge’s stepping in to order her immediate release finally ensured her release from this psychiatric institution after 8 days.

Was Detective Richmond and the entire Mt. Pleasant Police Department deliberately protecting Barrett Wolf then, and the entire program of non-consensual experimentation Millicent may be being subjected to? By this time Wolf, who has mentioned via V2K to Millicent he was a black Masonic and a Satanist on various occasions, was on the city’s Planning Commission and building a public profile for himself as upstanding citizen, pastor, and city official.

A second attempt by the Police Department to reject her reports of remote assault and attempt to name her insane occurred in 2012 when Corporal Taylor, now returned to his old title of Sergeant, responded to a 911 call Millicent had made in her ongoing quest to record the non-stop sleep-deprivation and nightly RF assaults she was experiencing. Millicent had specifically requested that no officer need be sent around to her home, since she was calling to get her assaults logged at the station, primarily. Regardless, Sergeant Taylor came by and reported her for filing false reports, claiming (falsely) that she had said “she was being attacked by satellites.” Another irony here, another lie, since it was Sergeant Taylor who had told her earlier “they put satellites around targets.” Millicent responded by suing the police department for this false report; the upshot here was that the suit was dismissed for domicile reasons at the federal claims court, since Millicent (with little choice) had filed in Tennessee although then living in Ohio while working on her doctorate. Then, at the state court, it was clear the trial was being rigged as the judge assigned to the case turned out to be the former attorney that Wolf had hired when Millicent tried to get a permanent order of protection against him. So once again, the suit was dismissed. Notably though, several officers suddenly retired early or resigned from the Mt. Pleasant PD shortly after.

Cyber Stalking and Cyber Hacking

Millicent has consistently reported hacking of her car, hacking into her email, cell phone, computer and tablet, including hacking of her computer experienced at a library in Ohio, privacy invasion, and harassment, and police have responded by failing to compile reports, and asking her to contact providers such as Yahoo and AT & T instead—who in turn refuse to provide records, citing a need for subpoenas—although staff have admitted to external tampering of her account, as recorded earlier.

On a recent forum appearance online on May 4, 2017, via Google Hangout on a Techno Crime Fighters Forum at World Beyond Belief (which included this writer), it was evident to all that the audio on Millicent’s computer was being hacked and sabotaged, to prevent her voice from being heard clearly.

Millicent has also connected with the National Network to End Domestic Violence in efforts to have them train her local police department, when they informed her they “don’t have training to investigate cyberstalking.” Police have informed her also that they have checked Wolf’s references when she accused him of cyberstalking her—but could not confirm to her, nor took any steps to check her own references, of the two friends who were witnesses to her cell phone hacking, which comprised that particular cyberstalking complaint.

Permission to Be a Criminal

In a letter dated Aug 12, 2016 to Lieutenant Gordon, Millicent pertinently asks:

“Barrett Wolf V2k brags that you’ve bowed out of any investigation of his harassment because you’ve been told he has permission to be a criminal. Please tell who can order a police department to ignore violations of Tennessee State Statutes, and allow rape and genocide as a war crime? This is America and in 2008, Barrett Wolf via, at the time he said “subliminal messaging,” called himself Jack-the Ripper when he declared that he hates women, but stated he planned to build himself a harem of sex slaves.”

Although Millicent was at one point able to obtain a temporary order of protection against Wolf, she was not able to obtain a permanent order of protection. Despite the collection of evidence, letters of testimony, and reports from whistleblowers she sent local officials and Senators, nothing was done to investigate her complaints, to identify Wolf’s status as a researcher, to explore his usage of remote military-grade technology on her, or to stop him.

What Exactly is Going on Here?

Investigation and Behavior Modification Cover Stories

An inescapable aspect of the findings regarding Millicent’s case is that she appears to be non-consensually enrolled in possibly multiple clandestine military/Intelligence research programs, primary among them being a highly surreptitious and covert MK ULTRA-style experimentation program aimed distinctly at remote behavior modification—yet masquerading as a remote neurotech-based “investigation” involving brain interrogation, possibly with stated Criminal Justice intentions of predicting and preventing violent crime.

This program is clandestine, in that it permits overt public deception in order to keep it concealed, and “protected,” which means few are willing to speak about it, while everyone in local authority is perfectly aware of its existence. The program is based on methodologies of trauma, stress, and fear creation—which characterize MK ULTRA trauma-based mind control programs, as well as SERE Enhanced Interrogation techniques—and seeks essentially to modify behavioral patterns. It is possible that the cover story being used in Mt. Pleasant is that the behavior modification intended is for the better.

Pre-Crime and Neuro Crime have stepped out of science fiction after all and are currently being studied in Neurocriminology departments in Universities. As a 2014 Penn State University paper reports, “an increasing number of prospective longitudinal studies are examining whether the presence of specific biological factors, whether they be hormone levels, neurotransmitter levels, physiological indices or brain deficits, is predictive of future offending.” The “neurobiology of violence” has become a new subject of interest for academic study, as this 2013 Scientific American article, “Secrets of the Criminal Mind” suggests. Interestingly, the psychopathology of violent crime as documented by current brain imaging techniques such as fMRIS and transcranial brain stimulation is a prime concern of neurocriminology, although spousal abuse and white collar crime also feature as interests, according to this discussion of Neuroscience and Neurolaw, available online at NIH’s web archive.

Framed to Appear Criminal via Electronic Read-Write Access to Brain

Dr. Black, of course, with her history of community-service, organizing events and groups, gifts for prayer and ministry, warmth, ebullience, and hospitality, and with no criminal record, is far from being a criminal offender whose brain needs to be studied to understand the neurobiology of crime.

It is significant therefore that behind the cover story can be seen the reality of how Dr. Black has essentially been continuously “framed” to appear to be a criminal, with pathological and homicidal tendencies. This clandestine framing is neurotechnology-assisted, using Brain Computer Interface chips, “programming in the brainstem,” synthetic dreams, and remotely-piped-in images, words, and thoughts—and not merely seeks to establish the groundwork for a neurocriminalogy “investigation,” but seems to have been used to justify intensive and concerted and ongoing assault on Millicent, physically and psychologically, by Wolf and the entire town.

It is salutary to bear in mind that government intelligence research is at least ten years ahead of any public disclosure. It is implicit from history that whatever affords the undetectable entry by the gatekeepers of society into the brain and mind, will not only be sanctioned, but funded and employed by the State, more specifically by trained operatives in the security forces, given powers over defenceless citizens, and unaccountable to them.[9]” –Carole Smith, Intrusive Brain Reading Surveillance Technology: Hacking the Human Mind

“8:59 am. Barrett Wolf v2k is telling me he can set anybody up to take the fall for what has done to me. He can use his name in it to make himself look like the victim which is what abusers and psychopaths do.”–9/19/2015, The Journal of Millicent Black

“5:25 am. Awakened from another electronic dream that had Barrett Wolf in it. He woke me up talking in my head. RF transmission to the rt side of my head. Bladder full again. Barrett Wolf v2k is telling me who sees the dreams in their heads.

5:43 am. Remember between 2003-5 I had no dreams. In 2006 dreams started, many with Barrett Wolf as the theme. Virtually no dreams 2009-11 and they started again in 2012. Dreams started here in Ohio only after Barrett Wolf v2k said he wanted to frame me again which was since last year mostly after I filed the lawsuit.

2:15 pm: He says he’s putting garbage in my brain as programming when he sends these dreams, sometimes 3 or more a night, usually after 3 am. I have sleep study reports that tell of the irregular onset of both movement through the sleep cycle and onset of dreams in both Tennessee and in Ohio.”-– 9/21/2015, The Journal of Millicent Black

“(I get v2K) reminding me of the movie the 50 foot Woman, a black and white movie of a woman who went through the town looking for a man that had hurt her to get revenge.” –Letter addressed to Scot Allen,MD, et al, Physicians for Human Rights, Oct 5, 2007

At the start of a letter to Englewood, Ohio police, local representatives, and Air Force Base staff on September 24, 2015, Millicent writes:

“Barrett Wolf says he can go back in my brain and change anything I report to you. In 2004 he told me via an email that he was my ONLY pen pal. I have since learned that means he has a read, write and programmable chip in my brain that he uses to download and upload data at his discretion. He says this is how he frames me.”

Forwarding the Ohio letter to Lieutenant Gideon of the Mt. Pleasant Police Department, Millicent writes in preface:

“He told me in 2008 that he had to be in my head so he would know if I was going to sue him, to be able to frame me and that he had to kill me to get me out of his computer. He said when he learned that NASA was coming to Vanderbilt’s campus he was determined to get his hands on one of their satellites. NASA came to Nashville in 1984. He admits starting to take over my child’s thought processes as mind control as early as 1983. All of this information came via artificial telepathy in early 2008, just months after his retirement from 26 years in the Air Force. I have information of a NASA satellite (Ikonos) over my home in Jan. 2003, just 2 days before Barrett Wolf made an unexpected visit to my home here in Columbia.”

Trauma Based MK ULTRA Torture and Manchurian Candidate Experimentation

Underlying this cover story of course is the darker, more occult experiment associated with the outright torture and remote manipulation of brain and bodily processes Dr. Black has been subjected to, that of the darkest MK ULTRA and MK DELTA experiments, intended to remotely create a “Manchurian Candidate” and a radio-hypnotized, incessantly-provoked, impulse-driven, homicidal killer out of a known community leader and Christian pastor of conscience and integrity.

8:11 am. Awakened before 8 by Barrett Wolf v2k talking in my head with pressure to the back of my head and RF transmission to the rt side of my head. He agreed that what he’s doing to me is TRAUMA BASED MIND CONTROL. –9/19/2015

In an email on March 1, 2017, Millicent writes:

“Barrett Wolf has a degree in Human Resources per the newspaper article, this says more to me about his claims to be a mind control expert.

In 2006 I received several books (I think I was subliminally messaged to order them), one of them was entitled, The CIA Manual on Behavior Modification. Some time later I saw the son of a good friend at church who referred to that Manual and said “We gave you what you needed.”

In a letter addressed to Scot Allen, MD, et al at Physicians for Human Rights, Oct 5, 2007, Millicent writes:

“The NAZI representatives of our government said to me such statements as:

–We want to see if iron wears out. (The statement “iron wears out” was made to me by a high school counselor when I was in the 8th or 9th grade after probably what was the last of two fights that I had ever had in my life. I was bullied into that fight.)

–You will kill. (Each time this statement was forced into my mind, my immediate and emphatic reply was I WILL NOT.)

–They wanted to see how much it would take to break a Christian down, and then they would apply the same tactics to the other Christians.

–They wanted to prove that they could turn a Christian into whatever they could imagine as they called God to a show-down and referred to themselves as “mad scientists” and “Doctor Frankenstein”.

The NAZIs say they want to extract a false confession from me, but I am also told that they “chose me because they like torturing strong women. They said men can’t stand much pain.” I was also told that “we like the hunt more than the catch”, so they have spent over four years playing Russian roulette with my life as they set me up in scenarios for people to kill me. At this point, they just want to see if they can make anybody commit a murder. And they call this law enforcement and/or upholding the Constitution of the united States of America. America is quickly becoming AMUDERica as those of us who make America our home have become subjects for terrorist training by our military and Para-military agencies. America used to be called the land of the free and the home of the brave, yet those trained to protect us through war find pleasure in torturing us with their invisible weapons as they quietly make war on the home front.”

Fingerprintless Homicides, Sadism, Satanism: “They call this the Living Death”

All this on a long-term vendetta, run by a sadistic abuser of women, who has himself confessed—albeit through the camouflaging secret confession booth of V2K—to killing numbers of men and women in his own family as well as hers. Is this scenario—a secretive, remote-control, and “fingerprintless” set-up for homicide by an out-of-control ex-airman—one that the DoD and cryptocracy of secret societies and Satanist cults in Intelligence communities are actively accommodating—or promoting?

“4:47 am. Awakened from another electronic dream with Barrett Wolf v2k talking in my head. Tried to force me to the bathroom. Body heated. Talking about how he’ll hurt my youngest daughter as he threatens my life. Talked about having received his check for the last batch of murders.

5:30 am. Not allowed to go back to sleep after 4:47 am. Assaults to my spine, heart/sternum with pressure from frequency devices. Electronic visuals.

Barrett Wolf V2K tells me he can kill me to end the lawsuit against the Mt. Pleasant police department just like he killed my dad when I filed a suit against Life Care Nursing Home for my dad in 2006.” 9/17/2015, The Journal of Millicent Black

2:59 am. 9-21-2012. Awakened by Barrett Wolf V2K who was talking about how he’s hurt my spine and the amount of pain I should be in. My body was being heated, assault to my belly and pubic and RF transmission to the rt side of my head. Forced to the bathroom.

Barrett Wolf V2k just said HE JUST NEEDED ME TO SHOW THE FELLAS HOW TO MISTREAT A HUMAN. Then went on to talk about how he hurt my youngest daughter.

He’s doing a lot more threats to destroy my health, to kill me, downloading of pre-recorded and scripted dreams and chatter since a lawyer was taking a serious look at my case. He always goes into overdrive when I start to get help in any way, work or start to have a life. They call what we’re going through, The Living Death. I refuse to let a dead man get away with this. –9/21/2015

(V2K tells me I get to) be used for target practice by psychic viewers, military, and law enforcement, and to “train assassins” as the NAZIs told me as they train COPS (Community Oriented Policing Service). They are being allowed to play Russian roulette with my life. I am supposed to some day “pop,” “snap,” or erupt into a ball of anger from the stress, anxiety, and humiliation and “go crazy.” There are enough CRAZY folk in the government. I’ll hold on to my senses and try to help them come to theirs someday. If none of this happens, the NAZIs intend for me to drop dead for they know that sleep deprivation can cause death. Again, pre-meditated murder.

Starting in late February 2008, I heard a familiar male voice say to me that I was about to get a whipping for old and new. I was told that the FBI had given me to this person and he was told that “when he got through with me they did not care what he did with me”. – Letter to Scott Allen et al, Physicians for Human Rights, Oct, 5, 2007, from Dr. Millicent Black

There is ample evidence Wolf is aware of the insanity and criminality of his actions. In a recent email, Millicent writes:

“Yesterday he announced to his biological family by broadcast that he told them in 2008 that they would be joining him in a jail cell for helping him hurt me while they sat silently by. He says they all had to take a vow of silence when he first told them about the remote behavior influence he was using on me. That would have been in the 90’s.”

2:15 pm. Barrett Wolf V2K says he’s going to now make the people in our hometown bow down to him. He says he knows he’s delusional but he’s been getting away with it for too many years now. Assaults to my left groin, back of my head and RF transmission to the rt side of my head. –9/21/2015

“Barrett Wolf made the broadcasting announcement in Maury County, TN that he was back to show the nation how they destroy an asset. I did not consent to be used in any experiment nor do I consider myself his or anyone’s property, that would be slavery. In the frame of reference he was using, he was announcing my involuntary servitude from which he had been and reports that he still does make money. That’s human trafficking.” – March 2008, The Journal of Millicent Black

“He tells me that he could have his own satellite bill coming to him and that he allows other men to do things to hurt me so he won’t have to bear the blame alone. He also says he chose me because he knew he could get away with it. Working at General Services Administration, he can get anything he wants and most of this technology is on the commercial market. He continuously tells me all he had to do is look innocent.”— Email, July 6, 2015, to Mt. Pleasant, TN and Englewood, OH Police Departments, Dr. Millicent Black

Barrett Wolf, who has declared at various times that he is a predator, a black Masonic, and a Satanist in war with God, while running a church as pastor, is also a licensed embalmer and funeral director. In an email, Dr. Black writes: “He said several times that he was a Satanist in 2008. He says he got mad at God, though I think that was only after he decided to play God.”

Millicent says she has seen him doing “strange things” in the presence of the deceased. At a funeral that she attended, “he stood with his hand inside the head of the coffin. It made no sense and he certainly drew attention to himself. After that funeral he walked toward me and when he got next to me said, “hey ugly.” Later, he said he was referring to the damage he’s doing to my face via directed energy weapons.”

SERE Torture Masquerading as Classified Military/Academic Disease-Detection & Monitoring Research

There is also, of course, the relation of the implants and frequencies detected on Millicent’s body to possible military and University research projects in terminal disease detection and monitoring, all non-consensual, and possibly all classified. In which circumstance the question must be asked: how is the torture (not mere usage in “research”) of an American citizen, on American soil, justifiable, under any rubric whatsoever, under concealing considerations of “national security?” Further, how is it ethical, moral, or justifiable for any military or Intelligence group to run secret experiments on civilians—to induce deadly disease, including cancer, and then secretly mine their bodies for data on disease-onset using nanobiosensors? All in fact handed over for execution to a man of high misogyny and sadistic bent, so he can essentially torture a woman to death—if he is not stopped?

“3:15 am. Barrett Wolf V2K is talking in my head, sending visuals and assaulting my belly. He’s broadcasting and triggering my brain to respond to his cues. I’m trying to go to sleep. He says he’s been deliberately upsetting my digestive process, hindering proper excretion and using my body for chemical and biological warfare, SERE torture tactics and my brain “to play with.”

On the margins of a print-out of HR 2977, the bill proposed by Sen. Dennis Kucinich (but never passed) to ban space weapons that would injure and harm persons “or the biological life, bodily health, or physical and economic well-being of a person,” Lynn Surgalla, former Vice-President of the US Psychotronics Association and ex-employee of Lockheed Martin wrote, tellingly:

These weapons systems have already been developed, used, and tested on US citizens and others. They are currently in use.” — Lynn Surgalla, Ph.D, Biophysics

In a letter intended for use in court for Millicent and any other victim of microwave weapon assault, Ms. Surgalla also wrote:

“Assault and Battery and/or torture/murder with any form of Directed Energy Weapon IS Assault and Battery and/or torture/murder with a LETHAL WEAPON.” –Lynn Surgalla, PhD, Biophysics, former Lockheed Missile and Space Satellite Operations Engineer

How the Takeover of an Entire Town Went Down

Even more troubling is the prospect of an entire town being held hostage to the powers of radio hypnosis via satellite usage and radio station usage by Barrett Wolf, to the signs and evidences of children being influenced in these ways, to the prospect of entire future generations being manipulated and influenced in this way from birth by these insidious and silent remote-influencing technologies.

5:30 Awakened by Barrett Wolf v2k again talking in my head.

Barrett Wolf, talking in my head, just said EVERY AIRMAN has the ability to use artificial telepathy or subliminal messaging. He’s often spoken of how he set my whole hometown to hear him “think” as far back as the mid-1990s. He says he had already been practicing on my girls and me since at least 1982. They were 4 and 6 years old by then. I was 28. My sleep study doctor looked at the attached newspaper article and my Journal entry from Jan. 1990 and told me that Barrett Wolf must have been honing his skills. –9/23/2015

In an email this February informing human rights advocates on the Techno Crime Joint Investigation Team, Millicent addresses a key concern regarding how exactly people in her hometown were co-opted into acting against her:

“He got the black community involved by telling them that he found my name on a list for experimentation and he wanted to help me gather evidence to sue the government. This was a lie but people took his training how to data-mine my brain and use software that would scan my body and some would tell me what they saw going wrong, others would tell me how to stay alive. ALL were afraid. Most if not all underwent some minor surgery at which time they knew they were being chipped when in actuality he said he had already put “his” chips in those he wanted to keep his hands on.

After he retired from the AF in 2007 he told the community via broadcasting technology that he was lying about helping me, but rather intended to use me to train men how to mistreat women and girls. He had told people that he had used me in the mid 1990’s to get a $3M research grant that he says he signed himself. He took that money and set himself up for the business he has right now and told me in 2012 that I’d made him filthy rich selling my body to be tortured.

The people in this area are highly religious and he has taken advantage of the strong family system that exists here. He announced to the community in 2008 via broadcasting that he got mad at God and walked away from Christianity but was back as a counterfeit Christian who planned to desecrate the pulpit. By 2014 he was awarded a Church and now pastors women and girls he says he hates.

We in Maury County, Tennessee are entrapped and being held hostage by a narcissist abuser sociopath who, per a clinical psychologist, is a serial killer. He told me in 2008 that he couldn’t wait until I realized that I couldn’t get away from him. I’m forced to listen to his voice day and night while he tortures my body. He said at one point that he wants to make me come after him so he can kill me in public. What he does to me is supposed to make everyone else afraid of him and obedient to his wishes.”

Closing her letter of 9/24/2015 to Chief Brownfield, Englewood, Ohio, Police Department, Millicent writes:

“Barrett Wolf, by his military training has learned to, in his own words, Destroy Women’s Bodies and declared as of 2008, months after his retirement, that he Did Not Want to Stop. I have two daughters and a granddaughter that are now women. They live in fear because of what they know is happening to me, some of which is happening to them, including hearing Barrett Wolf talk in my head. Why would a nation allow this in their hearing? Why would you?”

Pedophilia and Child Sex Trafficking Rings

Remarkably—and perhaps predictably, given how the abuse of children is tragically at center of many occult operations in societies worldwide—Wolf’s interest in children seems to go beyond radio-manipulating and controlling them.

In an email, Millicent notes that Wolf indicated via V2K that “he is setting up a child sex
trafficking ring in this area for his bosses. He kept saying he would categorically deny it if anyone ever asked him about what he broadcast throughout the County mid-February – mid-March 2008.”

“What I heard in 2008 via V2k was that the Sheriff’s Dept was involved in child sex trafficking and he was working to put the children under hypnosis to leave the schools, board a bus, and be taken to be used by men during the day. The children would be brought back before school was out and never remember what happened to them. Barrett Wolf says he’s had sex with one of the bus drivers to get her under his control. He never told me why he drove me to Hicks Lane, stopped outside a field where there was a barn, then drove off in 2004. Even recently he still speaks of child sex rings or trafficking. At one time he told me via V2k that if a slave got away, he would be called to track them.

I can send you pictures of the buses that pick up the junior high and high school children for Columbia that pull the children in a circle outside the high school door and keep all the children on these 5 buses for at least 15 minutes before allowing the high school children to inboard and then take the junior high children to school. The junior high school was just up the drive from the high school and it’s not clear why they are not dropped off first.” – Email sent May 22, 2017, from Dr. Millicent Black

Regarding these school-buses, Dr. Black also explains that during the entire 15-minute period that the junior high children are being held in buses in front of the high school, they are also being subject to the possibly deliberately brain-entraining patterns of flashing lights from the school buses in front of them.

Given the recent revelations of Pizzagate, the increasing discovery of child sex ring and pedophile/pedosadist networks both within the USA and worldwide, including recent exposure of involvement among FBI, DHS, TSA professionals, and the recent busting of a human trafficking network in Memphis, Tennessee, as well as the history of Child Protection Services in Tennessee being used to run pedophilia operations, these are surely not idle speculations.

Do the stealth technologies of radio hypnosis, covert RFID implants, and implantable nanobiotech now offer criminals in high places greater ease of access and use of our most vulnerable populations, our children?

It becomes increasingly obvious, and essential, that State, Federal, and International investigators and Law Enforcement professionals of conscience and integrity step forward here to apprehend and terminate Wolf’s excessive predations and depredations on Tennessee society, and those of the shadowy groups behind Wolf, who are orchestrating, permitting, and carrying out these atrocities.

Reality TV, Simulated Controlled Warfare, Captivity, and SERE Torture

In the rather astonishing Future Strategic Issues/Future Warfare (Circa 2025) document from NASA, archived at Deborah Tavares’ website StoptheCrime.net, which spells out a whole range of technologies like neural dust and microwave weapons which are actually already here among us, projections of imagined assault on Americans in 2025 (by imagined enemies of the USA) include the torture of Americans in reality-TV scenarios. Millicent spells out that each of these imagined assaults is already here, is being visited on Americans by traitors within, and is being played out on her body. Today she walks with a walker, even as she continues to experience RF assaults to her body which make a mockery of surgeries she has had done on knees and joints, and continues to visit doctors to help her address her continuously unfolding health issues.

“If people, at least in this County will tell the truth, I’ve been a reality TV specimen. In fact, Barrett Wolf’s cousin-in-law stated, in front of me, that she doesn’t like reality tv. I knew she was talking about what was happening to me.” – Email, May 14, 2017, Dr. Millicent Black

Dr. Black reports that a cousin informed her in 1997 that what she was being subjected to was “simulated, controlled warfare,” and Barrett Wolf V2K often said to her, “I’ve got to keep you stressed.” In an email dated May 15, 2017, at 10:30 pm, she wrote:

“This STRESS is achieved by constant assaults to my groin-pelvic-pubic, heating my body, and sleep deprivation, including excessive audio and visual brain stressors. Notice the time of night it is now. I’m being kept awake with torture. This 24/7 physical and psychological torture has gone on since Barrett Wolf retired from the Air Force in 2007. It was then that he said via synthetic telepathy that he “couldn’t wait until I learned that I could not get away from him.” This is actually CAPTIVITY to the tune of the Cleveland, Ohio kidnapper who held 3 women in his home for 10 years that was reported in 2014 — Daily Mail/Cleveland ‘House of Horrors’ Survivors  Reveal Decade of Abuse and How Ariel Castro Raped Them Up to 5 Times a Day — the Only Time They Were Released From Their Chains/27 April 2015.” — Email, 15 May, 2017, Dr. Millicent Black 

Additionally, Dr. Black notes a recent study studying stress among SERE trainees titled “Cognitive function, stress hormones, heart rate and nutritional status during simulated captivity in military survival training” which “simultaneously assessed cognitive, affective, hormonal, and heart-rate responses induced by an intensely stressful real-world environment designed to simulate wartime captivity. Sixty males were evaluated during and immediately following participation in U.S. Army Survival, Evasion, Resistance, and Escape (SERE) school, three weeks of intense but standardized training for Soldiers at risk of capture.” What was found was that “when individuals were exposed to realistic and controlled simulated captivity, cognition, mood, stress hormones, nutritional status and heart rate are simultaneously altered, and each of these subsequently recovers at different rates.”

“I’m tortured 24/7. Though not tied in chains, I’m tied in the brain of a sociopath who does not give me a second of rest unless I’m asleep and he wakes me at his will day or night…His military training should be closely investigated, including how he survived the SERE torture training at Fairchild AFB. His knowledge and use of Morse Code as a vocal communication tool should also be investigated. Morse Code was recently discovered as a low frequency in my right ear during an audiology exam. (See this 2003 US Patent for Apparatus for Audibly Communicating Speech via the Radio Frequency Hearing Effect.)

I continue to report a crime being committed against me and my family members who may never admit it. I desire protection per the wording of the State and Federal Constitutions.” –Email sent May 15, 2017 to Police Departments, Englewood, OH and Mt. Pleasant, TN, and Air Force Base staff, from Dr. Millicent Black

Memory Erasure from a Brain Chip: How All Crime Can be Erased from a Criminal’s Brain

In 2008, Wolf made the statement via subliminal messaging to Millicent that if he was ever exposed, he would have all the criminal activity drained from his memory and go on with his life as if he had done nothing at all.

The major detail Wolf ignores in this intentionality of course is the methodic collection of irrefutable evidence, inclusive of radio scans, nuclear magnetic resonance scans, toxicology analyses, sleep study analyses, satellite imaging, as well as numerous verbal acknowledgements from various witnesses, coupled with military documentation and whistleblower testimony that bolsters Dr. Black’s case against her long-term abuser, Barrett Wolf.

Interestingly, in May, 2016, a Columbia police investigator, Lieutenant Joe Gideon, assigned to Millicent’s case succeeding her conversations with Columbia Chief of Police and the City Manager to collect evidence to present before a Grand Jury, made this statement to Millicent, after being handed all her evidence: “Now they have to make you a liar.” The implication? That if her experience was ever reported, her credibility would be instantly attacked—by weaponized neurotechnology, simply by hitting the Download and Delete switch on a brain chip. Perhaps this also suggests an awareness among Columbia police that Wolf too has an implanted read-write brain chip, part of the BCI-CBI interface whereby he and Millicent are linked electronically.

Indeed, later in 2016, a former Assistant State Attorney-General confirmed to her privately the plausibility of Wolf’s statement about a procedure to remove memories from the read-write-programmable chip implanted in his brainstem, a final, criminal act of erasure which would allow him to look innocent of all charges.

Wolf V2K tells Millicent often that he uploads and downloads data from her chip at will and also from his own. (Here Millicent suggests the book, Hardwired Behavior: How Neuroscience Defines Morality by Lawrence Tancredi.)

If this is the final intent of this project, to wipe all awareness from memory via a brain chip, Millicent asks, do you see the egregious nature of this conspiracy, and how the government is fully wrapped up in it?

Note to the Nation, Note to the World

Nothing is more eloquent nor piercing than Millicent’s own cry to the world. The brilliance and power of her writing strikes to the core of what is being done to her and to thousands of others worldwide, as the entire world reels under the onslaught of Brain-Computer-Interface, Brain-Brain Communication, Robotics, and Nano technologies being used secretly today, in covert operations of both experimentation (under legalized Government/University/private company contracts) and political repression, while controlled mainstream media turns a blind eye, covers for the corrupt, criminal State, and pretends all evidence-reporting victims are paranoid.

In an exceptionally powerful 2007 letter to the Senate Judiciary Committee headed by Senators Arlen Specter and Patrick Leahy, Dr. Black wrote:

“How can the united States of America/AMURDERica allow such cruel, inhumane and degrading treatment to be done to its own people? I read that a Mr. Locke in the 1700’s, stated, “When the government declares war against its own people, the people are no longer obligated to obey them.” It seems that the Patriot Act did just that. It gave the CIA and other Intelligence agents the license to declare and perpetrate any act of war against the very ones who fill their budgets and pay their salaries. Never mind that we are also the ones to whom they swore an oath to protect, serve, and uphold the Constitution.

In June 2005, I alerted Congress and many others of the violations of the Patriot Act against residents in the united States. In January 2006, I made a plea to Senator John McCain. Now I write to you. Can you swear to me, under penalty of perjury?

  1. That slavery has been made legal since it was abolished in the 1800’s by Abraham Lincoln? If not, what protections are in place to secure my freedom? The perperTRATORS told me that they would “sell my soul again.” Apparently soul and body selling has become quite a commodity in America.
  2. That the people of the united States do not have any rights? Has the Constitution been abolished? What about the Bill of Rights?
  3. Does the color of law take precedence over the Bill of Rights, Civil Rights and Human Rights?
  4. Who gives the approval for a human subject to be volunteered for a government funded project, what rules apply, what oversight is given?
  5. When evaluating Rights, what value or weight is applied to:
    1. Police Brutality
    2. Excessive Force
    3. Double Jeopardy (I heard from law enforcement officers, “everyone is not in agreement with the way you are being treated.”
    4. Reckless Endangerment
    5. The Miranda Law
    6. Rites of Habeas Corpus
  6. How do you apply the principles of:
    1. The Nuremberg Code
    2. Torture Laws for united States residents
    3. Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act for united States residents
    4. International Wartime Laws
    5. Geneva Convention

At what point does Congress take note that sooner or later these bullies will be breaking down your doors to invade the privacy and bodies of your wives, husbands, children, grandchildren, and loved ones. How secure can the travelers be to find out that the driver is asleep and the stage coach or the train is running wild, and out of control? At what point did Fidel Castro realize that a coup was on the horizon? Mrs. Marco had to leave thousands of pairs of shoes behind in the closet when they were exiled. How many soldiers have to die in Iraq and children be sacrificed to the devil before someone stands up to the task and says, “The buck stops here?”

At the last hearing about the MKUltra experiments, the CIA and Intelligence agencies should have been abolished. Now the FBI should be included in this group. Can you be assured that your mind is not under their control? What about your spouse or loved one?? How do you know that you are not a subject in one of their cruel experiments called an investigation?” — Dr. Millicent Black, Letter to the Senate Judiciary Committee

In the view of the Joint Investigation Team, what continues to be visited on Dr. Millicent Black, hiding under various guises as discussed here, is purely and simply, torture. It is torture as was nationally discussed when the horrors of Abu Ghraib were revealed, it is torture as was nationally aired when the CIA’s Report on Torture was completed, yet never fully revealed to the public. It is significant that despite this FOIA request from the ACLU, which has named the CIA’s use of torture on 119 Guantanamo detainees as “a program of inhuman and unlawful cruelty,” Barack Obama’s administration worked to seal the report for 12 years, and keep the brutality of the CIA under “classified” wraps for now.

Classification, of course, is a convenient way to conceal crime, as Dr. Black’s story demonstrates. The remote neuro technologies, neuro monitoring, and neuro surveillance technologies being permitted for covert use on her, the entire world of covert microelectronic experimentation revealed by analysis of the radio-signal evidence on her body, and the continued mental, physical, and psychological assault visited on her person by Barrett Wolf point to the ease with which secrecy and classification permit the extreme abuses of Stealth Warfare—in silence, in “plausible deniability,” in covert access and covert assault.

Reporting These Crimes: A Call to Conscience & Right Action

Seeking to report these crimes, and to gain relief for Dr. Black, Dr. Katherine Horton, founder and lead member of the Joint Investigation Team recently spoke from Zurich, Switzerland, to Chief Potts of the Columbia Police Department, who informed her—despite the collected evidence reported here, all indeed made available to Chief Potts, over the years—that they were aware of Dr. Black’s case, but had not received any evidence from her, regarding her complaints of remote assault by Barrett Wolf. She also contacted Juan Mendez, former Special Rapporteur of Torture with the United Nations Office of the High Commissioner, who, like, Chief Potts, has been receiving emails every few days from Dr. Black chronicling the daily assault on her person and asking for help; he also said he was aware of Dr. Black’s case but could not recall if anything had been done about it, and suggested she contact the new Special Rapporteur for Torture now, Professor Nils Melzer. (Who may well be an important party to contact, given that his bio lists him as being the author of a Guggenheim-award-winning book, “Targeted Killing in International Law” [Oxford, 2008].)

Dr. Horton also made efforts to speak to the Memphis FBI Bureau, but experienced phone hang-ups when she began to describe Dr. Black’s case. In addition, NSA whistleblower and retired Intelligence analyst Karen Stewart, also a member of the Joint Investigation Team, reports that she has called to notify Army Intelligence at Fort Bragg, North Carolina at least three times, while she has also spoken to FBI in Memphis and Columbia, Tennessee as well as Chief Potts at Columbia PD a few times.

Who will step forward to rescue this American survivor of torture and non-consensual subject of extremely abusive nanotech, RF, and neurotech experimentation hidden behind classified walls, and rein in the extreme criminality and savagery of a psychopathic serial killer operating in secret, remotely, from a distance? This reportage is a call to conscience, and a call to right action.

The greater implications of Millicent’s story must not be lost on us: that such deadly and invasive brain and directed-energy technologies are well-developed and in use today, that they represent tremendous violations of human rights and freedoms, that nothing less than the individual human power to think, feel, and act on free will hangs in the balance, and that all of humanity needs to come together in awareness and intelligence to challenge, resist, and stop the covert rollout of these weapons in our societies and states. Nothing less than our humanity is at stake.

With much gratitude to Dr. Millicent Black for her patience in waiting for the completion of this article, and for her endless support and meticulous research throughout.

Dr. Black has a GoFundMe page where she is seeking to raise funds to cover her ongoing medical expenses, even as the criminal assaults on her body continue; please visit, donate, share the link.

This article will be updated soon with more graphics and links. Please reblog and share widely.

RELATED:

Letters and Petitions from Dr. Millicent Black

Senate_Judiciary_Committee_4-2-07/Letter to the Senate Judiciary Committee & Letter to Committee on Oversight and Government Reform/April 2007

Petition to Congress, ACLU, UN: Stop False Diagnoses Leading To Forced Psychiatric Detainment To Cover Illegal Human Experimentation And Military Training Resulting In Torture

Letters of Support, and Affidavits from Whistleblowers

Lynn Surgalla 2005/Letter from Former Vice-President of US Psychotronics Association, Lynn Surgalla, Ph.D/On the Illegal Development, Testing, and Use of Directed-Energy Weapons, and Laws Banning Remote Manipulation Weaponry Use on Humans/June 20, 2005

Affidavit from Ted Gunderson, Senior Special Agent-in-Charge, Los Angeles, FBI/On Nationwide Illegal Government Rogue Criminal Enterprise Inclusive of Operatives in FBI/CIA/ 4-26-2011

Letter from Representative Jim Guest/On the Reality of Verichips and RFIDs Being Used in a Massive Movement of Non-Consensual Testing and Tracking of Americans/Oct 10, 2007

Public Domain Awareness of Existence and Usage of Brain Technologies Today

Hacking the Human Brain: The Next Domain of Warfare/Chloe Diggins and Clint Arizmendi/Wired, 12/11/2012

This is Your Brain. This is Your Brain as a Weapon./Tim Requarth, Foreign Policy, September 2015

On the Need for New Criteria of Diagnosis of Psychosis in the Light of Mind Invasive Technology/Carole Smith, Journal of Psycho-Social Studies, 2003

Intrusive Brain Reading Surveillance Technology: Hacking the Mind/Carole Smith, Dissent Magazine, Summer August 2007-2008

Evidence for Military Development of Synthetic Telepathy/V2K/Microwave Hearing

Bio-Effects of Selected Non-Lethal Weapons/Dept. of the Army, US Army Intelligence and Security Command (USAINSCOM)/Declassified on FOIA Request in 2006

Synthetic Telepathy and the Early Mind Wars/Dr. Richard Alan Miller, 2001

Microwave Bioeffect Congruence With Schizophrenia/John J. McMurtrey, MS, 2002

Remote Behavioral Influence Technology Evidence/John J. McMurtrey, MS, 2003

Inner Voice, Target Tracking, and Behavioral Influence Technologies/John J. McMurtrey, MS, 2003, 2005

Patents for Synthetic Telepathy, V2K, Silent Sound, Microwave Hearing, Neurophone:

Nervous System Excitation Device (First Neurophone)-US 3393279 A/July 1968/Patrick Flanagan Gillis

Method and System for Simplifying Speech Waveforms-US 3647970 A/1972/March 1972/Gillis  P. Flanagan

Apparatus and Method for Remotely Monitoring and Altering Brain Waves
Patent #: US3951134 A/1976/Robert J Malech

Microwave Hearing Device–Patent #: US4858612 A/1989/Philip L. Stocklin

Silent subliminal presentation system – US 5159703 A/Oct 1992/Oliver M Lowery

Method and Device for Implementing the Radio Frequency Hearing Effect
Patent #: US6470214 B1/2002/James P. O’Loughlin, Diana L. Loree

Apparatus for Audibly Communicating Speech Using the Radio Frequency Hearing Effect–Patent #: US6587729 B2/2003/James P. O’Loughlin, Diana L. Loree

System for Producing Artificial Telepathy–WO 2005055579 A1/June 2005/Lynne Moody, Miles Philip Moody

Evidence for Military/Air Force/NASA Interest in Biological Effects of Microwave Weapons:

USAF Radio Frequency Radiation Dosimetry Handbook, Fourth Edition

USAF Radio Frequency Radiation Dosimetry Handbook, Fifth Edition

Developing Non-Lethal Weapons: The Human Effects Characterization Process

ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELD INTERACTIONS WITH THE HUMAN BODY: OBSERVED EFFECTS AND THEORIES /Jeremy Raines, Ph.D/NASA, 1981

RADIOFREQUENCY/MICROWAVE RADIATION BIOLOGICAL EFFECTS AND SAFETY STANDARDS: A REVIEW/Scott M. Bolen/Rome Laboratory/Grifiss Air Force Base/1004

Evidence for Military/Air Force Interest in Brain Computer Interface Technologies: 

Evidence for Military/Air Force/CIA Development/Usage of Radio Hypnosis Intra-Cerebral Control-Electronic Dissolution of Memory (RHIC-EDOM):

Evidence for CIA/Military/NASA Use of Tracking Microchips, Bio-MEMs, Wireless Body Area Networks:

Evidence for Use of Nanotechnology–NanoBioSensors, NanoTransceivers, NanoTransducers–in Humans:

Evidence for Military Development of Super-Soldiering:

Evidence for Military/Air Force Interest in Wormhole Surgery and Teleportation:

Evidence for Military/Air Force Use of Psychological Operations and Psychological Warfare:

 

 

 

 

 

Charles Schlund (Reporting on CIA Files): Senator Ted Kennedy Was a Targeted Individual

Re-posting, with permission, from TrueDemocracy.net, where this article was published in the Winter 2003 issue of the Journal of History run by historian and publisher Arlene Johnson, in the interests of preserving the truth about American history, often as it surfaced from witness accounts, testimonials, lawsuits, whistleblowers, and documents hidden from the public.

The information in this letter written by Charles Schlund–excerpts from whose affidavit were recently published here–come reportedly from his reading of Senator Ted Kennedy’s CIA file included in what he named the Don Bolles papers, a vast collection of papers removed from CIA archives in the mid-’70s, which he had the privilege of reading–more on which may be found in the earlier post here, and detailed at length in his affidavit, which is fully online at TrueDemocracy.net.

Obviously, there is much disclosure and revelation in this article, which reveals a long “handling” of Senator Ted Kennedy, whose popularity and re-electability in Massachusetts, coupled with his integrity, stature as one of the Kennedy brothers, interest in human rights, and possible eligibility for a future Presidency was perceived as a tremendous threat by the CIA. Not to mention his interest in outing the CIA (for “assassinations (of his brothers, President John F. Kennedy and Robert Kennedy), drug-running, and other illegal operations”). This story, elaborate, horrifying, and distressing to read, seems to have two parts: the framing of Senator Ted Kennedy, first for the death of Mary Jo Kopechne, a young secretary who had worked on Robert Kennedy’s campaign, and second, as a drug-dealer, which latter achieved the intended use of then-new electronic implants on his clothing and body as monitoring and torture devices, a source of many health issues including lifelong struggles with Chronic Fatigue Syndrome.

While it is tragically no surprise to one and all currently that the CIA has historically engaged in covert murders and assassinations on a horrific scale, both domestically and worldwide, it is still heart-stopping to read an account detailing the lengths to which this organization has gone in the grisly setting up of the murder of Mary Jo Kopechne–whose life seems to have been casually sacrificed as an incidental loss–just to frame for murder an innocent and much-loved public figure from a well-known and loved Massachusetts family.

Additionally, the explosive disclosure in this story reveals two aspects of targeting of supreme importance today, in our current American and global Orwellian situation of out-of-control surveillance, blacklisting, and covert assault:

1) The framing-the-innocent targeting and victimizing scenario reported here as being carried out by the CIA in the 1970s on Senator Kennedy, under cover of law and lies, using a set-up and a secret warrant, is the exact scenario being reported by thousands worldwide–today’s “Targeted Individuals“–innocents who become the sudden subjects of covert investigation by Intelligence agencies, coupled with defamation, slander, and employment sabotage. Secret FISA courts, secret FISA warrants, lies to neighbors about people suddenly being investigated for prostitution and pedophilia, child porn and drug-running–the exact crimes we now know Intel agencies like the CIA and NSA are committing, with their compartmentalization and secrecy–ring a bell, anyone? (Please see Open Season on Targets for more on how today’s victims are being triply exploited, as “terrorists” and “extremists” and lab rats, to yield massive and continuous income for the Surveillance-Defense Weapons industry.)

2) Electronic stimulation of mind and body by the CIA–Mind Control and Body Control or Remote Behavioral Influence/Modification–was a known and intentional practice of the CIA’s in the 1970s, reserved for those they decided–in supreme hubris–they needed to control, in order to protect their own crime-operations from discovery:

They then started on a new way of controlling Ted Kennedy. This new mode of control was to be by the use of electronic stimulation of his mind and body by the CIA to remove him as a threat to their covert operations within the government.”

3) Remote-controlled radio frequency microchips were already in use in 1976 for covert implantation and covert control of Americans, and were used to remove Constitutional, human, and civil rights from Americans–by putting them under surveillance and manufacturing the need to constantly monitor them–which is also exactly what is being reported today, and what is being protected today by our bogus roster of laws and military and Intelligence directives. (Spelled out in the Memorandum to President Trump on Torture, and in Open Season on Targets.)

“They needed another way of disabling him to remove him as a threat to their empire. The director of the CIA, George H.W. Bush, in 1976 came up with the way of doing this. The new remote controlled electronic torture devices that the CIA had designed were now in service and when used with a bugging device built into them they could be used to remove targeted people under the protection of a warrant in an investigation and under the color of law.”

Also interesting to note is Schlund’s usage of the word “empire.” The CIA was seen, from back in the ’70s, as needing to protect their empire–something they are apparently still working on today, as the empire’s evil deeds continue to be aired with each passing day, thanks today to hundreds of researchers like John Marks, Walter Bowart, and now Julian Assange and WikiLeaks, with Vault 7, and the many researchers and citizen journalists reporting on this recent information from these newly-unearthed documents.

Thanks to the CIA’s complete control of mainstream media and their subsequent and ongoing failure to report on the long-standing use–for over four decades now–of stealth radio frequency (EMF) weaponry and covert microchip implants to silence, abuse, torture, and “disappear” anyone they like in acts of illegal and criminal political repression–acts which are continuing today, on thousands–it becomes vitally important to unearth and highlight all archived information pointing to the history of this usage–both for documentation purposes, and to save the lives of the thousands of innocents wrongfully accused, wrongfully targeted, and currently being assaulted to the death in these identical ways–while the CIA, NSA, FBI, and Local Law Enforcement maintain a stoic silence, and dare to name all reporting victims of such assault with stealth weaponry “paranoid and delusional”.

These are crimes against humanity, crimes of treason, and crimes against our nation, our ethics, our values, our morality, our integrity–and should be publicly exposed by every one of us; these Intel agencies engaging in these crimes, on taxpayer dollars, should be held accountable, should be prosecuted, and should be dismantledPlease read, share widely. 

Chappaquiddick: Ted Kennedy Was Framed By The CIA!

By Charles August Schlund (deceased January 5, 2010)
July 10, 2001

The following letter is how the CIA framed Ted Kennedy at Chappaquiddick for the death of Mary Jo to stop him from ever running for president of the United States.

TedKennedy1Ted Kennedy. In the CIA files in the Don Bolles papers was the files on the framing of Ted Kennedy for the death of Mary Jo Kopechne at Chappaquiddick by the CIA. In the CIA files that George Bush had removed from the CIA was Ted Kennedy’s file.

After the CIA had assassinated John F. Kennedy and framed Oswald for the assassination and after the CIA had assassinated Robert Kennedy and framed Sirhan Sirhan for the assassination, they needed a way of stopping the last Kennedy brother from ever running for the presidency of the United States. They believed that if they killed him it would look like the CIA had assassinated all the brothers so the CIA decided to allow him to live and to discredit him to stop him from being reelected by framing him at Chappaquiddick for the death of Mary Jo Kopechne. By doing this the CIA planned on stopping him from ever becoming president of the United States of America. The following is how the CIA framed Ted Kennedy for the death of Mary Jo Kopechne at Chappaquiddick.

I no longer remember all of the details because of the constant electronic torture of me which is still being used against me to limit my freedom of speech and damage my memory and ability to write using electronic torture and sleep deprivation. The following is what I still can remember while I am being kept disabled and in an electronically drugged state. Ted Kennedy and the other couple were at the cabin, and Ted Kennedy and Mary Jo Kopechne were getting ready to leave. The CIA had drugged one of the bottles from which they were drinking. I do not remember all the details, but I do remember that the bottle had a drug put into it which would result in Ted Kennedy and Mary Joe Kopechne becoming unconscious after drinking from drinks poured from the bottle. I remember that just before they left they all drank a drink that had been poured from the bottle. I believe it was a toast.

Ted Kennedy and Mary Jo Kopechne left and started back with Ted driving. On the road on the way back were barricades and a detour sign that the CIA had put into place directing Ted down the road they needed him on to conduct their planned murder of Mary Jo. The CIA had positioned one car ahead of Ted’s car and another car was behind him. As soon as Ted entered the detour the CIA moved the barricades to block off where he had turned down so no one else could come down the road until after they had taken over Ted and his car. Ted was monitored the entire time by the CIA. Mary Jo had passed out from the drug and Ted was starting to pass out. The CIA car in front of Ted’s car slowed down so they could use their car to stop Ted’s car from crashing as Ted passed out. This worked fine and they were able to stop Ted’s car. After they got the car stopped they took Mary Jo and placed her in the back seat and took Ted to the other car. Then two CIA operatives replaced Ted and Mary Jo with the man in the driver seat and a woman operative replacing Mary Jo in the front seat. Then all three cars proceeded to the bridge and as they drove they called back by radio and they gave orders in code to remove the barricades.

mary_jo_stry_1The constable for that area was one of the CIA operatives in charge of the operation. I still see him on TV saying how Ted got away with murder. This constable was the person that set up the car to go off the bridge which resulted in the death of Mary Jo. He first prepared everything to make it look like Ted and her were having an affair and that was why they turned down that road. They were not having an affair. When they got to the bridge they set up the car to send it off the bridge with Mary Jo still in the car.

The drug they had used was a special drug that would not show up in the autopsy report because she would never be tested for that drug. They had also planned on her stomach being full of water after the crash. After rigging the gas pedal and steering and sending the car off the bridge, the car would not sink and floated nose down in the water and was starting to float away. They got a rope on the car and held it in place and one of them had to swim out to the car and open the door to get it to sink. It took the CIA 20 to 30 minutes to make the car sink where they needed it to rest on the bottom.

They then prepared Ted Kennedy for the water. They put an injury on him but I do not remember in detail what the injury was, but it was to make it look like that he was in the crash and was driving the car that killed Mary Jo. They then took Ted Kennedy’s body out into the water on the side of the bridge and propped him up with one of the CIA operatives holding him from behind. Another CIA agent then injected him in the neck with the antidote to the drug they had used on him. Ted Kennedy then slowly showed signs of recovering. The antidote was mixed with another drug to make Ted Kennedy confused and disorientated. They then got out of the water and watched to make sure Ted didn’t drown before he recovered enough to get out of the water.

Ted Kennedy stumbled out of the water and tried to figure out what had happened. He finally figured out that the car was under water in the pond and he had no idea of what happened. It took him some time to recover enough to leave to search for help and he was still badly disorientated from the drugs they used on him. He was not drunk and had only had one or two drinks and Mary Jo had only one drink and if I remember correctly she did not drink all of it.

The CIA monitored and filmed all of this. As soon as Ted Kennedy left to try to find help the CIA moved in and cleaned up all the evidence to make sure it looked like an accident.

Chappaquiddick1The next events are all history. They asked Ted Kennedy what happened and he replied that he did not know and that Mary Jo must have been driving the car. He didn’t know because he was not driving and was unconscious. The press and others then attacked him and set it up to make it look like he was lying to get out of the death of Mary Jo. At that time Ted Kennedy was forced to take full responsibility with him not having any memory of the accident. The papers and others then printed stories of how she was pregnant which she wasn’t and of how Ted was drunk which he wasn’t and of how the Kennedy’s were buying their way out of what had happened which they weren’t.

The investigation into the crash was not real; it was only the framing of Ted Kennedy for the death of Mary Jo Kopechne.

The CIA assumed that by framing Ted Kennedy that they had assured that Ted Kennedy would no longer be electable and that they could force him out of the public eye and out of their hair. To the amazement of the CIA, it did not work and Ted was repeatedly reelected to public office.

Ted Kennedy was now back fighting for Human Rights, Civil Rights and the American people as his brothers had before him. The CIA was now desperate to remove him from the public eye but it was not acceptable to assassinate him because they believed that it may interfere with the on going cover-up of the assassinations of his brothers. If all three brothers had died in public office, no reasonable person would believe that it was not the CIA that did it. They needed another way of disabling him to remove him as a threat to their empire. The director of the CIA, George H.W. Bush, in 1976 came up with the way of doing this. The new remote controlled electronic torture devices that the CIA had designed were now in service and when used with a bugging device built into them they could be used to remove targeted people under the protection of a warrant in an investigation and under the color of law.

The Next operation we had was the framing of Ted Kennedy as being a drug dealer to authorize the use of these new electronic bugging and torture devices to disable him. We even had the file on the briefing to the federal Judge for the warrant to be used against him. The following was in the briefing to the judge. Your honor is so unbelievable that Ted Kennedy is involved in the drug trade; after all his father was a bootlegger.

The CIA had failed in removing Ted Kennedy as a Senator from Massachusetts. Even after they discredited him before the people by framing him at Chappaquiddick for the death of Mary Jo Kopechne, and even after they attacked him repeatedly in the press and news, he was still repeatedly reelected to the Senate by the people of Massachusetts. The CIA did not like this at all, and the CIA still felt that Ted Kennedy was a great threat to their assassinations, drug running and other illegal operations. They then started on a new way of controlling Ted Kennedy. This new mode of control was to be by the use of electronic stimulation of his mind and body by the CIA to remove him as a threat to their covert operations within the government. They first placed him under constant surveillance and monitored his phones, mail, and they even bugged his cars and everything else they could monitor. All information at this time was being illegally collected and that made it unusable in the newspapers or in the courts. They decided that the best way of authorizing the legal bugging of Ted Kennedy would be to frame him as being a drug trafficker. To do this they first needed evidence to present to one of the corrupt judges that they controlled to obtain a warrant to monitor Ted Kennedy. They collected his garbage and even followed him when he went on weekend outings in boats and other places.

They took sandwich bags from his garbage and from his boating trips and checked these sandwich bags for his fingerprints. In time they obtained some plastic sandwich bags with Ted Kennedy’s finger prints on the bags. They then proceeded to clean the inside of these bags and then placed drugs into the cleaned bags. These plastic bags now filled with drugs were then given to a drug dealer that the DEA controlled and the bags were then busted in a drug bust with Ted Kennedy’s finger prints on the bags.

The CIA had also designed a way of removing finger prints using a special tape that they had developed and then reinstalling these finger prints on other things as needed to target innocent targeted people. I believe that this process was also used in the framing of Ted Kennedy but I do not remember enough of this part of the files to be 100 per cent certain.

Now there was usable evidence for a real warrant and the DEA could not take over the operations from the CIA against Ted Kennedy and do these covert operations under the cover of a warrant in an investigation and under the protection of the law. They then continued to frame Ted Kennedy as being involved in the drug trade to further authorize the bugging and control of and over him by the CIA using their covert operation, the DEA, to gather the needed evidence to frame Ted Kennedy as being involved in the drug trade.

In the CIA and the DEA files we had were the orders from George Bush for the bugging of Ted Kennedy using the new CIA control, torture, and monitoring devices. They had determined that it was impossible to keep Ted Kennedy sick and disabled by just using the devices in his clothing. He had too many clothes and was always buying new clothes. The CIA and DEA researched if he wore any jewelry that he never took off that they could install the devices in or if there was any other way of controlling and bugging him without injecting Ted Kennedy with implants.

When I was reading the files George Bush had stated in them that he was paranoid that if they got caught using implants in Senators and Congressmen that the American People would no longer trust them and that the operation may backfire but to the best of my memory he did approve the use of the implants against Ted Kennedy which resulted in Ted Kennedy suffering horribly with Chronic Fatigue Syndrome. This illness was an auto immune response from the bugging devices and was designed to so involve the targeted person in their own suffering and misery that they would no longer be of a threat to the CIA, DEA or others that were protected and above all laws.

Ted Kennedy’s Chronic Fatigue Syndrome went away in 1991 or 1992 because of my work with the FBI against the DEA and CIA. I am uncertain if Ted Kennedy was injected with electronic implants or if they used electronic devices in his clothing and jewelry to keep him sick, disabled and under their control all of those years as they monitored, tortured, and controlled him. My direct information on Ted Kennedy ended in 1977.

Charles Schlund, a political prisoner of the United States

Source: The Journal of History, TrueDemocracy.Net

RELATED:

 

Charles A. Schlund’s Affidavit: Early CIA Leaks from the Don Bolles Papers, and Evidence from the 1970s of Remote Electromagnetic Torture with US Govt. Implants

 

 

 

Dr. Katherine Horton to All Americans with Integrity: Global Nazi Extermination Program Underway–Why You Need to Help Rescue Electronic Concentration Camp Victims Now!

Recently, a respected doctor in our midst, Dr. Edward Spencer, sent out a clarion call for help to a few trusted and high-profile ex-Government contacts he is in touch with, sharing with them the intense and debilitating directed-energy weapons attacks Dr. Katherine Horton and I have recently experienced, just these past few days, no doubt in brute retaliation for our rather public activism on behalf of all those worldwide who are wrongfully targeted and literally being mutilated by the deadly weapons of Electronic Warfare and Neurowarfare in our neighborhoods–satellites, covert repeaters, covert microwave transmitters, covert transducers, covert antenna systems, portable directed-energy weapons, ultrasonics, infrasonics, lasers, masers, X-rays, in conjunction with covert implants, nanotechnology, and virus-filled aerosols–being used in cowardly, stealth fashion by our “Intelligence” agencies, our “Security” agencies, our local “Law Enforcement,” and our Departments of “Defense”.

Identified as a Global Fascist program of citizen neutralization, extermination, and takedown by traitors within our American, European, and worldwide governments and agencies by several researchers including Dr. Eric Karlstrom, who explains all in this recent interview with Dr. Paul Marko at World Beyond Belief (video link below), it must be stressed that Media and human rights groups still refuse to touch this explosive story, clearly for reason of CIA/NSA control/co-opting and apparent fear of being targeted themselves:

Dr. Katherine Horton, whose recent eloquent, powerful, and direct address to the cowards in high places hiding in “Intelligence”, “Law Enforcement,” and “Defense,” and directing remote-abuse mutilation with high-tech weaponry at defenceless women, men, and children in this video (link below) needs to be spread far and wide, added her voice to Dr. Spencer’s plea to Americans with integrity. Her brilliant analysis of what has happened to our Intelligence agencies and governments, and the Stealth Warfare Nazi process of Intelligenzaktion we are currently seeing draws on her own research, background in systems analysis, and incisive insights.

In support of disclosure of these extreme programs of targeting and abuse, Karen Stewart, NSA whistleblower, recently described the vigilante stalking and electronic assault suffered by thousands of innocent Americans in this must-listen interview with Jeff Rense. Describing my own experience of targeting, my discussion of this stealth Electronic Warfare and Neurowarfare currently being waged against all humanity, not just those being blacklisted and targeted by criminals in government, with Dr. Paul Marko can be found here.

This is an urgent appeal to all humanity with conscience: You are being called to become aware, to inform yourself, and to take action. Death squads — in stealth –are roaming the US, Europe, Asia, Africa, Australia, New Zealand, Hawaii. People are being tortured. We are, as Dr. Horton puts it, seeing a Global Nazi Extermination Program in action. Ultimately, if we want to tear down this stealth and electronic Death Camp program and prevent it from getting bigger and bigger and becoming an entrenched program of extermination of greater numbers of humanity with remote weaponry, each one of us has to respond Now from the power of our own individual integrity.

Dr. Katherine Horton: “The CIA and NSA are currently running effectively a TAKE-DOWN OPERATION on your country.”

As this concerns the single biggest issue in the US and Europe, please take the time to read the rather long explanation below that matches the pieces up.

First of all, let me introduce myself: I am a scientist (particle physicist) and former Research Fellow at Oxford in the UK. And it is true, I am a victim of the intelligence agencies. But I am not in the US. I live in and am attacked in Switzerland and I have already gone to court over it in ENGLAND (see stop007.org -> court case & evidence). That is because the attacks on me started first with MI5 in the UK. They have followed me to Germany and then Switzerland and have been continued by the national agencies there.

1. For you, this is nevertheless important in as far as all the intelligence agencies are now globally FUSED and are not actually under the control of ANY SINGLE GOVERNMENT. This includes your CIA and NSA (regardless of what impression might be given to any oversight committee). I along with several other investigators are now compiling the evidence for this for the upcoming class actions. But it is pretty well established by now.

It might come as a complete shock to you, but the CIA is not actually headquartered in Langley. That is only a branch office, so to speak. Instead, it is headquartered here in Switzerland.

In finance, people already talk publicly about the “One Bank” that owns all large private banks and all the central banks. That is also headquartered in Switzerland. It turns out that the same processes that led to that also led to the intelligence agencies morphing into the “One Agency”. This happened a very long time ago. And the One Bank by now owns the One Agency fully.

2. It is for that reason that the CIA and NSA are currently running effectively a TAKE-DOWN OPERATION on your country. (MI5 does the same on Britain and the German BND on Germany.) It is because the true controllers are not in America. They are headquartered here in Switzerland and their major interests are now in China and India. Or to be more precise: Their business plan is to use China and India to asset strip the US and Europe and then to farm it for resources.

3. So what you are seeing with the “targeted individual” program is actually an “Intelligenzaktion” (https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Intelligenzaktion). But this time round, it is not just targeted at the elites in America (as it was in Poland in WWII), but at all levels of society. That is so because computer simulations and database maps have been used to produce a social graph of your country to identify the truly integral and instrumental people who can mobilize a community and these people can be found on all levels of society (whereas the top tends to be quite docile).

4. The cartel holders have chosen this form of targeting because it is highly effective in disabling a country and it is completely SILENT. That is because only the people who have done sophisticated data analysis on the full social graph will spot what is so special about the people being targeted. To anyone else, they seem just like a random collection of people, most of whom are not very rich. The overall hostile martial interference from abroad thus remains well hidden.

5. This large-scale take-down program has been brought about by the simple device of over-inflating the intelligence agencies to over twice their size in a very short time period (In the UK, MI5’s budget DOUBLED and their head count TRIPLED after 2003). The CIA and all law enforcement have undergone something similar. When that happens, any agency tries to use up the new money so as to continue getting it in the subsequent years.

That automatically means that they have to hire a lot of people very fast. When that happens, quality automatically goes down drastically. So in other words, we now have 3 MI5s in the UK, two of them effectively staffed by inept idiots.

6. When these two moron versions of MI5, or the CIA and law enforcement are unleashed on the population, they do what all idiots do: pick on the clever ones. They surround them, mock them and disintegrate them if they can. And that is precisely what you are seeing with the targeted individuals (as Karen Stewart, ex NSA, has rightly confirmed to you). The inanity of the violations against the victims speaks for itself.

What you don’t see however, is that every targeted individual has something truly special about them as far as the overall system is concerned. They are in their own way instrumental to the system, but it is so niche and embedded in the social fabric that it is hard to spot unless you have a computer crunching through vast amounts of data to spot the pattern.

Once the truly special ones have been identified by central data analysis (on all your emails, social media, daily movement from phone data etc), the morons can be unleashed and they do the rest until the target is utterly destroyed and hounded to death.

Meanwhile, the elites in America don’t notice that the foundation under their feet has just been weakened considerably. This remains invisible until external pressure is applied.

7.If you want to verify what I am saying, track down who really owns your telecommunications and government data. The large contractors (e.g. Lockheed Martin etc) are in turn owned by the banks, who are in turn owned by the One Bank, which is headquartered here in Switzerland.

8. As a result of this take-down program your intelligence agencies and law enforcement are suffering from two problems:

(a) The top is in Deep Capture by corrupt forces steered from outside America.

Some people have mentioned the German black agency DVD, others have mentioned MI6, KGB, Chinese intel – the point is it doesn’t matter which of these you pick, they are ALL ONE at the top by now.

(b) As a result of the fast expansion, the rest of the agency is awash with total imbeciles.

This can cripple any system.

9. Due to these problems, the targeted individuals cannot actually appeal to any of the agencies PAID to stop illegal behavior (as one of you rightly demands) because the top is corrupted and most of the others are morons (with some good people interspersed who are stretched by having to lead the morons). Also the real payment is generated by the corrupting entities owned by the One Bank in Switzerland. Who pays the piper picks the tune.

(Note: Your tax dollars go anywhere but to pay your own institutions.)

10. Deep Capture in the intelligence agencies and law enforcement is a STATE OF NATIONAL EMERGENCY. That is because:

A SYSTEM CANNOT RECOVER BY ITSELF OUT OF DEEP CAPTURE.

It requires the concerted effort of every last person of integrity inside and outside the system to reverse this.

11. This is why a respected doctor in our midst was right to contact a Congressperson and others  he trusts and respects, because ALL OF YOU need to help SIMULTANEOUSLY for this to be reversed.

In essence, what binds you all is your integrity and mutual respect for each other. In a corrupted system that is a currency of gold.

12. It is for these reasons that you were all right at the same time: Under normal circumstances, it would be wrong to bother people outside law enforcement and regulatory bodies with this. BUT THE SYSTEM DOESN’T OPERATE UNDER NORMAL CIRCUMSTANCES.

It operates in a way that is more akin to the Fukushima reactors just before the disaster: all looks fine, but someone is about to set off some hidden nukes around the core and the protective outer structures have already been weakened by the criminals.

Do you all understand?

We don’t have time anymore for any of us to say “not my department”. Instead, you all have to rake your brain who YOU trust and can contact to help YOU to help US to help THE VICTIMS.

That’s because, I am not sure if we can stop the nukes being set off near the reactor core, so to speak. (There are some people who are trying to find those “nukes”, but even if they find them, removing them is another matter.)

So the only thing we can do for sure is to pull out the targeted individuals BECAUSE WE KNOW WHO THEY ARE!

Each one of them has some sort of function in the system that is systemically important (with some, it’s obvious, with others, it’s harder to spot). And we need all of them to be sure that the system can be stabilized.

Also, each one of them has effectively been weighed down by a lead weight. Their current status is far below where they should be according to their drive and ability. It’s like holding an inflated balloon down under water by force. If you take the weight off, they shoot up like a rocket under their own inner drive, lifting others up with them. This extra momentum can be used to repair and cycle the system.

It sounds theoretical and esoteric but it really isn’t. I had identified a way one can cycle an economy using a system’s own inertia back in 2013. I was in the process of trying this out on a small scale by trying to bootstrap a start-up that would be employing this mechanism. That is when I was hit full-whack by the intelligence agencies’ take-down operation. I guess they had figured out what I was trying to do before I had understood the implications.

Anyway, bottom line is WE NEED ALL THE TARGETED INDIVIDUALS for this and we need YOU ALL to help us free them from the concentration camps that the intelligence agencies have placed them in.

So, if you have understood the above, please try to come up with something using YOUR OWN INGENUITY to help us. You were contacted because others have identified you as special. So there is something about you that they don’t have, that we need and that sets you apart. Try to think what that could be. And try to think how you could use that what is special about you to help to cycle the system.

If you need motivation or inspiration, please have a look at the following:

https://stop007.org/home/life-sign-monitor/

We had to put some of our main leaders in the community of targeted individuals under daily “life-sign monitoring” because of the repeated assassination attempts against them. Ramola, for example, sent a memo to Donald Trump after his inauguration, drawing his attention to the extermination program run against the US population, and was so incapacitated by the microwave assaults that she was bed ridden for a week. When that is done to a person, it really is touch and go if the organs fail or not.

In her case, it’s clear what annoyed the CIA. However, some others don’t even know why the intelligence agencies keep trying to kill them – they just do. Can you spot the pattern?

Source, with thanks: Dr. Katherine Horton, Ph.D

Intel Agency Crimes: False Flags, Lies, Media Control, & Mind Control Psy Ops

Ramola D/1/13/2017

By definition, intelligence agents are liars. Alex Constantine

While analysts of previous false flag events and manufactured terrorism rally online this week to share analysis and commentary on the recent creation-of-chaos-and-terror shooting event on January 6 at Fort Lauderdale Airport in Florida, and while oddly McCarthyist frenzy mounts in mainstream CIA-controlled media to blame Russia for the hacked DNC and Clinton/Podesta emails released by Wikileaks–blowing the cover on a worldwide child trafficking operation now named Pedogate (a huge subject to be considered here separately shortly), reminders that we are surrounded by criminal Lies and Liars in high places surface all around us.

Luckily for the awakened and aware among us, there are several commentators speaking out, and as we step further into 2017, it seems like the holy water of Truth on all sides can no longer be held back, will no longer be held back, and will spill, despite manic attempts at “Leak Control” by those–in government, and particularly in the global and national Intelligence Community–who have been and seem to believe that they can continue to suppress, oppress, tyrannize, and endlessly deceive us. But not for much longer–if these avalanches of truth have anything to do with it.

“The Whole System Runs on Lies”

William Binney, NSA whistleblower and truthteller extraordinaire informs Robert Scheer, Editor in Chief at Truthdig, in this video conversation, that the recent Intelligence report promoted by ODNI/NSA/CIA/Military heads (caught out previously in lies), Clapper, Brennan, Comey, Rogers  where allegations of Russian involvement are made “with high confidence” really suggests that “they don’t have a shred of evidence.” 

“They say, “with high confidence”–now that’s the first clue that they don’t have a shred of evidence that it’s true. Because if they claim some confidence level, that means they don’t have the evidence…unless they present it so you can look at it and say, is this beyond a reasonable understanding or point that would allow you to say, yeah, they probably did it..?…The point that I’ve been trying to make, on television and so on is, NSA should have a record. If it was a hack coming in across the network, NSA’s got a record of it. And if they transferred data out, and then transferred that data across electronically to Wikileaks, then they should have a record of that also.

Because they have so many collection points–they have tens of thousands of access points in the network that collect and sort data….They’ve deployed hundreds of trace route programs in the European area, that means they can trace the route of every packet that’s sent across the network–billions of them everyday. So the point is they should at least have a fragment–they might  not show every packet that went to Wikileaks from the Russians but they should have some of them…

The real issue is, who passed the data to Wikileaks? It’s not how many people tried to hack the DNC, because every country in the world tries to hack everything that’s available in the US–China, Israel, everybody! And we hack everybody else too–so hacking is done worldwide by everybody. That’s not the issue. The issue is, who passed the data to Wikileaks?…And so far, no one has produced a shred of evidence to show that anyone who has attempted that, which would probably be the major countries in the world, hacked the DNC and any other…Hillary, as Secretary of State, was a prime target for all governments around the world, so you know they were trying to get to her–so it’s not a question of who’s hacking who, because everybody’s hacking everybody! The question is, who passed the data to Wikileaks?” –William Binney

In other words, this most respected former NSA Technical Director and crack mathematician and cryptographer at the NSA is informing us there is no way a Russian hack and leak could Not have been picked up by routine NSA telecommunication protocols, in some material form, in some very concrete and definitive ways, had there really been one. To spell it out: the whole thing’s a lie. The allegation a lie, the “high degree of confidence” a lie, the earnest demeanor a lie, the joint Intelligence community leadership stance before the Senate Intelligence Committee a lie.

clapper.png“They’re always trying to divert attention from the main issue, the central core issues, the government’s always trying to do that–it’s like the Wizard of Oz, we’re not supposed to pay attention to the man behind the curtain–and that’s really the theme here, always being diverted to something that’s not relevant.”–William Binney

In response to Mr. Scheer’s noting that NSA would probably bring up “the compromising of methods and sources of gathering intelligence” (also a favorite CIA excuse) as an excuse for not providing detailed evidence, Mr. Binney goes on to say:

“Methods and sources are already compromised, they’re already on the Web. All you have to do is Google things like NSA and Treasure Map or NSA and any of the muscular programs–the Bull Run program or the internal tapping programs; you’ll see a lot of them referenced there though–Fair View, Storm Brew, Blarney; that gets involving all the companies in the US–service providers for the Internet, the phone companies, all–30 of them total, according to the Blarney slides–are participating with them, sharing all this data and information with NSA–so, you know, the data has already been out there…we’ve spent tens of billions of dollars every year to pick this data up.”–William Binney

Most revealing beyond that, for all of us interested in truth, transparency, and accountability in government, is the succeeding exchange, where Mr. Scheer emphasizes the aspect of Mr. Binney making these statements  with “their terminology–with high confidence, as somebody who was inside the system,” an insider who has worked at the NSA, and Mr. Binney responds:

binney“I mean, I know they lie to each other internally too–the whole system runs on Lies.”

“What do you mean, they lie to each other?”

“Yes. They lie to each other, in terms of what–why they want something done, or what they’re doing with certain money, internally; they move money around from program to program–and they don’t tell each other, they just take it, you know–and they lie to Congress all the time, they would have meetings before they talk to Congress saying, “What’s our story, our corporate position here?” So they would tell their corporate position. This is within the NSA.

This is what I call: Oversight is a joke.

Because the only thing they get fed is data they agree to tell them. They don’t tell them the truth. So, they’re lying to everybody. Why, they lie to Congress, they lie to the public, it’s a continuation of that foundation of lying.” –William Binney

Deception has been “Legalized”: False Flags and Mass Shootings

Deception is a way of LIEfe for the Intelligence Community, we are reminded, and deception of the American citizenry is increasingly encouraged at the national level by sweeping, unstopped, bogus Executive Orders and military Authorization Acts which permit military Psy Ops and social science Psy Ops to be freely run for “Behavioral Insights” on civilian populations. Which would include “weaponizing the narrative” or strewing propaganda — aka Fake News — like confetti over the heads of television-watchers and news-readers, in an astonishing inversion of normalcy that Professor Michel Chossudovsky takes apart in this article at Global Research: The War against the Truth, When the Lie Becomes the Truth. Is Obama Preparing War Against Russia?

At the end of Obama’s presidency, Fiction has become Fact. 

A world of fantasy permeates the mainstream media.  

The Lie has become the Truth.

“Fake News” has become “Real News”. 

And “Real News” by the independent online media is now tagged as Russian propaganda. 

What we are dealing with is a War against the Truth. 

Concepts are turned upside down. 

Political insanity prevails. We are at a dangerous crossroads in our history  The dangers of global warfare are routinely obfuscated by media disinformation.”–Professor Michel Chossudovsky

Because deception is being “legalized” by Executive Order and by the NDAA, the Intelligence Community perhaps believes it is acceptable to run an endless series of deadly Psy Ops which include Active Shooter drills and enacted acts of terror which double ultimately as real terror productions, since communities and populations are indeed being terrorized.

This video blogger and Fort Lauderdale airport employee who handed in her resignation immediately following the airport shooting on the basis of her understanding that the entire shooting was a set-up, a false flag, an acted-out farce, but one with real repercussions of terror and endangerment on airport grounds, and Ole Dammegard, well-known investigator/reporter of false flags, interviewed by SGT Report, both highlight the essential role played by Intelligence agencies in this latest shooting, and in others.

Ole Dammegard, exploring both the Berlin truck attack and others, points to Freemason symbolism evident at the sites of these false flags, and states that those responsible for the creation and execution of these false flags are Intelligence agencies from a certain group of countries working together: the CIA, the Mossad, MI6, the French Intel group, and Saudi Arabian Intel.

In various interviews and analyses on Youtube and on his website, Ole Dammegard offers insights into the totalitarian, building-police-state rationale behind these apparently set-up and Psy Op-running events by this far-from-benign coterie of joint American, European, Israeli, and Saudi Arabian intelligence agencies.

Other analysts taking apart the Fort Lauderdale shooting include Dahboo7 of Underground World News, who posted a video of a witness reporting multiple shooters, and Shepard Ambellas of Intellihub who published an article highlighting the witness account of a pilot who reported shootings at two terminals, not one, as reported in mainstream media.

Taking apart the crisis-actor, staged-response scenario as evident in news interviews shortly following the incident also is Zachary Hubbard, who is writing a book on false flags. Youtube has several independent analysts working on this, as this playlist shows.

Many of us understand today that these horrific events, purporting to stem from ISIS-inspired terrorists, that appear to have escalated post-9/11, are being inflicted on us with criminal intent to deceive—all in the interests of further stripping us of our basic human rights and natural freedoms, and of bolstering, expanding, and entrenching the Security state, the Surveillance state, the Secret-Police’d state. The language of “paranoid conspiracy theory” long foisted on us by a fully-controlled corporate media seeking to deceive no longer works on the awakened. To be able to see through the deception is an act of clarity, not paranoia.

Operation Mockingbird & Controlled Media (Suppressing Media, Deceiving Media, Lying Media)

Which brings us to this ever-present question of Operation Mockingbird and its continuance in our midst. Beyond the recorded ’50s-and-upward history of CIA-control of the media as explored by investigative journalists and researchers such as Carl Bernstein in ’77 and Alex Constantine in ’97, we are still looking today, in 2017, at a landscape of Intel-run media.

“Further investigation into the matter, CIA officials say, would inevitably reveal a series of embarrassing relationships in the 1950s and 1960s with some of the most powerful organizations and individuals in American journalism.

Among the executives who lent their cooperation to the Agency were William Paley of the Columbia Broadcasting System, Henry Luce of Time Inc., Arthur Hays Sulzberger of the New York Times, Barry Bingham Sr. of the LouisviIle Courier‑Journal, and James Copley of the Copley News Service. Other organizations which cooperated with the CIA include the American Broadcasting Company, the National Broadcasting Company, the Associated Press, United Press International, Reuters, Hearst Newspapers, Scripps‑Howard, Newsweek magazine, the Mutual Broadcasting System, the Miami Herald and the old Saturday Evening Post and New York Herald‑Tribune.

By far the most valuable of these associations, according to CIA officials, have been with the New York Times, CBS and Time Inc.” —Carl Bernstein, The CIA and the Media/Rolling Stone, 1977

“In 1977, the New York Times ran a front-page story, detailing a worldwide propaganda effort, with direct CIA ownership of some 50 newspapers in the US and elsewhere. In 1977, the Copely News Service admitted to working closely with the Company—23 employees at Copely alone were full-time employees of the agency….One CIA despatch, dated April 1, 1967, declassified nine years later under FOIA, advised “assets” in the media on “Countering Criticism of the Warren Report.” Features and book reviews “are particularly appropriate for this purpose,” the CIA despatch observed….The CIA’s mouthpieces in the press were directed to emphasize: “No significant new evidence has emerged,” “there is no agreement among critics,” or the ever-popular, “Conspiracy on the large scale suggested would be impossible to conceal”. –Alex Constantine, p 42, Virtual Government, CIA Mind Control Operations in America (Feral House, 1997)

Many of us understand today that The Washington Post, The New York Times, CNN, are compromised operations. How about NPR, Democracy Now, PBS, the Chicago Tribune, the Boston Globe, the Los Angeles Times, the Guardian? Is it possible that all mainstream media is compromised? Many researchers point in that direction. These analyses and articles spell it out for us.

Amazon, ‘The Washington Post’, and that $600 million CIA Contract/Greg Mitchell, The Nation

The CIA, Amazon, Bezos, and the Washington Post: An Exchange with Executive Editor Martin Baron/Norman Solomon, Common Dreams

CIA and the Media: 50 Things You Should Know/James Tracy, The Event Chronicle

Excerpt: 45. Former CIA case officer Robert David Steele states that CIA manipulation of news media is “worse” in the 2010s than in the late 1970s when Bernstein wrote “The CIA and the Media.” “The sad thing is that the CIA is very able to manipulate [the media]and it has financial arrangements with media, with Congress, with all others. But the other half of that coin is that the media is lazy.” James Tracy interview with Robert David Steele, August 2, 2014,

FACEBOOK: A CIA-controlled Social Network Run By A Boy Tyrant/State of the Nation

The CIA and the News Media, an Eyeopener Preview/The Corbett Report

Systematic ‘Fake News’ Planted by Britain’s Intelligence Services

These Six Corporations Control 90% of the Media in America/Ashley Lutz, Business Insider, 2012

False Flag Terror and Conspiracies of Silence/James Tracy/Global Research

Propaganda and Disinformation: How the CIA Manufactures History/Victor Marchetti

Additionally, as explored by various journalists (to be further explored here), including Nick Turse in The Complex: How the Military Invades Our Everyday Lives,  and James Der Derian in Virtuous War: Mapping the Military-Industrial-Media-Entertainment Network, there are Defense connections with media, with grant money and funding provided, including to public media such as PBS.

Given these facts, to what extent, really, can any of us believe anything that is published by these newspapers or broadcast on these networks? They’ve been “authorized” by the President and the NDAA and the CIA after all to spread Government propaganda (a.k.a Lies) like apple butter all over the place. Orwell’s Ministry of Truth is not really a new arrival, it’s been here all along apparently.

The Mind Control Psy Op and the CIA/DOD/NSA’s Interest in Denial of Contemporary Mind Control Experimentation

There are two Psy Ops in play here: the False Flag Psy Op—as explored above, and the Mind Control Psy Op.

What we’re being asked to believe, by the tenor of mainstream media coverage of Esteban Santiago, the supposed lone Fort Lauderdale shooter, as a sadly delusional, mentally-ill Army veteran given to hallucinations and sudden behavioral changes, possible victim of PTSD, who pulls out a gun to randomly shoot to kill in a public place, is that Mind Control experimentation and operations run by the CIA—which he purportedly reported, as personal experience—do not exist, could not exist, cannot be imagined to exist, and should, rightfully and rationally, only be ridiculed as impossible and implausible by the rest of us. The conditioned response we’re being led to espouse is that of the reasoning, science-minded skeptic: Mind Control by the CIA? Of course that’s a delusion. Off to the psychiatrist with his head!

Except: Every literate American—and citizen, worldwide–knows that Mind Control operations run by the CIA are not delusions.

Look up MK ULTRA—which became MK SEARCH, or look up PROJECT ARTICHOKE, PROJECT BLUEBIRD, MK DELTA. Read researcher John Marks’ book, The Search for a Manchurian Candidate, which expertly condenses hundreds of pages unearthed in the mid-70’s by the Rockefeller Commission along with interviews and other documentation into a few succinct chapters tracing the horrors of CIA Mind Control and Behavioral Control Experimentation run by psychopathic CIA doctors and crazed University academics (with then-CIA-head Richard Helms at the helm of this nefarious enterprise) in the deadly, unethical, and extreme use of toxic drugs, hallucinogens, electroshock, hypnosis, sensory deprivation, electromagnetic radiation attacks and other abuses, to create “the perfect agent” capable of forgetting whatever infamy the no-limits-CIA wished him or her to commit.

This historic background to Mind Control, of course, can today be researched extensively online and in books. Several investigative reporters and researchers have published books and articles on this subject, including Dr. Colin Ross, Walter Bowart, and others.

“The testing of drugs by the CIA was just a part of the United States government’s top-secret mind-control project, a project which had spanned thirty-five years and had involved tens of thousands of individuals. It involved techniques of hypnosis, narco-hypnosis, electronic brain stimulation, behavioral effects of ultrasonic, microwave, and low-frequency sound, aversive and other behavior modification therapies. In fact, there was virtually no aspect of human behavioral control that was not explored in their search for the means to control the memory and will of both individuals and whole masses of people.

The CIA succeeded in developing a whole range of psycho-weapons to expand its already ominous psychological warfare arsenal. With these capabilities, it was now possible to wage a new kind of war—a war which would take place invisibly, upon the battlefield of the human mind. … [p. 19]”–Walter Bowart, Operation Mind Control/Mind Control and Ritual Abuse Information Service

“And, in 1974, the first victim of Parkinson’s disease treated by ESB walked gracefully out of a San Francisco hospital under his own power, thanks to portable ESB. He had a “stimoceiver” implanted in his brain … The “stimoceiver” which weighed only a few grams and was small enough to implant under his scalp, permitted both remote stimulation of his brain and the instantaneous telemetric recording of his brain waves. … [pp. 256-257]

And by the late 1960s, the “remote control” of the human brain—accomplished without the implantation of electrodes—was well on its way to being realized.

A research and development team at the Space and Biology Laboratory of the University of California at the Los Angeles Brain Research Institute found a way to stimulate the brain by creating an electrical field completely outside the head. Dr. W. Ross Adey stimulated the brain with electric pulse levels which were far below those thought to be effectual in the old implanting technique. … [p. 257]

In 1975 a primitive “mind reading machine” was tested at the Stanford Research Institute. The machine is a computer which can recognize a limited amount of words by monitoring a person’s silent thoughts. This technique relies upon the discovery that brain wave tracings taken with an electroencephalograph (EEG) show distinctive patterns that correlate with individual words—whether the words are spoken aloud or merely subvocalized (thought of).” –Walter Bowart, Operation Mind Control/Mind Control and Ritual Abuse Information Service

MK ULTRA did not stop, either, in 1974 (when illegal domestic activities by the CIA in the investigation of Americans were exposed by Seymour Hersh and the subsequent enquiry and Rockefeller Commission set off some internal truth-telling at the CIA from more ethical CIA heads like James Schlesinger and William Colby, with the result that, despite Helms’ dastardly actions in destroying the most important records, some information on MK ULTRA’s projects and subprojects has come down to us); as many researchers note, it went underground—or more deeply undercover. This had been set in motion already, in the mid-’60s.  In the words of intrepid researcher and reporter Alex Constantine, author of Virtual Government, CIA Mind Control Operations in America (Feral House, 1997):

“In the mid-1960s, the Langley spychologists feared exposure. Newspaper reporters had caught wind of Auschwitzean behavioral modification research funded by the government. Congress was asking questions. The thugs at Langley scratched their heads. It was only a matter of time before an inquisitive reporter exposed the rot of mind control.

The solution: CIA scientists bugged out of the laboratory. The experiments were moved into the community, hidden, like the flying saucers, in plain sight. Eccentric religious groups were organized or co-opted by intelligence operatives, including the People’s Temple, the Symbionese Liberation Army, Ordo Templis Otientis (OTO), Finders, Solar Temple, and the Bhagwan Shree Rajneesh Movement, among others.” –Alex Constantine, p 152, “Cult Abuse of Children and Mind Control Programming,” Virtual Government, CIA Mind Control Operations in America (Feral House, 1997)

Studies of MK ULTRA and mind control today falsely assume that the experiments stopped after Congressional exposure, asserts Constantine:

“Most studies of Mind Control focus on experiments conducted 20-40 years ago—as if the CIA abandoned mind machines because a few loose secrets tumbled out in Congressional testimony. The clandestine operations branches are in fact very interested in EM brain manipulation. A 30-year lag yawns between declassified projects and the most advanced technology known to the American proletariat.

Contemporary military cybernetics dwarfs Orwell’s most totalistic techno-fantasies.” –Alex Constantine, p 78,3 Virtual Government, CIA Mind Control Operations in America (Feral House, 1997)

“Following public outrage, the CIA announced it had ceased its mind manipulation programmes. Victor Marchetti, a CIA veteran of 14 years who turned ‘whistle-blower’, exposed this to be untrue.

In 1977, Marchetti said the CIA claims to have ceased were a cover story. Under scrutiny, the agency were quick to downplay the success of MK-ULTRA – claiming no real advances were achieved. Miles Copeland, another long-serving CIA officer disputed this. Speaking to a reporter, Copeland revealed that ‘the congressional subcommittee which went into this sort of thing only got the barest glimpse’. Another source within the intelligence community says that after 1963, CIA efforts increasingly focused on psychoelectronics. Narcohypnosis had been drained dry.” –Richard G. Gall, Mind Control and MK ULTRA

Contemporary Non-Consensual Neuro/Mind Control experimentation Is Not a Chimera

From the mid-70s to the present time, word of MK ULTRA’s continuance has come to us in a steady stream from victim testimonials, reported by non-corporate journalists and researchers. Mind Control experimentation appears to have splintered in many directions and continued.

One of those directions, deriving from advances made in programming the minds of putative agents with hypnosis, pursued the powers of radio hypnosis, or subliminal hypnosis fed remotely into human brains via radio frequencies.

In 1967 a writer named Lincoln Lawrence published a book … [Were We Controlled? presented] a sophisticated technique known as RHIC–EDOM … Radio Hypnotic Intra-Cerebral Control–Electronic Dissolution of Memory. …

“Under RHIC, a ‘sleeper’ can be used years later with no realization that the ‘sleeper’ is even being controlled! He can be made to perform acts that he will have no memory of ever having carried out. In a manipulated kind of kamikaze operation where the life of the ‘sleeper’ is dispensable, RHIC processing makes him particularly valuable because if he is detected and caught before he performs the act specified . . . nothing he says will implicate the group or government which processed and controlled him.” …

What really happened, according to Lawrence, was that during the operation a small electrode was implanted inside Oswald’s mastoid sinus. The electrode responded to a radio signal which would make audible, inside Oswald’s head, certain electronic commands to which he had already been posthypnotically conditioned to respond. …

In 1975 the RHIC–EDOM story surfaced again. … The journalist, James L. Moore, said that the papers in his possession described the details of “a military technique of mind-control called Radio-Hypnotic Intra-Cerebral Control–Electronic Dissolution of Memory.” …

According to Moore, in the initial (RHIC) stage of programming the … [person] is put into a deep hypnotic trance, and conditioned to go into trance at the sound of a specific tone. “A person may be placed under this control with or without his knowledge, programmed to perform certain actions and maintain certain attitudes” whenever he hears the tone. …

The second part of the process, electronic dissolution of memory (EDOM), Moore said, “… By electronically jamming the brain, acetylcholine creates static which blocks out sights and sounds. You would then have no memory of what you saw or heard; your mind would be a blank.” …

The claims of James L. Moore would sound fantastic were it not for the abundance of information to support the possibility of their validity. …” [pp. 261-264] —Walter Bowart, Operation Mind Control/Mind Control and Ritual Abuse Information Service

Analysts examining the behavior of programmed assassins from John Lennon’s killer to various mass shooters today to various cases of homicides and suicides note the possibility of such radio hypnosis being instrumental in these cases. In such scenarios, suggestions fed hypnotically into the victim’s mind, become irresistible directives to action; after the action–the assassination, the mass shooting, the murder of family members, even children–the victim is deprogrammed with a post-hypnotic suggestion in order to “break the spell”.

The modern history of remotely affecting brains and behavior with energy weapons (involving microwave and radio frequencies, as well as ELFs or Extremely Low Frequencies) and Brain Computer Interfaces (involving implants) as exposed in studies, papers, and patents has been traced by various neuroexperimentation researchers, and can be studied in Renee Pittman Mitchell’s Remote Brain Targeting or Dr. Nick Begich’s Earth Rising: Toward a Thousand Years of Peace or Earth Rising II: The Betrayal of Science, Society, and the Soul–and other books and websites online.   The ways and means of affecting brains and engaging in Mind Control, including directly inputting specific human voices into human heads, with specific directives, instructions, and commentary, are multifarious today: synthetic telepathy or Voice to Skull, a military term, and microwave hearing, the Frey effect, the Neurophone, are not fantasies but patents acknowledged by the military. (Some links at end.)

“The intelligence agencies are capable of transmitting voices and images directly to the cranium’s sensory pathways. The onset of advanced radio frequency technology has given rise to a coming generation of “thought police.” They are a profound threat to a democratic society. Radio frequency weapons have eased the malignant growth of fascism wuthin the intelligence agencies. Anyone who falls into disfavor with this elite can be condemned to interminable physical and psychological torture. The victim is often murdered without a trace.” –Alex Constantine, p 292, “CIA, Mind Control, and the US Postal Service,” Virtual Government, CIA Mind Control Operations in America (Feral House, 1997)

It is an absolute disgrace and should be a source of shame to all of humanity that our governments–who are inarguably engaging in contemporary programs of non-consensual brain, mind, body, and behavioral experimentation and undisclosed physical/biometric surveillance to include neuro-surveillance and body-surveillance, as well as in field testing of “non-lethal weapons” as reported by thousands of articulate and often highly educated victims worldwide (the primary culprits in the US appear to be the CIA, DIA, NSA, DARPA, and other branches of the DOD, including the USAF, while country-specific Intelligence agencies such as MI5, MI6, the Mossad, DGSE, and others are involved overseas–and Universities and research institutions supported by Defense and CIA grants, both known and classified, are also involved)–are engaging in a mass cover-up of these crimes against humanity, employing mainstream media, Law Enforcement, and the political tool of psychiatry to do so.

This is an organized, systemic Military/Intelligence cover-up, and the false, untenable public cover story being used for this criminal cover-up–as revealed by many FOIA requests, including by this writer–is the usual bland “classification of technologies in the interests of national security”. 

It is only through this criminally deceptive means–a deception that has lasted more than 50 years–that such reliably-CIA-controlled media as The New York Times, which ran an extensive story on Esteban Santiago in the Sunday paper (Jan 8), covering his life and background in Puerto Rico, his abrupt change of personality from quiet and scholarly to abusive and violent post his Iraq war experience, and such agencies as the FBI, who were contacted by him in Alaska, when he walked in to report Mind Control neuro-operations by the CIA, can blandly present the very mention of Mind Control by the CIA as obviously delusional, obviously symptomatic of paranoia, obviously baseless in reality. Mainstream media news-readers and television-watchers, obviously, are being encouraged and trained and conditioned once more to fall in with this lie.

This planned and systemic criminal cover-up extends to the highest levels of government. United States government commissions and committees ignore the testimonials of victims, as recent events at the President’s Bioethical Commission and the Secretary’s Advisory Committee for Human Research Protections show. All in the interests of maintaining the National-Security cover-up apparently, and propelling the Mind Control Psy Op.

“There is a conspiracy within the intelligence agencies to conceal field-testing of highly-advanced mind control technology….The government still experiments on private citizens without their consent, often to death. They will continue to experiment and deny until forced to stop.” –Alex Constantine, p 294, “CIA, Mind Control, and the US Postal Service,” Virtual Government, CIA Mind Control Operations in America (Feral House, 1997)

Global Statistics for Non-Consensual Neuro-Experimentation

Meanwhile, the body count mounts. Human rights activists continue to work to record the claims of those being victimized by remote neuro-technologies.

“Forty years later, the Department of the Army sanctioned the torture of civilians in a 1972 report entitled Controlled Offensive Behavior—USSR, a review of Russian scientific literature based upon 500 studies on the biological effects of “Super-high frequency electromagnetic oscillations”: “SHF may be used as a technique for altering human behavior. Lethal and non-lethal effects have been shown to exist. In certain non-lethal exposures, definite behavioral changes have occurred. There also appears to be a change in mammals when exposed to SHF in sensitivity to sound, light, and olfactory stimuli.”

The purpose of invasive electromagnetic brain experimentation, according to the report—which seems on hindsight to have cleared the way for experimentation on unconsenting subjects—was perceived by the Pentagon as “the creation of one or more of several possible mental states in the conscious or unconscious areas of the brain. The ultimate goal of controlled offensive behavior might well be the total submission of one’s will to some outside force.” –Alex Constantine, p 77, “Oscillatori Telegrafica,” Virtual Government, CIA Mind Control Operations in America (Feral House, 1997)

The most conservative reports place the numbers of non-consensual neuro-experimentees at about 2,000 within the US and 10,000 worldwide. Others suggest the numbers are much higher, ranging from 200,000 to 300,000 within the US, to millions worldwide. Some activists maintain that these finite numbers stem reliably from reports of those who know for certain they are being targeted and experimented on; others say millions, perhaps all 7 billion of us, are truly being experimented on (especially if you consider such technologies as nanotechnology from aerosols/chem trails, continuous ELF waves and pulses aimed at degrading brains, in conjunction with HAARP, and other remote mass brain stimulation technologies).

Some researchers maintain meticulous records of contacts from reporting victims, country by country (to be reported on here further). Even here, the ardent desire for Psy Ops by the military/Intelligence practitioners of military deception raises its ugly head: researchers and activists are often also contacted by fake victims, in apparent efforts to Deny/Degrade activism efforts, muddy the issue, and confuse the numbers.

In any case, it is an absolute fact that high numbers of people globally are reporting the experience of non-consensual neuro-experimentation and energy-weapons-usage to prominent researchers, writers, and human rights activists in this area (including to this writer), including the kinds of Mind Control mentioned aboveradio hypnosis and synthetic telepathy. Several articles here cover this subject, which will continue to be covered here. Notable in this area is the case of Rohinie Bisesar, the talented young Canadian woman jailed for a sudden fatal stabbing of a stranger, and who reported mental manipulation, bio-robotizing (external physical manipulation of limbs), and synthetic telepathy, whose story was covered here earlier.

The Mind Control Psy Op is Run by the CIA/DOD Complex and Mainstream Media

The Mind Control Psy Op suggests that it is delusional to posit that the CIA is introducing voices into anyone’s head, or exhorting anyone through this covered means to go fight for ISIS or radio-hypnotizing anyone to kill on command.

The fact is, patents for the remote manipulation of human brains have been registered since and past the mid-70s, when MK ULTRA was supposed to have stopped. (Please see links below.)

The fact is, there are thousands today, testifying to remote Mind Control.

The fact is, mainstream media which both pretends Mind Control is far-fetched, a “conspiracy theory” and that MK ULTRA is history, and not highly active today, is slavishly obedient to the CIA. And the NSA. And the DOD. That would cover DARPA, and the DIA.  All of whom–by many accounts–are the very parties engaging in Mind Control operations and experimentation today. Also the ones self-permitted to run military psychological warfare–or Psy Ops–on citizens today.

For all those who still read and absorb and look up to our long-established news agencies and outlets who are controlled by the CIA, it must be stressed that perhaps the only reason covert MK ULTRA-extending Mind Control programs have been relegated, historically and currently–by mainstream media analysts, journalists, and editors–to “fringe”, “conspiracy theory”, and “alternative” labels is because mainstream media, in the strong-fisted grip of the CIA/DOD complex, has been falling in line with CIA disinformation and propaganda directives and deliberately, strategically, unashamedly, and unethically feeding us with lies. For decades!

These too are crimes against humanity. Media is culpable, for the direct deception of humanity. As is organized psychiatry, for they work hand in hand, to keep the lie going.

To all unsuspecting consumers of mainstream media, who will believe anything because it’s been published by “leading newspapers” like the New York Times or the Washington Post, I would say: Call it Neuro Experimentation or call it Mind Control. Ignore it, and ignore reporting  victims, like many top human rights organizations (which perhaps take funding from the Military and directions from the chimera of “National Security”) have, inexplicably, been doing. But recognize, that with remote brain manipulation, all of us, and all of our children are most definitely in danger.

Incontrovertible fact: Past Nuremberg, past the Nazi atrocities of World War II, past the reported atrocities of MK ULTRA from the ’50s to the ’70s, past the ’50s to the ’90s history of secret and non-consensual military radiation experiments, chemical experiments, biological experiments, syphilis experiments, Tuskegee and Guatemala, reported by such journalists as Eileen Welsome and Harriet K. Washington, non-consensual human experimentation has returned, shamefully, to the American landscape, and the global landscape.

Inform Yourself, Inform the World

We are surrounded by lies, sanctioned military deception, sanctioned Intelligence deception, sanctioned mainstream-media deception. More than ever, we need to individually exercise discernment in our response to the toxic deluge of misinformation, disinformation and plain lies washing over us. We’re not merely in Orwell’s 1984, we’ve tunnelled through into 1984-squared.

To close, on the subject of “non-lethal weapons” being used on the streets, and rampant non-consensual experimentation, two more American whistleblowers offer insight into the world of deception we’re inside.

NSA Whistleblower Karen Stewart’s recent interview on the Jeff Rense talk show (to be covered here separately shortly) offers unvarnished disclosure on the subject of Homeland Security which has morphed into Homeland Terrorism, the complicity of Intelligence agencies and military groups who have joined hands to direct criminal attacks with directed-energy weapons (DEWs) against non-criminal citizens, glibly naming them terrorists and spies and extremists and unleashing both undisclosed neuro/physical surveillance and undisclosed neuro-experimentation on them.

This video, Psy Ops Wars on Americans, by a former US Air Force Officer and whistleblower explains the Psy Ops further surrounding the Fort Lauderdale shooting, and this accompanying post at Facebook which he requested this writer to share discloses the radiation-weapon and neuro-weapon experimentation he has experienced and continues to experience.

Many analysts and alternative media researchers, as well as consciousness researchers tell us that the only way we can, as members of an exploited and acted-on public, put an end to this slide into complete totalitarian dementia, is by waking up individually and collectively and seeing through this charade for what it is. Our mere awareness can make a difference. Our collective awareness, they assure us, will inexorably lead to winds of change. It’s an optimism that might serve us well. Collectively we may find the clarity and courage to speak out with intent, challenge the prevailing narrative, and hold the criminals running this farce responsible. And accountable.

For all past and current victims of non-consensual neuro-experimentation, directed-energy weapons testing, and undisclosed “electronic” surveillance which doubles as covert neuro-surveillance and covert bodily-surveillance with electromagnetic weapons, nothing less than a second war crimes tribunal, Nuremberg 2.0, will do.

Those heads of Intel agencies who are currently spending a lot of time trying to divert attention to Russia — perhaps to build a case to further fortress and buttress themselves behind an even greater barrage of surveillance and security laws (if one can imagine that) — may well be seeking to deflect attention from the crimes against humanity they have already steadily been committing, crimes they continue to run undercover while blinding us with lies.

On his website, Ole Dammegard offers a list of suggestions for what any one of us can do, top of the list being, Wake up – inform and educate yourself about what is actually going on in the world. It is only by us being asleep that this madness can go on.”

The world needs to know and act on the truth. Please inform yourself, inform the world.

Related:

Hearing “Voices”/The Hidden History of the CIA’s Electromagnetic Mind-Control Experiments/Global Alert by Alex Constantine/1995

Hypnosis Comes of Age/George H. Estabrooks, Ph.D./Science Digest, April, 1971, 44-50

Synthetic Telepathy and the Early Mind Wars/Richard Alan Miller/2001

Origins and Techniques of Monarch Mind Control/The Vigilant Citizen/Hidden Knowledge

Lists of Mind Control/Neuro Experimentation Articles:

Earthpulse Press/Dr. Nick Begich

Paul Baird/Surveillance Issues/Links

Renee Pittman Books

Mind Justice/Cheryl Welsh

Mind Control/Neuroweaponry/Electronic Warfare Patents:

Electronic Warfare Patents/Neuroweaponry/Omnisense

Mind Control Patents/Peace Pink/Soleil Mavis

This article may be reproduced in full or part anywhere online with attribution and linkback. Please share to inform.

Seth Farber, Ph.D: The Psychiatric Metanarrative, Targeted Individuals, and the Deep State: A Response to The New York Times

Not long ago, in June 2016, The New York Times published a piece by Mike McPhate, titled “United States of Paranoia: They See Gangs of Stalkers,” purporting to offer an unbiased journalistic exploration of the subject of “Targeted Individuals.” This piece garnered quite some attention and consternation from among the ranks of those actually being targeted, surveiled, and assaulted today with EMF/sonic/scalar weapons–as well as those educated, informed Americans who are well-aware that such high-tech surveillance, targeting, and assault is indeed occurring–and was covered here earlier, in response, as well as here, in reportage of a key interviewee, Dr. Robert Duncan’s response.

Now Dr. Seth Farber, a deeply insightful psychologist, psychotherapist, scholar, and author steps forward to address the glaring omissions, elisions, deceptions, and inadequacies of Mr. McPhate’s article, pointing up the hollowness of its claim to objectivity, and offering a comprehensive discursive response that considers the diverse aspects of contemporary psychiatry, contemporary surveillance, historic non-consensual human experimentation, historic covert Intelligence operations, whistleblower testimony, classified military research, neuroweaponry, and the increasingly-evident hand of the “Deep State” which bear on this issue. I am pleased to publish this tremendous tour de force by Dr. Farber, honored that my words are included in it, and highly recommend that every single psychiatrist, psychologist, medical professional, and journalist in the USA and worldwide read it, closely and completely, to fully understand the extreme nature of Targeting in our midst today, as well as the unethical, colluding role played by psychiatrists and co-opted Media, in protecting it.

ayt-problems-with-psychiatristsaIn Dr. Farber’s words: The development of a totalitarian regime—nominally a constitutional republic—in which human rights and the constitutional right to liberty are routinely trampled upon is today an ominous prospect in America.” The prevention of such a development,” he emphasizes, is now dependent upon the willingness of small minorities of individuals who are inspired by transcendental ethical ideals to mobilize larger groups to oppose the human rights abuses that are committed by the Deep State and by the mental health system… I hope with all my heart that this article will be the harbinger of such profoundly-needed change. — Ramola D, December 2016

***

Dr. Seth Farber, Ph.D, is an author, psychotherapist, and an editor of The Journal of Mind and Behavior –he completed his doctorate in psychology at California Institute of Integral Studies in 1984. His work has been influenced by such renowned dissident psychiatrists as the late Thomas Szasz, M.D. who wrote the Foreword to Farber’s first book, Madness, Heresy and the Rumor of Angels: The Revolt against the Mental Health System (1993). See his books and email address at http://www.sethHfarber.com.

The Psychiatric Metanarrative, Targeted Individuals, and the Deep State: A Response to The New York Times

by Seth H. Farber, Ph.D

Introduction
The Corporate Media and Psychiatry: Veiling the Human Rights Violations of the Deep State
Advancing the Psychiatric Metanarrative, Neutralizing Deep State Critics
The Psychiatric Fantasy System and the Battle Against Non-Conformity
The Psychiatric Pharmaceutical Industrial Complex
The Deep State on Trial
The CIA Assassination of Its Own Agent — Protecting Whose Security?
Whistleblowers Post 9/11
TIs and No-Touch Torture
Neuroweaponry and Classified Military Research
Discussion of the New York Times Article About TIs Based on the Psychiatric Metanarrative
The CEP and the Power of the Ethically Guided Minority

Introduction

As a dissident psychologist-therapist and critic of the mental health system, I hope the Mike McPhate article in The New York Times will open the eyes of targeted individuals (“TIs”) and other supporters of constitutional rights, to the fraudulent nature of the mental health professions (“United States of Paranoia: They See Gangs of Stalkers,” June 11, 2016). Most TIs already know that if they are mentioned at all by the mainstream (i.e., corporate) press, it is to be ridiculed as “conspiracy theorists,” or dismissed as plain psychotics. The term “TI” refers to an individual who is a victim of organized group stalking and non-consensual harassment or experimentation with the use of advanced neuro-biological weaponry–these activities are believed to be initiated by Intelligence organizations. Ramola D (Dharmaraj), an award winning fiction-writer and poet, former English professor and social activist who became a TI in 2013, now an independent journalist, writes that the source of the targeting is “joint Military/Intel/Justice/Academic institutions.” (The Everyday Concerned Citizen, Human Rights, Accessed July 2016). Mental health professionals with rare exceptions believe TIs are paranoid psychotics who are not “targeted” by anyone.

Back to Top

The Corporate Media and Psychiatry: Veiling the Human Rights Violations of the Deep State

McPhate’s article exemplifies the collusion of the mainstream (corporate) media with Psychiatry, thus veiling (unwittingly, at this locus near the bottom of the hierarchy of power) the operations of the Deep State. I use “Psychiatry” as a synecdoche to denote the mental health system with its panoply of psychologists, social workers and various mental health professionals and workers. I use it also to denote the entire psychiatric-pharmaceutical industrial complex since the mental health system is oriented toward pushing toxic drugs (‘prescribing medications”)– and is financed largely by the multi-billion dollar pharmaceutical industry.

McPhate’s article in The New York Times is a chilling example of journalists’ willingness to abdicate their power of critical thought and leave the determination of what is “reality” in the hands of the secular priesthood which reigns today in the name of psychiatry –– although it is almost certain that had McPhate seriously discussed the Deep State, his article, as mentioned, would not have been printed. In McPhate’s article the pretense of journalistic “balance” is virtually abandoned. Instead we hear only one authoritative voice –- that of the psychiatrist, the mental health professional. (A month later The New York Times published another article that also deferred to the psychiatric metanarrative, “The Baton Rouge Gunman and ‘Targeted Individuals,’” July 19, 2016, accessed October, 2016.) Although journalists defer habitually (i.e., without deliberation) to the “expertise” of psychiatrists, the editorial board and publishers of the corporate newspapers like The New York Times have obviously deliberately decided not to print articles that discuss the operations or even the existence of targeting by “the Deep State.” Thus it is not surprising that McPhate wrote an article that would not have threatened any of the vested interests discussed below.

Peter Dale Scott, Professor Emeritus at the University of California, is most often associated with the esoteric and little known but increasingly publicized concept of the Deep State. It is the explicit or implicit root metaphor that is at the basis of the TI metanarrative, as well as the metanarrative of “9/11 Truthers,” critics of the official government account of the attacks on 9/11. The TI metanarrative is complex and has given rise to too many variations among its users. Hopefully the discussion here will provide enough background to give readers a rudimentary sense of the TI metanarrative and its understanding of the growing encroachment of the Deep State into the lives of ordinary Americans.

Scott describes the Deep State as

“a parallel secret government, organized by the intelligence and security apparatus, financed by drugs [and other sources], and engaging in illicit violence, to protect the status and interests of the military against threats from intellectuals, religious groups, and occasionally the constitutional government.” (Voltaire Network interview with Scott, April 6, 2011, accessed 2016.)

I would add that it protects not just military interests but corporate and law enforcement interests as well, and that it is largely unaffected by public opinion or elections and operates autonomously beyond the reach of the law, behind the structure of the legislative, judicial, and executive branches of government, influencing the operations of these branches and maintaining social control in societies that are nominally democratic. Ironically, although targeting maintains social control by creating an atmosphere of fear, it also, presumably inadvertently, transforms many of those targeted individuals who are not political activists (the majority of TIs) into political activists and critics of the Deep State and its anti-democratic functions.

Ramola D, an eloquent spokesperson for the TI narrative, tersely and succinctly conveys in a few words the extent of targeting today:

“All over the US today, and indeed the world, people are being nonconsensually rolled into covert programs of 24/7 physical assault, torture, and slow-kill assassination by EMR microwave/radio/sonic neuroweapons, also called Directed Energy Weapons or Non Lethal Weapons; 24/7 remote access, manipulation, and assault of their brains and central nervous systems; and 24/7 “full spectrum surveillance” involving overt community surveillance, concealed electronic monitoring, and public/community stalking, accompanied by discrediting and social ostracism by defamation and slander campaigns, and in-community harassment and PsyOps projects (more on all this below & in succeeding posts).” (The Everyday Concerned Citizen, 2015: “Targeted Individuals” are Non-Consensual Subjects in Criminal, Clandestine, Classified “Top Secret” MKULTRA-Extended Mind & Behavior Control/Torture Experimentation by Joint Military/Intel/Justice/Academic Institutions, as well as Targets of COINTELPRO and Electronic Warfare.)

But despite its prevalence, targeting amazingly remains largely “in the dark” to those who are not participants or victims. Wikispooks notes,

“In contrast to overtly authoritarian rule, deep states must operate more or less secretly, like terrorist groups, so preserving secrecy is a high priority. Control of the commercially-controlled media is essential to the effective preservation of secrecy needed for the deep state to work effectively.” (Accessed 2016 at Wikispooks/Deep State)

Psychiatry also plays a critical role in maintaining secrecy — in veiling the operations of the Deep State — although I will argue here that it does this even though the majority of mental health professionals are completely unaware of the existence of the Deep State. It is able to play this function unwittingly because the profoundly conformist nature of Psychiatry leads it to define any deviation from the norm as pathology — including any belief in the existence of a shadow government or Deep State (such a belief is disparaged as “conspiracy theory”), let alone being a victim of this entity (which is deemed “delusional”).

This is not to deny that a small but influential group of leading figures and institutions in Psychiatry have, from the establishment of the CIA to date, consciously (and secretively) collaborated with non-consensual and thus illegal experiments carried out by the CIA and other intelligence agencies, and psychologists with the sanction of the American Psychological Association: APA psychologists recently played a role in designing torture of Guantanamo detainees. (In fact leaders of both APAs have long had a close relationship with the CIA.)

This led to a backlash by membership of the American Psychological Association—organized by a few principled psychologists—which voted in 2008 to prohibit psychologists from working in national security settings, against the opposition of the APA leadership (Roy Eidelson, 2013, “APA Fiddles While Psychology Burns,“ in Psychology Today, August 5, 2013, accessed November, 2016).

(The activities of the infamous psychiatrist Ewan Cameron who reduced hundreds of patients to a vegetable-like state through intensive electroshock, funded by the CIA and the Canadian government, set a precedent followed by other mental health professionals who collaborated with the Deep State in designing and implementing programs of torture, used for various purposes. (See Colin Ross, 2006, The CIA Doctors, Richardson, Texas: Manitou).

But the attitude of mental health professionals to “mental patients” has been losing its soft edge of seemingly benign paternalism, and becoming increasingly punitive, although still wrapped in terminology of medical care. Psychiatry has undergone radical changes since the early 1960s when the state mental hospitals began to be emptied and the project of “deinstitutionalization” was announced. The state hospital population shrunk nationwide from over half a million in the late 1950s to 40,000 today. The ideal, if not the reality, was progressive–to reintegrate the “mentally ill” into the community. What took place was “transinstitutionalization” (see Thomas Szasz, 1998, Cruel Compassion, NY: Syracuse University Press): Patients were placed into small scale group homes and (originally) cheap hotels where they were given stupefying “anti-psychotic medication” and isolated from the community. Yet there were legal safeguards that were designed to protect arbitrary confinement and forced drugging of patients.

But the merger of psychiatry with the pharmaceutical industry created a new imperative — to confine ever more patients, to induct ever more persons into the mental health system, and to force psychiatric drugs on an ever increasing number of the “mentally ill.” Furthermore, as society has morphed into a national security state, so the mental health system has become more repressive and the legal safeguards of patients’ right to liberty have been razed. In the 1990s, states enacted involuntary outpatient commitment laws — the main purpose of these laws was to force “non-compliant” former mental patients to take neuro-toxic “anti-psychotic” drugs on an outpatient basis (see below). (The drugs in a “depot” form were injected into the patient’s body where it would be released gradually over the month.) In the psychiatric metanarrative, non-compliance is treated both as pathology and as misbehavior, as a sign that the patient is both mad and bad.

Recently, although the Murphy Bill (HR 2646, which passed the House in 2015) met resistance in the Senate, some of its worst provisions were incorporated into HR 34, the 21st Century Cures Act – a boondoggle for the pharmaceutical industry which lowers FDA safety standards (see Dr. Mercola, July 13, 2016, 21st-Century Cures or Corruption?) — which passed overwhelmingly in the Senate on December 7, 2016. This revised bill incorporates many of the worst provisions of the Murphy bill, including the one at the top of Psychiatry’s wish-list: The ability to force psychiatric treatment (psychiatric drugs) on anyone psychiatrists deem too mentally ill to realize drugs are “good” for them. In other words, a history of violence is no longer a criterion for forcing toxic drugs on “non-compliant” patients. Psychiatry will no doubt continue to push for those provisions not included in the new bill.

Patients’ rights activist Lauren Tenney, Ph.D. stated about the bill,

“It is urgent that people realize that no child will grow up without psychiatric evaluation. All people will become, in a generation or two, acclimated to being psychiatrized; psychiatry and its arms of drugs and institutions will become even more standard [than it is now] in our society.” (Mad in America, Nov 29, 2016, “Warning: A Psychiatric tsuNAMI is Upon U.S.”/From Katherine Hine–Warning, the US govt is trying to legalize forced psych drugging!)

Today in states across the country new hospitals “are being built in droves,” as Janet Phelan puts it. (See “Still Crazy After All These Years: Psychiatric Lockdown Returns to the US” in Activist Post, Oct 5, 2016, accessed November, 2016.) Sharon Cretsinger, social worker and director of Kent Empowerment Center, noted, about the Murphy Bill, that “the most frightening parts of [the Murphy Bill] are the severe limitations placed on PAIMI advocates (Protection and Advocacy for Individuals with Mental Illness) who are specifically prohibited from discussing with “individuals who lack insight into their condition” their right to refuse medication or act “against the wishes of their caregivers.” (Ibid)

PAIMI, an agency “which was specifically set up to address the needs and questions of individuals in treatment,” is prevented from advocating for patients, except in cases of “abuse and neglect.” The limits placed on advocates, Cretsinger says, “shows clearly that Murphy’s bill does not (want) anyone refusing treatment [‘medication’], or even talking about refusing treatment.” The Bill increases funding for involuntary out-patient commitment and for Assertive Community Treatment. Phelan describes ACT, “This enables teams of mental health workers to troll the streets, looking for homeless or other individuals to ‘treat’ in situ.” Of course typically ACT leads to involuntary treatment.

The bill also authorizes grants for “programs for infants and children at significant risk of developing, showing early signs of, or having been diagnosed with mental illness including serious emotional disturbance.” Those eligible for these services are defined as “a child from birth to not more than 5 years of age.”

This is an obvious effort to “funnel” babies into treatment with powerful psychotropic drugs–and create life-long (albeit a shortened life) customers for the pharmaceutical industry. Already there are 8 million children on psychotropic drugs. But, heavily lobbied by the drug industry, our representatives have decided to get more children hooked on drugs–decided to sacrifice babies on the altar of Mammon.

This is the stream of history into which TIs have entered, one which has seen a political battle against psychiatric coercion by patients themselves, beginning in the 1970s with the formation of the first “mental patients’ liberation” organizations. (For a history from 1960 to 2012, see Farber, 2012, The Spiritual Gift of Madness:The Failure of Psychiatry and the Rise of the Mad Pride Movement, Rochester, Vermont: Inner Traditions.) By 2016, the website Mad in America was booming-–with tens of thousands of readers every week, including many psychiatric survivors–– readers participate in discussions beneath the articles. But as dissent has flourished on the Internet, the movement against psychiatric coercion has shriveled in the “real” world. Patients were making progress but the tide began to reverse in the 1990s, and thereafter. The Murphy Bill, a product of post-9/11 America, represents a new, more pernicious, more repressive phase in the social control of mental patients. It mirrors the militarization of the police. (See Randy Balko, author of The Rise of the Warrior Cop , quoted at US Police Have Killed Over 5000 Civilians Since 9/11, MintPress News, accessed October, 2016.)

To what degree it will lead to deliberate collaboration of psychiatry with the military, law enforcement, and/or various agencies of the Deep State is unpredictable, although going full speed ahead on such a course risks the danger of polarization among mental health professionals who for the most part see themselves as “medical specialists” on a par with cardiologists and do not like to think of themselves as dirty cops. The backlash of APA membership’s against its leadership’s participation in scarcely veiled torture is indicative. (See James Risen, 2015, The New York Times, August 7, 2015, “Psychologists Approve Ban on Role in National Security Interrogations“.) At the top of the hierarchy of professionals we can infer that status-conscious professionals will be pleased, as always, to collaborate secretly with high status officials in Deep State agencies. The promulgation of the new psychiatric metanarrative will enable the majority of mental health professionals to tacitly co-operate with the Deep State with more extensive and more punitive modes of social control–while preserving their identity as medical helpers by defining TIs as just another category of “non-compliant psychotics”–-and with more punitive measures as a necessary response to the growing epidemic of mental illness and the emergence of more “troubling” (to use McPhate’s word), more “treatment-resistant” (a common professional term) manifestations of “psychosis.”

 

Back to Top

Advancing the Psychiatric Metanarrative, Neutralizing Deep State Critics

In fact McPhate’s article — strategically placed in The New York Times, the renowned bastion of (corporate) liberal journalism — helps to craft and popularize the emerging psychiatric metanarrative about TIs, which we will analyze below. (A metanarrative is a grand narrative, or theory that tries to give a coherent totalizing account to a variety of historical events and a multitude of human experiences.) As opposed to the psychiatric metanarrative, a TI metanarrative is also emerging and being used as a tool by TIs. While the narrative has a number of variations depending on the perspective of the individual theorist (whether a TI or not), it has a basic skeletal structure which has been shaped by the experiences and theories of many TIs and by the experiences and political theories of an increasing number of technical experts and whistle-blowers -– former employees of the CIA, NSA, and other Intelligence or military organizations.

These former employees are almost always highly educated and among the most intelligent strata of society, and include computer experts, highly sophisticated scientists (from electrical engineers to physicists) and spies. Intelligence agencies recruit the best and the brightest -– and increasing numbers of these persons are possessed by a keen conscience. Thus they find themselves morally unable to perform the tasks they are assigned or to sanction what they know is being done in the name of protecting national security.

If they are asked why they left the CIA or NSA, they invariably give the same answer. From William Binney who worked for the NSA for over 30 years before he resigned in 2001 to Edward Snowden, these persons will tell you with patriotic fervor that they took an oath, not to uphold the government or the NSA but to uphold the US Constitution. In other words these whistle-blowers argue that our actual government today as influenced by the agencies of the Deep State is in conflict with constitutional democracy as conceived by our founding fathers. Edward Snowden has given words and a face to today’s political dissident/whistle-blower in the US, persecuted or in exile ostensibly for giving information to the enemy, but in reality for exposing operations of the State to American citizens. (Chelsea or Bradley Manning did not receive equivalent public exposure -– primarily because she was imprisoned and silenced before she could speak to the Press.)

If McPhate even read any of the accounts by critics of the Deep State (he demonstrates no familiarity with their disclosures), he must have disregarded them, because the psychiatric metanarrative is presented in his article as the truth and the TI metanarrative is viewed through the prism of the psychiatric metanarrative as nothing more than a delusional symptom of the paranoid schizophrenic’s diseased mind. When McPhate describes TIs as unequivocally psychotic, he is ignoring or discounting the accounts of some of the smartest former employees of Intelligence, including those who designed the technology used for surveillance and control, and including those experts he interviewed. Robert Duncan, a whistle-blower and former CIA employee who helped to develop the cybernetic weapons that to his dismay are being used on innocent Americans, was interviewed and then virtually ignored (see below) by McPhate.

McPhate’s article is based uncritically on the psychiatric metanarrative that journalists for the corporate press are trying to make the official metanarrative: All TIs are mentally ill persons–they are not individuals who are victims of group-stalking and various forms of non-consensual experimentation with neuro-weaponry. (McPhate implies that not all Tis are mentally ill but seems to consider that fact irrelevant to his discussion.) They are psychotics who come together with other psychotics and reinforce each other’s delusions — thus they phobically avoid consulting mental health professionals to get the professional help they need.

The psychiatrist is the socially sanctioned arbiter of what is real (for most persons in secular society), and the TI’s metanarrative with its references to historical events and accounts by contemporary whistle-blowers and its claims about the power of the (secretive) Deep State is not even recounted except very briefly and elliptically by the journalist — ostensibly because the psychiatric authority has determined it provides no cues to reality and it will only mislead readers. Psychiatry’s business is the construction and reproduction of “reality” — psychiatry provides the stamp of authority for the official reality and works with journalists to propagate the new metanarrative about TIs. By failing to interrogate power, journalists are betraying their vocation as the 4th estate, which historically held private and government institutions accountable to democratic ideals and exposed potential totalitarian and plutocratic threats to democracy. (Today such journalism can be found in books and in Internet magazines, but only rarely in the mainstream Press.)

Most persons including TIs assume that the psychiatric diagnostic system is legitimate. This is why TIs often claim they were “misdiagnosed.” They assume that there are correct diagnoses, free of bias, just as in other fields of medicine. Many TIs think if they find an honest psychiatrist they will be cleared, legitimized, given a “correct” diagnosis, not realizing that the psychodiagnostic system itself is a fantasy, a delusion! They don’t understand that every mental health diagnosis is a misdiagnosis, that the system of psychodiagnosis is nothing but a collective fantasy -– in psychiatric terms, it is a consensually validated (financially remunerative) delusional system.

For example, TIs who have gone to the mental health system have typically been diagnosed as “schizophrenic,” “paranoid,” and with “delusional disorder.” All of these diagnoses imply the TI is hearing voices that do not exist, or imagining people are stalking her or manipulating her brain with neuro-weaponry/or attacking her body with remote-influencing technologies. In the psychiatric metanarrative on TIs’, the TI is so overwhelmed by a paranoid distrust of people in general that she fantasizes the government or the CIA or other malevolent forces are persecuting her.

Yet many TIs optimistically and/or naively think they can change their psychiatrist’s mind by presenting documentary evidence of the existence of these Deep State operations. What they do not understand is psychiatrists and other mental health professionals are indoctrinated to regard any behavior or allegations that deviate from the social norm as pathological. This is not surprising considering the historical function of Psychiatry was the control of deviants, of poor people, of mad people, the preservation of the status quo. (Since the 1980s, its function has also been to market drugs for its pharmaceutical partners.) The purpose of institutional “mental health” was not to rehabilitate people, to help them heal from their wounds or to promote progressive social change. (Some people were helped in unusual instances by mental health professionals -– this happened far more frequently in the private sector.) But the allegation that the government -– the CIA, the Military — is secretly using bizarre neuro-weaponry (or directed-energy weaponry) against Americans and subjecting them to gang stalking is not something the mental health professional wants to even consider. It is no surprise that in the emerging Psychiatric metanarrative, allegations of Deep State covert operations are construed as symptoms of paranoid delusions.

 

Back to Top

The Psychiatric Fantasy System and the Battle Against Non-Conformity

This is nothing new. Psychiatrists typically react to proponents of radical change by seeking to pathologize them. Braginsky and Braginsky did a series of studies in the early 1970s published in their book Mainstream Psychology:A Critique (see discussion in Sarbin, T. And Mancuso, J., Medical Diagnosis or Moral Verdict, 1980, NY; Pergamon Press). Psychiatrists watched an interview between a doctor and a pseudo-patient. In the first segment, the patients reported irritability, poor sleep, etc. In the second and third segment segments, they expressed either middle of the road or New Left views. In the fourth segment, both groups criticized mental health professionals.

Sarbin and Mancuso summarize: “As the New Left radical’s complaints shift from statement about self to statements about society, the patient is regarded as increasingly psychologically disturbed.” The moderate patient’s degree of psychopathology remains stable as he or she expresses anti-New Left sentiments. The judgments of the severity of the pathology of both groups “dramatically increase when they criticize mental health professionals” (Sarbin and Mancuso, 1980, pp.94-5). Even the politically moderate patient who was perceived as only moderately disturbed (despite being presented as a hospitalized mental patient) is diagnosed as very “psychotic” after his attack on the mental health profession.

The experiment was repeated with a different group of psychiatrists with one change: In the 4th segment, both groups make flattering statements about the mental health professionals, e.g. “helpful,” kind,” and “very special” people. The result for Segments 1-3 were the same but after watching Segment 4, the psychiatrists decided the patients were cured (p.95). This is an extreme reaction and one that likely reflected the fact that the psychiatrists did not know the patients’ diagnosis upon admission – the patient unlike in the study below did not feign psychotic symptoms — and (the fact) that the study was conducted during a more tolerant phase of the mental health system in the early 1970s as compared to today.

One would expect that today the patients upon praising mental health professionals would be deemed to be psychotics in remission, as was the case with Rosenhan’s experiment -– conducted during the same period but with patients identified as “schizophrenic.” Athough Rosenhan’s experiment was conducted at the same time, and the patients were cooperative, they did not go so far as to flatter the doctors. Furthermore psychiatrists in the Braginsky and Braginnsky experiment were not told the pseudo-patients’ original diagnosis was “schizophrenia”––since they did not complain of voices or delusions, they could as easily have been hospitalized for depression. Today psychiatry is more aggressive than in the early 1970s and even “normal” patients are regarded as mentally ill.

Surprisingly few people, even mental health professionals, know about the classic Rosenhan experiment; it created an explosion of controversy within the mental health field at the time,it appeared, although it never entered the public imagination. Rosenhan, a psychologist, and 7 mentally healthy associates–all went to emergency rooms of local hospitals and feigned they were having auditory hallucinations. The pseudo-patients included a psychology graduate student in his twenties, three psychologists, a pediatrician, a psychiatrist, a painter, and a housewife. Once admitted they acted completely normally-–but none of the staff suspected they were sane. Significantly, quite a few patients made comments to the pseudo-patients like, “You’re not really crazy.”

They were interviewed by psychiatrists or psychologists who wrote evaluations of the patients and interpreted all their present behavior as evidence of their schizophrenia, and claimed to discover the roots of their alleged schizophrenia in their early childhood experiences. (At the time of this experiment Psychiatry was still based on the psychoanalytic dogma that pathology was caused by incidents in early childhood). Rosenhan noted, “Once a person is designated abnormal all his other behaviors and characteristics are colored by that label. Indeed that label is so powerful that many of the pseudo-patients’ normal behaviors were overlooked entirely or profoundly misinterpreted.” (Accessed 2016 at isites.Harvard.edu: On Being Sane in Insane Places, by David L. Rosenhan (pdf))

It took most of the pseudo-patients weeks to obtain release–in order to do so, all had to agree to take psychiatric drugs (which they later flushed down the toilet–no longer possible) and agree with the psychiatrists that they were mentally ill. All were finally released in times ranging from 7 to 52 days with the diagnosis of “schizophrenia in remission.” Rosenhan noted in an interview many years later, “I told friends, I told my family: ‘I can get out when I can get out. That’s all. I’ll be there for a couple of days and I’ll get out.’ Nobody knew I’d be there for two months … The only way out was to point out that they’re [the psychiatrists] correct. They had said I was insane, [I told them] ‘I am insane; but I am getting better.’ That was an affirmation of their view of me.” (Accessed 2016 at Wikipedia/Rosenhan Experiment.) In other words, to get the psychiatrist’s approval, the patient must affirm the psychiatrist’s view of the patient. For the TI today, this would mean feigning acknowledgment of the truth of the psychiatric metanarrative about Tis-–that they were delusional.

The reason professionals could not tell the clients had not really had “psychotic” breaks (were not “insane”) is because “mental illness” is a projection of the psychiatrist– the projection is triggered by a few cues that do not necessarily include the symptoms of “schizophrenia.” Knowing the patient has the diagnosis itself is enough to trigger the projection — which is a major reason (in addition to the debilitating effects of the “meds”) — why “schizophrenia” (an emotional crisis) becomes chronic once the patient becomes inducted into the mental health system: She is regarded as incurably ill and these expectations become a self-fulfilling prophecy. As holistic physician Gary Kohls put it, “The truth is that people diagnosed as ‘mentally ill’ for life are often simply those unfortunates who have found themselves in acute or chronic states of potentially reversible crises or temporary ‘overwhelm’ due to any number of preventable, treatable, and even curable situations.” (“Kris Kristofferson’s Dramatic Cure of his “Incurable” Alzheimer’s Disease/Another Iatrogenic Illness Unveiled” by Dr. Gary G. Kohls, on GlobalResearch.ca, accessed September, 2016.)­

Since psychiatry is an agency of surveillance and control, it views with apprehension any patient who resists, or critiques its power. In the Braginsky and Braginsky experiment, a radical critique of society was viewed as a sign of pathology. Mental health professionals regard anyone who comes for help as mentally ill to some degree. If the patients imply that there is something wrong with the world then the psychiatrist qua social control agent is likely to regard them as paranoid — in the psychiatrists’ world view, society is “natural,” normative, even if it needs a little patching up, and “maladjustment” is a symptom of “pathology.”

Radical psychiatrist R. D. Laing saw it very differently: This reification of an insane world was itself a symptom of insanity, and “schizophrenics” were invalidated because they were beginning to wake up from the social fantasy. Laing had reversed the premise of the psychiatric metanarrative by defining adjustment as pathological, “Social adjustment to a dysfunctional society may be very dangerous. The perfectly adjusted bomber pilot may be a greater threat to species survival than the hospitalized schizophrenic deluded that the Bomb is inside him.” (R. D. Laing, 1967, The Politics of Experience, New York: Pantheon Books, p120). This was written during the height of the nuclear weapons race — and Laing saw in the “delusions” of the mad, a metaphorical critique of society and a sign of a resistance to a conformity that threatened the survival of the species. In accord with Laing’s critique, but before Laing had developed it, Martin Luther King Jr. stated, “The world will be saved by the creatively maladjusted.” Today many of the creatively maladjusted come from the ranks of those most directly attacked by the Deep State. And they too, like the mad, are perceived as a threat to the psychiatric guardians of the status quo.

But this kind of threat is easily deflected by redefining it as a medical problem, as pathology. TIs are hardly the first to be pathologized. The medicalization of dissidence and deviance is the real specialization of the psychiatric profession, as the late Thomas Szasz, dissident psychiatrist, argued in book after book. Mental illness is a “myth,” as Szasz said, a misleading trope––the entire system is based on a spurious metanarrative that has deceived the American public for well over a century. Mental health professions are comprised of pretend doctors treating non-existent illnesses. There are of course therapists who help people but they are the minority — almost all in the private sector — and for the most part inaccessible to those without money. Subsuming anyone’s life under a pseudo- medical “diagnosis” obscures their abilities, simplifies their life story, and leads the professional to prescribe a “medical” solution (e.g., stupefying psychiatric drugs) for a non-medical problem, for what Szasz aptly called “problems in living.”

Each person’s unique life story can only be understood when she is grasped in her full individuality including both her strengths and her weaknesses, her virtues and her bad habits. Only a psychotherapist who understands this can be helpful. A therapist who fails to see a client’s strengths will underestimate her ability to recover from trauma. The therapist who seeks to promote conformity will not be able to help the troubled oddball become a creatively maladjusted social change agent. But this hardly matters if the goal of the mental health system is not to help people but to maintain social control.

It is revealing that before 1973 homosexuality was viewed as a mental disorder but as a result of agitation and lobbying by homosexual psychiatrists the APA decided by a close vote that homosexuality was no longer a disorder. Taking into account the conformist orientation of the mental health system — as illustrated in the last few paragraphs — we realize that the diagnoses are based upon values that can always be contested. They are not based on biological facts like real medical diagnoses. In the first place “mental illness” is not an objective biological fact–there are no biological referents to which the construct corresponds. This is why psychiatrists, in order to maintain their facade of legitimacy substitute reliability for validity.

“Reliability” is a scientific term that refers to agreement — in the above case, the agreement among mental health professionals, almost always with financial ties to the pharmaceutical industry — who invent the psychiatric diagnoses, whereas validity refers to a correspondence to reality. (Postmodernists may quibble, but for now I will leave such ontological qualifications for another time.) This is a blatant epistemological error. Because a hundred psychiatrists agree someone is “seriously ill,” and delusional does not mean that person is delusional. The witch prickers would usually agree which suspects were witches — but women do not make pacts or have sexual relations with the Devil (the definition of a witch), so in actuality there were no witches. These highly educated clergymen, the intellectual elite of their era, were wrong. The term “witch” was reliable but invalid, it did not correspond to any social reality other than the shared fantasy of the witch-prickers. Today the term “psychotic” tells us little about the person so described and a lot — as we see — about the shared fantasies of psychiatrists..

Cardiologists do not determine diseases by voting. Mental health professionals, as seen, have a tendency to rate those persons who resist or reject or criticize their own authority as mentally ill. They are also wary of those who make trenchant criticisms of society. It is therefore not surprising that psychiatrists regard TIs as delusional, as psychotic, just as in the 1960s, they tended to view New Leftists as mentally ill. Without even examining the Deep State literature, psychiatrists have promulgated a metanarrative that views them all as delusional, as schizophrenics — as non-compliant psychotics who refuse to take their ‘meds” or accept that they are mentally ill. Mental health professionals have been in conflict with “non-compliant” patients since psychotropic drugs were first used in the mid-1950s. This conflict took on a political dimension when the “mental patients’ liberation movement” (now the psychiatric survivors’ movement) originated in the early 1970s.

But what evidence do they present that TIs are all delusional? In McPhate’s article he extensively quotes from psychologist Lorraine Sheridan. She conducted an experiment with psychiatrist David James and coauthored an article titled “Complaints of group stalking (‘gang stalking’): an exploratory study of their nature and impact on complainants” published in The Journal of Forensic Psychiatry and Psychology Vol 26, No 5, 2015. The journal is read “throughout the world” by “psychiatrists, psychologists, criminologists, lawyers, sociologists, nurses, social workers and other legal and medical professionals” who use this journal as “their major forum for penetrating, informed global debate on the latest developments and disputes affecting the practice of forensic psychiatry.” Sheridan and James write, “All cases of reported group-stalking were found likely to be delusional, compared with 3.9% of individually stalked cases.” But they found no such thing. By their own definition, a delusion is “a false belief based on incorrect inference about external reality.” In order to know the belief is likely to be delusional, they have to know about the external reality.

100% of the 128 allegedly group-stalked individuals were determined to be deluded. How? Two clinicians read extensive questionnaires filled out by the subjects and both agreed all of the time that each subject was deluded. But reliability is not validity. It cannot tell us about the external world. Mental health professionals have no “expertise” in determining what is real, although credulous people — like New York Times journalists — think their credentials give them the ability to know if a patient is delusional. But, to know that, one has to know what is real. The claim of Sheridan and James that group stalking does not take place is an un-validated theory about the nature of (social) “reality.” They have made no effort to confirm its validity by examining the reality. .

Sheridan and James claim that all 128 self-identified TIs had 1 or more of three kinds of delusions. The first was of group stalking. They write these are “cases where the resources or elaborate organization required to carry them out made the alleged activities highly improbable.” But probability is not a scientific or quantifiable concept as they use it. Upon what do they base this determination? Upon nothing–it has no force beyond a decree. The subject’s claims that they were subjected to neuro-weaponry, such as “voice to skull” fell, according to the authors, into the category of a delusion based on “impossibility” or “bizarre impossibility.” What about quantum physics, about “spooky action at a distance” (Einstein), entanglement, Bell’s theorem? All impossible according to the scientific paradigm that had reigned for centuries, just like the technology that Sheridan and James dismiss as impossible. These “scientists” are ignoramuses who have learned nothing from the history of science. (Below is evidence that this impossible technology exists.)

If 2 million clinicians instead of 2 agreed that 128 subjects were delusional, it would still prove only that clinicians tend to agree about TIs and about reality. All of the professionals who examined Rosenhan and his compatriots agreed they were insane. But they were not. Their diagnoses were all invalid. The witch-prickers agreed which suspects were witches, but we know now there were no witches — women do not have sex with the Devil. Their diagnoses were wrong. If Sheridan and James really wanted to determine if TIs were delusional, not just write propaganda, they could have hired a private investigator — short of this they could have at least familiarized themselves with the TI metanarrative about group stalking. They could have examined the historical literature on Stasi in former East Germany and the ACLU book (cited below), The Surveillance Industrial Complex.

I do not think the Sheridan and James article is a work of deliberate deception. Rather it is “bullshit.”As Bruce Levine notes, the liar, unlike the bullshitter, knows what the truth is and endeavors to conceal it. “The vast majority of psychiatrists are bullshitters, uncommitted to either facts or fiction…It is not in the bullshitters’ interest to know what is true and what is false, as that knowledge of what is a fact and what is fiction hinders the capacity to use any and all powerful persuasion” — that is, to persuade people their psychiatric theories reflect reality. (See Levine, “Psychiatry’s Current Greatest Controversy: Fraud, Bullsh*t or What? at Mad in America, accessed September, 2016.) That is why these psychiatrists undertake no investigation––not even reading the literature on the Deep State by scholars and whistle-blowers, let alone by TIs. It’s not that they know that TIs are telling the truth, and endeavor to conceal it. As Levine puts it (about a different psychiatric myth), “ Most simply don’t know the truth because they have put little effort in discerning it.” The fact is they don’t really want to know if TIs’ allegations are correct. 

Their purpose is to not to discover the truth –- but to serve the mental health system. To quote Levine again, “The goal of bullshitters is not necessarily to lie about the truth but to persuade their audience of a specific impression so as to advance their agenda.” In this case the agenda — fostering the growth of the mental health system and maintaining social control — is advanced in two ways. First,by pathologizing TIs, mental health professionals are able to induct more clients into the mental health system, and thus to contribute to the growth of the psychiatric-pharmaceutical industrial complex. Second, by defining dissident or subversive ideas as “delusions,” as symptoms of “mental disorders,” they are able to neutralize or invalidate these ideas, suppress their expression and thus maintain social control — enforce the dominant social norms,

These redefinitions serve social control in a very specific way. They allow professionals to define exploitative practices as legitimate medical treatments — from drugging babies to silencing victims of no- touch torture — while maintaining their self-image as doctors, or medical helpers. Thus professionals can bullshit their way through life — by diagnosing babies and TIs as covert psychotics. Psychiatrists have no need to investigate whether TIs’ claims are valid because Sheridan and James and The New York Times have told them that all TIs are delusional. The substitution of reliability for validity, of bullshit for investigation-findings, is a sleight of hand performed in the most prestigious academic journals and newspapers, and propagated in the psychiatric metanarrative.

(This also serves psychiatrists’ own emotional needs by warding off ideas that threaten to disturb their comfortable mainstream views about the world in which we live — thus what is strange and frightening is reduced to the banal, the familiar. )

All the instruments of psychiatry are brought to bear to pressure, to persuade, to force the deviant to conform. In this manner, Psychiatry also unwittingly, and in some prominent cases, deliberately, serves to preserve the invisibility of the operations of the Deep State. That is to say, the Deep State is enabled to hide evidence of its crimes because Psychiatry destroys the credibility of its victims/critics by certifying them as insane. Thus relegated to the lowest social caste, they are now civilly dead. Bearing the stigmata of their diagnoses, their friends, family, and associates no longer attend to the meaning of their words. Their words are treated as “semantic exudates,” as Szasz once said, of their mental illness. They may speak the truth, but no one is listening.

The Psychiatric Pharmaceutical Industrial Complex

The nature of “mental illness” underwent another change starting in the 1980s. The change was not based on discoveries about the patient’s mind or brain. As usual the changes took place in Psychiatry and were projected onto the clients. As a result of Psychiatry’s alliance with the pharmaceutical industry, it redefined mental illness. The psychoanalytic theory that pathology resulted from traumas in early childhood — prevalent for most of the 20th century in the university and the clinic — was replaced by the dogma that it was a brain disorder.

Although Psychiatry could find no evidence of a brain disorder, it claimed if it kept searching eventually it would find the evidence.

Dr Peter Breggin, a psychiatrist and former student of Szasz became a spokesperson for the dissident position from the 1980s to the present. Breggin chronicles that Psychiatry began to undergo a financial crisis in the 1980s when due to rising popularity of psychotherapy starting in the 1960s, clients sought out less expensive therapists without medical degrees. To recover their hegemony and financial advantages, the American Psychiatric Association decided in 1980 to renounce a century-old practice banning, soliciting, or even accepting contributions from the pharmaceutical industry. This was a watershed––the medical model in biological form experienced a resurgence and the Psychiatric-Pharmaceutical-Industrial complex was born. As Peter Breggin wrote,“The floodgates were opened and would grow wider each year…Whatever function APA had ever fulfilled as a professional organization was now superseded by its function as a political advocate for the advancement of psychiatric and pharmaceutical interests.” (Toxic Psychiatry, 1991, New York: St Martin’s Press, p 355.)

Once again Psychiatry proved its understanding of problems in living was based on its own subjective fantasies, defined as reality by the authorities. Although Psychiatry claimed they had suddenly become more scientific and realized mental illnesses were really brain disorders, this transformation of the view of pathology, just like the transformation in 1973 of the view of homosexuality, was caused by changes within Psychiatry — its merger with the pharmaceutical industry — that led to a change in its collective cultural fantasy which it has the power to present to the public as reality.

Let me be clear, I am not denying that there is a relationship between the mind and the body. I am aware that physical stress contributes to emotional problems, and I am aware that emotional problems are reflected in the individual’s body and brain. But none of this justifies importing medical categories, medical “diagnoses” into the realm of human psychology and interpersonal relationships. Physical illnesses are based on biological facts whereas “mental illnesses” are based almost entirely upon psychiatric fantasies about patients. Psychodiagnosis works as social control but not as medicine or therapy. Because psychiatric diagnoses are derogatory evaluations about clients’ minds, they undermine clients’ self-confidence and thus become self-fulfilling prophecies. .

Even the leading establishment figures in Psychiatry now admit that psychiatric diagnoses are purely subjective, admit there is no evidence of any “chemical imbalance” — even as they try to hold on to “the medical model” — what I call medicalism — even as they continue the centuries’ long search for “defects” in the brains of the “mentally ill.” Thus Thomas Insel, the Director of the National Institute of Mental Health wrote in 2013 on the eve of the publication of the long-awaited 5th edition of the psychiatric Bible, The Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (the first edition was published in 1952, the DSM-IV was published in 1994, and the revised edition of DSM-IV was published in 2000) that the weakness of the manual was “ its lack of validity.” “Unlike our definitions of ischemic heart disease, lymphoma, or AIDS, the DSM diagnoses are based on a consensus about clusters of clinical symptoms, not any objective laboratory measure.” (See “The NIMH Withdraws Support for DSM-5Psychology Today, May, 2013. Accessed 2016.)

Even the Chairman of the Committee, Allen Frances, which composed the 4th edition of the DSM, had a change of heart and became a critic of the DSM — he admitted diagnoses were subjective. “There are no objective tests in psychiatry that say definitively that someone does or does not have a mental disorder.” (Mental Disorders: The Facts Behind the Marketing Campaign/CCHR, Accessed 2013.) His book Saving Normal argues that the DSM-5 classifies all kinds of normal behaviors as mental illnesses. (As indicated by the title, Frances wanted to restrict the application of the medical model in the helping professions, not to eliminate it.) For example, mourning the death of a parent or spouse or one’s partner for more than 2 weeks is interpreted by the DSM-5 (the DSM-IV required more than 2 months of grieving for the person to be deemed mentally ill) as a symptom of a “clinical depression,” not as a natural response to loss. The change reflects the increased symbiosis of psychiatric and drug companies. Defining mourning as a clinical depression enables the drug companies to significantly increase their markets, “If, for two weeks after losing the love of your life, you have sadness, loss of interest, trouble sleeping and eating and less energy, the DSM-5 now allows a drug salesman to teach the doctor that this is major depressive disorder and requires a pill,” Frances said. (Julie Deardorff, “Defining the Subtleties of Grief,” Chicago Tribune, March 5, 2014.)

The prototypical act of defiance of the psychiatric-pharmaceutical complex is refusing to take one’s “meds.” I began graduate school in the late 1970s. Since that time the canard has become received wisdom in society: patients who don’t take their “meds” have a resistance to getting well. This canard overlooks the sickening “side effects” of psychiatric drugs. It is a myth that these drugs are designed to cure or correct the “chemical imbalances” of mental disorders. The drugs have a sedating effect on all persons (as well as numerous unpleasant side effects) — well-suited for managing “mental patients” in a state hospital (where they were all warehoused until “deinstitutionalization” in the 1960s). Those who take these drugs for more than 2 years tend to develop brain damage that often mimics the symptoms of “psychosis” and makes a full recovery from “psychosis” almost impossible.

Author and award-winning medical journalist Robert Whitaker writes, “I think science is telling us that antipsychotics, on the whole, worsen long-term outcomes, even when prescribed for ‘clear cut psychiatric disorders,’ and thus, if psychiatry wants to develop evidence-based protocols, it needs to figure out how to minimize their long-term use. And that is a belief that directly challenges the conventional wisdom…” (See for example Robert Whitaker’s “evidence based” discussion of his investigation in his reply to psychiatrist Allen Frances at PeteEarley.com, “Robert Whitaker Explains His Research After Being Pigeonholed as Anti-Medication,” see also Whitaker, Anatomy of an Epidemic.)

Those who resist Psychiatry’s drugs (or ministrations) are “non-compliant” or “treatment resistant” patients — they arouse the anger and contempt of mental health professionals. The fact that psychiatric treatment is unsuccessful with “schizophrenics” — and causes severe health problems does not prompt a reevaluation of their treatments because the goal of the public mental health system is maintaining social control, and selling psychiatric drugs. The fusion of mental health with the pharmaceutical industry makes change virtually impossible — there is too much to lose.

Thomas Szasz believed that pseudo-medical explanations of problems in living had no objective referent, that “mental illness” was a myth, that the medical procedures of Psychiatry were mere ceremonies intended to make psychiatrists look like real doctors — and there is a plethora of ceremonies and narrative designed to mystify clients and the public. Thus he wrote in Insanity: The Idea and Its Consequences, “Explanations [of mental illness] in 20th century have run into the 100s if not thousands. Methods are equally numerous. Seeing through the riddle of mental illness is not so much like seeing the emperor is naked but rather more like realizing that the emperor’s wardrobe is rich and dazzling beyond the dreams even of emperors but that there is no emperor.” (Szasz, 1997, NY: Syracuse University Press.)

 

Back to Top

The Deep State on Trial

Let us first imagine we are putting the Deep State on trial, as a thought-experiment. The criminal, the defendant, is the Deep State — I do this in an effort to establish the validity of the TI metanarrative. If the Deep State exists and commits the crimes alleged by TIs, this does not prove every self-identified TI is a TI. But it proves some are — and the possibility must be weighed by every mental health professional that people claiming to be undergoing the kinds of experiences and tortures described in the TI meta-narrative may be genuine TIs. If the TI metanarrative is false, than every TI is really “psychotic.” The lawyer for the prosecution would want to exclude certain kinds of people from the jury because they could not decide fairly whether the Deep State was guilty — e.g., people in the employ of the Deep State, very pro-establishment people who think our government can do no wrong. For example, McPhate, following the psychiatric narrative claims, or at least implies, not that some TIs are psychotic but that almost all self- identified TIs are psychotic. (He does not discuss those who are not psychotics–he merely qualifies his assertions.) Someone with an a priori commitment to that viewpoint would not be able to objectively judge.

Let us consider first the obstacles faced by the prosecutor of the Deep State. The lawyer for the prosecution would have a number of obstacles to overcome. Several come to mind.

1) First, the average person has read nothing in the newspapers about TIs–except perhaps articles claiming they are psychotic. We tend to assume that what we have not heard of does not exist.

2) It is hard for most people to believe that the US government would subject its own citizens to torture. It is hard to believe that the government would violate the very Constitution upon which it rests.

3) Few people have heard of the advanced technology which the TI metanarrative claims to be in use. This is not reported in the Press and it sounds like “science fiction.”

4) Most people think only TIs or only psychotics are making these kind of claims. But it is not only TIs — covert psychotics from the psychiatric perspective — who make these claims. They are also made by highly accomplished former employees of the Deep State, the CIA, NSA, etc. These expert witnesses make the same kind of claims made by the TIs. In McPhate’s article, they are virtually ignored — he interviewed some of them but then failed to quote them or misrepresented them. People know Edward Snowden — no one has accused him of psychosis — but Snowden discussed only the prevalence of surveillance, not the existence of neuro-surveillance, “mind control,” no-touch torture, non-consensual experimentation on people with directed energy neuro-weaponry.

5) Another element in the TI’s metanarrative is group stalking — the mental health professionals claim credibly that it is very unlikely that such tremendous resources would be mobilized against one person. To the average person group stalking indeed seems odd and unreasonable. And there is no rationale for such alleged activities. (It is revealing that FOIA documents have shown that CIA assets in the media in the 1960s were instructed to emphasize how improbable a large operation would be, and impossible to keep secret; Alex Constantine, 1997, p 42, Virtual Government: CIA Operations, Los Angeles: Feral House).

6) The very formidable obstacle I tried to debunk above — belief in the validity of the mental­ health system in general, and in particular in the psychiatric metanarrative about TIs itself, which claims that virtually all TIs are delusional, are psychotics, and thus everything they claim about Deep State operations are just symptoms of their pathology.

Let me briefly touch on each of these points. We do not have to rely on TIs or victims to ascertain that the CIA and the military has subjected Americans to harmful experiments to further the various goals of the CIA and later the NSA, although anyone seriously investigating the issue would take victims’ accounts into consideration. The Church Committee was formed in the late 1970s to investigate CIA covert experiments. During the same period President Ford appointed the Rockefeller Commission. On the Senate floor, Senator Ted Kennedy summarized the results of the Church Committee investigations:

The Deputy Director of the CIA revealed that over thirty universities and institutions were involved in an ‘extensive testing and experimentation’ program which included covert drug tests on unwitting citizens ‘at all social levels, high and low, native Americans and foreign.’ Several of these tests involved the administration of LSD to ‘unwitting subjects in social situations.’ At least one death [Frank Olson’s], resulted from these activities.” (WikiSpooks/Project MKUltra)

But that was an understatement. The Church and Rockefeller Committees found this program consisted of 149 projects at 80 universities and other institutions involving drug testing and a variety of other studies on unwitting human subjects, including numerous studies using electromagnetic technologies. (Byron Belitsos, “The Covert Use of Energy Weapons for Political Control, accessed July, 2016.)

The Church Committee investigation was hampered by the fact that CIA director, Richard Helms destroyed the files on MK-Ultra in 1973 when he feared there would be an investigation. The Committee relied upon participants in the program for evidence -– they admitted secretively administering LSD (e.g., slipping it into subjects’ drinks at a party) to unwitting subjects. A memo in 1952 indicated the purpose of the program: “Can we get control of an individual to the point where he will do our bidding against his will and even against fundamental laws of nature, such as self-preservation?” (See WikiSpooks/Project ARTICHOKE accessed July, 2016, cited in Gordon Thomas, G., Journey into Madness. The Secret Story of Secret CIA Mind Control and Medical Abuse.) New York: Bantam, 1990). One can think of many military applications of such powers, whether directed against foreigners or Americans.

The US General Accounting Office issued a report in 1994 that summarized the findings of previous commissions, making clear that the program was conducted jointly by the CIA and the Department of Defense and casting doubt on the volunteer status of US soldiers who were among the subjects in these experiments. The report stated “Working with the CIA, the Department of Defense gave hallucinogenic drugs to thousands of ‘volunteer’ soldiers in the 1950s and 1960s. In addition to LSD, the Army also tested quinuclidinyl benzilate, a hallucinogen code-named BZ. Many of these tests were conducted under the so-called MKULTRA program, established to counter perceived Soviet and Chinese advances in brainwashing techniques.” (WikiSpooks/Project MKUltra, accessed July, 2016.) Although there was only one documented death (Helms had destroyed the files), one need not have an overly vivid imagination to envision the adverse effects of unknowingly ingesting LSD.

On January 15, 1994, President Bill Clinton formed the Advisory Committee on Human Radiation Experiments (ACHRE), chaired by Ruth Faden, Ph.D., MPH of the Johns Hopkins Berman Institute of Bioethics. ACHRE made clear that since the 1940s the Atomic Energy Commission had been sponsoring tests on the effects of radiation on the human body. American citizens who had checked into hospitals for a variety of ailments were secretly injected with varying amounts of plutonium and other radioactive materials without their knowledge. These experiments included other populations such as orphans given irradiated milk, children injected with radioactive materials, prisoners in Washington and Oregon state prisons. In other words, the Military and Intelligence was carrying out Dr Mengele experiments upon American citizens. Much of the experimentation was carried out in order to determine how the human body metabolizes radioactive materials, information that could be used by the Departments of Energy and Defense in Cold War in war planning. (Wikipedia/Human Radiation Experiments.)

Numerous human radiation experiments have been performed in the United States, many of which were funded by various U.S. government agencies such as the United States Department of Defense and the United States Atomic Energy Commission. Researchers had a pattern of choosing the most vulnerable people, but soldiers were also a group heavily exposed to experimentation.

Experiments included, but were not limited to:

feeding radioactive material to mentally disabled children [4]

exposing U.S. soldiers and prisoners to high levels of radiation [4]

irradiating the testicles of prisoners, which caused severe birth defects [4]

(U.S. House of Representatives, Committee on Energy and Commerce, Subcommittee on Energy Conservation and Power. American Nuclear Guinea Pigs: Three Decades of Radiation Experiments on US. Citizens. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office. Cited in Wikipedia/Human Radiation Experimentsaccessed July, 2016.)

The Washington Times summarized in 1994 the findings of ACHRE: “At least 500,000 people were used as subjects in Cold War era radiation, biological and chemical experiments sponsored by the federal government, a congressional agency said yesterday…the tests conducted ranged from radiation to biological and chemical agents like mustard gas and LSD.” (See p. 46, Nick Begich, 2006, Controlling the Human Mind, Anchorage, Alaska, Earthpulse Press.)

Byron Belitsos notes, “By 1963, 1,200 nuclear weapons tests conducted at the Nevada test site had exposed every person in the U.S. to deadly radioactive fallout, causing millions of fetal deaths, spontaneous abortions, stillbirths, and birth defects. The U.S. government also conducted over 4,000 radiation experiments on individual human test subjects without their informed consent. The delayed effects of decades of radiation exposure from weapons testing are today demonstrated by a U.S. population plagued with epidemic cancer and heart disease, neurological disorders, low fertility, chronic fatigue, obesity (thyroid involvement), immune system dysfunction and learning disabilities.” (Byron Belitsos, “The Covert Use of Energy Weapons for Political Control, accessed July, 2016.)

Anyone familiar with these experiments, documented by the U.S. government, should know that neither the military nor the CIA has any compunction about harming American citizens — thus familiarity with this history removes one of the major obstacles to accepting the TI meta-narrative. Nor can we dismiss these acts as something that happened in the past, and would not happen in our ostensibly more enlightened era. It is true that covert non-consensual experiments were officially banned by US Congress after the Church Committee findings. But no one was held accountable, no one went to prison, no one paid any fines, no one lost a job — this fact was not lost upon later whistle-blowers post-9/11 who were prosecuted for revealing criminal activities by the Deep State.

In the history of exposure of Deep State malfeasance, only the whistle-blowers themselves are punished. In the light of this lack of accountability, is it feasible to assume experiments on humans ceased? Did Deep State violations of the Constitution of which the public is aware cease after Bush? Obama of course refused to hold anyone accountable, and in office he carried out the same policy as Bush of shielding the state from scrutiny or litigation. It is significant that McPhate wrote, ironically, “The military establishment, the theory goes, never gave up on the ambitions of MK Ultra, the C.I.A.’s infamous program to control the mind in the 1950s and ’60s.” Without any evidence that he has studied the history of the CIA, he makes a patronizing tongue-in-cheek comment about TIs, as if the belief that the military continued its efforts to gain power over the human mind was such a far-fetched idea. “Hear no evil, see no evil, speak no evil” seems to be McPhate’s guiding principle.

Whistle-blowers since the origins of the CIA have made profound and searing criticisms of their former employers. The most scathing indictment of the Deep State has originally come from former agents, not from its victims (the victims, increasingly including prodigious scholars, are now catching up with former spies, journalists and scholars, in the production of analyses, exposures and histories) — although any agent who criticizes the Deep State becomes a potential victim. Many former employees have argued that the Deep State is totalitarian, and that America today is no longer a democratic republic — some have claimed it is guilty of crimes similar to the Nazi regime. (I will not discuss here Operation Paperclip — under which Nazi scientists were brought to the US to work for the military and US intelligence.) Those who became critics were among the most highly intelligent, patriotic, and morally principled people in the country. Their testimony and experiences vitiate the widespread public belief that the agencies of the Deep State protect the national security and freedom of Americans. It is because of this assumption that many Americans do not object to being placed under surveillance. And because of this they do not believe the TI metanarrative which posits that the protection of American citizens is not one of the primary goals of the Deep State — although law and order may be, or at least order — and that agencies of the Deep State have been willing to harm or put at risk the safety of American citizens in pursuit of other goals.

 

Back to Top

The CIA Assassination of its Own Agent––Protecting Whose Security?

We learn about the Deep State both from what whistle-blowers reveal and from what we see the Deep State is willing to do to silence whistle-blowers, to preserve its own secrecy, its own autonomy and lack of accountability to organs of the American people––to the Congress, to the Senate. Of course increasingly the Legislature defaults on its oversight responsibility, increasingly the Executive shields the Deep State from scrutiny–-thus shattering the foundation of Constitutional government. The belief that the government would never harm American citizens is shattered, thousands if not hundreds of thousands of its victims have been Americans. The Deep State goes to great lengths to preserve the secrecy of its programs, which is why so few people are aware of them.

Frank Olson might have become the first CIA whistle-blower but he died before he had a chance to reveal any secrets. But Frank Olson’s death was not self-inflicted as his son Eric Olson discovered– and many mainstream journalists and writers agreed. Olson is a psychologist who was determined to unravel the mystery of his father’s death and ultimately to be the voice for his father’s own moral doubts about the CIA. Michael Ignatieff, a friend of Eric Olson, writing in The New York Times Magazine reviews the findings of Olson, and it leads almost inexorably to the conclusion that the CIA assassinated his father (“CIA; What Did the CIA Do To His  Father?”). When the Olson family was issued a formal apology by President Ford and CIA Director William Colby in 1975, they were told their father was a military officer who was given LSD unknowingly as a part of MK-Ultra — this ostensibly led Olson to become deeply depressed and commit suicide. The family was given $750,000 by an act of Congress, and the matter was finished. But it wasn’t. The story was a cover story — and Colby and Ford had lied. And the CIA lied to the Press.

His son writes, “In 1952 Frank Olson [a leading biochemist] was acting chief of the Special Operations Division at Detrick; at the time of his death in 1953 he was SOD’s director of planning and evaluations. The Special Operations Divison at Detrick was the government’s most secret biological weapons laboratory.” Frank Olson knew — that despite vehement denials by the American government at the time — the United States was using biological weapons, including anthrax, in the Korean War. Considering that Olson had decided to resign from the CIA, this fact made Eric suspicious of the CIA account of his father’s alleged suicide.

He had his father’s body exhumed, and a forensic team, led by James Starrs of George Washington University, discovered “a blow to Olson’s temple which caused a fist-size bleed under the skin.” They concluded that someone had hit/knocked Olson out with a blow to the head and then dropped him out the window. Armed with this evidence, Eric persuaded Manhattan District Attorney Robert Morgenau in April, 1996, to subpoena a grand jury to examine the evidence for commission of homicide. During the course of this investigation (which found insufficient evidence to go to trial — perhaps because of the sudden death of a prospective witness, former CIA director Colby), Eric also learned that Olson’s death is taught as a case study of “the perfect murder” at the Mossad Training School outside Tel Aviv — this has been confirmed by two former Mossad agents, Ari Ben-Menashe and Victor Ostrovsky. (Family Statement on the Murder of Frank Olson.) 

A letter by the DA was sent to former CIA director William Colby, asking for an interview about Olson. There is evidence that Colby at this point himself felt moral qualms and was ready to spill the beans (Jeffrey Steinberg, “It Did Not Start with Abu Ghraib/Dick Cheney: Vice President for Torture and War“, Executive Intelligence Review, November 11, 2005, Accessed July 2016.) But a few days after receiving the letter Colby died in an alleged canoeing accident in the river near his Maryland home. According to newspaper accounts, much of which his wife contested — she was out of town at the time of Colby’s death — Colby went canoeing at night time (something he had never done before, according to his wife) without wearing his life vest. His computer was on and his dinner half eaten. Colby’s death helped kill the investigation.

It was around this time that Eric Olson had an epiphany, “In 1997, after the C.I.A. inadvertently declassified an assassination manual dating from late 1953, Eric Olson was able to read the following: ‘The most efficient accident, in simple assassination, is a fall of 75 feet or more onto a hard surface. Elevator shafts, stairwells, unscreened windows and bridges will serve. . .’ The manual went on to recommend a blow to the temple to stun the subject first: ‘In chase cases it will usually be necessary to stun or drug the subject before dropping him.’ Reading this passage at the kitchen table in Frederick, Eric realized that “dropped” was the right word.” (Ignatieff, NY Times, op.cit.)

Norman Cournoyer, one of Frank Olson’s oldest friends, called Eric in 2001 after reading the article in the Times. Frank Olson began work on interrogations methods for the CIA in the late 1940s. These were designed to extract information from even the most uncooperative subjects with the help of drugs and torture. Olson confided in Cournoyer (who also had top security clearance) that in 1953 he had been witness to more than one murder by interrogation––largely of Soviet spies. For most of the time, Olson remained in the CIA laboratory in the US.

But in 1950 he traveled to Europe and witnessed the CIA interrogations there — often “terminal”– of “expendables” including double agents, Soviet spies, and Nazi war criminals. Olson asked his friend: “Norm, did you ever see a man die? I did. People being interrogated died.” He told Cournoyer he was getting out of the CIA. He also told Cournoyer that the US was manufacturing biological weapons and he assumed had used it against the Koreans. By this point Eric concluded his father was murdered because the CIA concluded he was a security risk. Cournoyer agreed. “Was there reason for your Dad being killed by the CIA? I believe so,” he told Olson on German TV. (Jeffrey Steinberg, “It Did Not Start with Abu Ghraib/Dick Cheney: Vice President for Torture and War“, Executive Intelligence Review, November 11, 2005, Accessed July 2016.)

Author Gordon Thomas spoke to Dr William Sargant, the British psychiatrist who worked on CIA mind control experiments and examined Olson at the request of the CIA after he began to have moral qualms about his work. “Sargant told me he believed Frank Olson had witnessed murder being committed with the various drugs he had prepared. The shock of what he witnessed, Sargant believed, was all the harder to cope with given that Frank Olson was a patriotic man who believed that the United States would never sanction such acts….He decided Frank Olson could pose a security risk.” He conveyed this information to Olson’s superiors at the CIA. When he learned of his death “he came to the immediate conclusion that Olson only could have been murdered,” Thomas wrote to Eric. (Jeffrey Steinberg, “It Did Not Start with Abu Ghraib/Dick Cheney: Vice President for Torture and War“, Executive Intelligence Review, November 11, 2005, Accessed July 2016.)

Olson was invited to a meeting at Deep Creek a week before his death. The meeting was attended by future CIA director and head of covert operations, Richard Helms, as well as Sidney Gottlieb (one of the leaders of MK-Ultra). Gottlieb secretly spiked Olson’s cocktail with LSD. The real purpose of the meeting was to determine through using LSD if Olson would reveal the secret he knew upon leaving the CIA. Evidently they determined Olson was a “security risk.” As Steinberg put it, “What is clear and what was also clear to Frank Olson in the final weeks of his life is that he became a target of the very torture/interrogation techniques that he had witnessed in Europe. Returning from the LSD interrogation at Deep Creek Lake, he told his wife ‘I made a terrible mistake.’” (Jeffrey Steinberg, “It Did Not Start with Abu Ghraib/Dick Cheney: Vice President for Torture and War“, Executive Intelligence Review, November 11, 2005, Accessed July 2016.)

Eric finally concluded about his father, “He died because of security concerns regarding disavowed programs of terminal interrogation and the use of biological weapons in Korea.”

Eric has finally decades later given his father a voice from beyond the grave. (Family Statement on the Murder of Frank Olson.) 

The question must be asked: Whose security? Certainly not the security of the American people. The US was committing war crimes and violating international law by using biological weapons. These actions were risks to the security of all people. Their disclosure would have embarrassed the US government and would have resulted in the firing and resignation of people in government. It was their own security Olson’s superiors were worried about. Had Olson become a whistle-blower, international law would have been strengthened and the people of the world would have been protected against the risk of an epidemic caused by biological weapons.

The Frank Olson case reveals the CIA’s involvement in the creation and manufacture of illegal and dangerous weapons, its murder of those used as guinea pigs in its testing of interrogation methods, its willingness to assassinate one of its own agents, and its ability to enlist even the US President in a cover-up of the assassination of Frank Olson. Here we see even in its embryonic form the Deep State acting with flagrant disregard for human life, for the Constitution, and for the United Nations and international law. For the Deep State the Enemy is not merely another country — it’s here within. Even the CIA’s own agents are murdered if they try to leave the organization, or if they are deemed to present a “security risk.”

And, revealingly, Eric told Ignatieff he was regarded as mentally disturbed by many of his critics — just as TIs are today. Ignatieff wrote, “Eric knows that to charge the most secretive agency of American government with murder is to incur the suspicion that you have become deranged by anger, grief, paranoia, greed or a combination of all four. ‘Eric is crazy, Eric is obsessed,’he says, mimicking his accusers.” (Ignatieff, “CIA; What Did the CIA Do To His  Father?”)

 

Back to Top

Whistle-Blowers Post-9/11

Thomas Drake knows the power of the National Security Agency all too well. He is a former senior executive of the U.S. National Security Agency (NSA), a decorated United States Air Force and United States Navy veteran, and a whistle-blower. Drake’s crime seems to have been telling a reporter about fraud — specifically about NSA’s purchasing an Internet data collection system that cost billions of dollars more than necessary and that collected so much data that it resulted in Constitutional violations of privacy. This was the famous Trailblazer system — Drake argued like William Binney and several other NSA whistle-blowers that by choosing his tool instead of Thin Thread, the NSA was putting their own influence and power over the public good, over the nation. These men had been attracted to the NSA precisely because of their patriotism and desire to be of service to the nation. When they found there was a conflict they chose loyalty to nation — at great personal sacrifice.

Drake went to the press only after following prescribed channels of redress for Constitutional wrongs, only after failing to get NSA inspectors or Congress to take remedial action. The Justice Department in 2010 raided his house and charged him under the 1917 Espionage Act with violations that carried a penalty of up to 35 years in prison. But they dropped the charges when no evidence linked him to spying or a foreign power. The judge in the case called the prosecution “unconscionable.” Drake is the 2011 recipient of the Ridenhour Prize for Truth-Telling and co-recipient of the Sam Adams Associates for Integrity in Intelligence (SAAII) award. The government also took away his security clearance. He now works as a clerk in an Apple computer store…(Vocativ, September 19, 2013, “Should the NSA Be Dismantled?”, accessed July, 2016 ).

In excerpts from Thomas Drake’s SAAII award acceptance speech, he clearly formulates the nature of the conflict between the NSA and the republic.

With all the unitary executive privilege, all the secrecy and exigent conditions used as the excuse to torture, deny due process, and engage in off-the-books electronic surveillance, Jesselyn Raddick [his lawyer, and a whistle-blower herself, when working for Department of Justice] and I followed all the rules as whistle-blowers until it fundamentally conflicted with our oath to uphold the Constitution. Then we both made a fateful choice to exercise our First Amendment rights. We went to the press with patently unclassified information, about which the public had a right to know.

However rather than address its own corruption, ineptitude, and illegality, the government made us targets of federal criminal leak investigations, part of a vicious campaign against whistle-blowers that started under Bush and has now come to full fruition under Obama …We were transmogrified from public servants trying to improve our government, into traitors and enemies of the state. The government subjected us to severe retaliation that started with forcing us from our jobs as career public servants, rendering us unemployed and unemployable, while swinging a wrecking ball into the conditions of our jobs, in my case a security clearance, and in Jesselyn’s case, state bar licensure. We were blacklisted and no longer had a stream of income, while simultaneously incurring attorneys’ fees and necessitating second mortgages on our respective homes. But that was nothing compared to the overkill reprisal to come, placement on the no-fly list for Jesselyn and prosecution under the Espionage Act for me.

What we experienced sends unequivocally a chilling message, an unequivocally chilling message about what the government can and will do when one speaks truth to power: a direct form of political repression and censorship. If sharing issues of significant and even grave public concern which do not in any way compromise our national security is now considered a criminal act, we have strayed far from what our founding fathers envisioned. When exercising First Amendment rights is now considered espionage, this is anathema to a free, open, and democratic government….

Before the war on terrorism, our country well recognized the importance of free speech, privacy, legal counsel, and the right to be free from cruel and unusual punishment.. These are the hallmarks of tyranny and despotism, not democracy, and are…alien to the Constitution and our American way of life.

We did not take an oath to see secrecy and subterfuge used as cover for subverting the Constitution and violating the law. Our oath to the Constitution took primacy.

And today we have a frightening lack of responsibility and accountability within the national security complex, and it poses — I will mince no words here — it poses a direct threat to all our personal freedoms, as well as a clear and present danger to our constitutional republic….Our government has profoundly lost its constitutional compass and it’s been tainted to its core. And yet it is our enshrined liberties, it is our enshrined liberties that are our national security. What country do we want to keep?…

Jesselyn and I took an oath to support and defend the Constitution, not an oath of loyalty to the organization…We blew the whistle because we saw grave injustice and wrongdoing occurring within our respective organizations.

In my recently successfully concluded case that ended decisively in my favor, the government wanted to put me away in prison for many, many years in fact, at one point they threatened me with 35 years in prison — for simply telling the truth as a whistle-blower and exposing government wrongdoing and illegalities. The government found out everything they could about…me over many years, before I was even indicted. Having this secret ability…to collect and analyze data with few if any substantial constraints…is seductively powerful, and when …done in secret, it is the ultimate form of control over another...

Modern governments today increasingly perform mass surveillance of their citizens — explaining that they believe that it’s necessary to protect them from dangerous groups such as terrorists, criminals, or politically subversive dissenters — in order to track the citizenry and maintain social control. Read the history books. We are fast approaching a genuine surveillance society in the United States, a dark Orwellian future where every move, our every transaction, our every communication, and our every contact is recorded, compiled, and stored away, ready to be examined and used against us by the authorities whenever they want to at any time.

Five centuries ago, Machiavelli explained how to undertake a revolution from above without most people even noticing. On his Discourses on Livy, he wrote that one, quote, “must at least retain the semblance of the old forms; so that it may seem to the people that there has been no change in the institutions, even though in fact they are entirely different from the old ones”, unquote. In other words, keep the old government structures; meanwhile, you make profound changes to the actual system, because the appearances are all that most people notice. So, today, instead of seeing the mere corpse of the republic in which we supposedly live, we only see the clothing. We have had a quiet revolution that has not eliminated our elected representatives; it has simply made them largely irrelevant…

Being a student of history, I consider the immediate aftermath of World War II as a real turning point, when the American dream began to go south, at the very moment when the U.S. sat astride the world at the pinnacle of power. And…this is when the American republic began its transformation to a national security state and then exponentially accelerated as a result of 9/11 into a top-secret America…

With such a massively expanded ability by the government to spy on your personal life, we might as well bid adieu to the Fourth Amendment, the foundation of a citizen’s integrity as an individual person…as well as your ability to speak and associate freely with others under the Fourth Amendment.

Consider the conviction, as I summarized now for you, held by this country’s founding fathers, that a functioning constitutional republic and democracy requires what? An informed citizenry. So what happens in the case of an uninformed citizenry? The experiment in government by the people is doomed to failure and would inevitably transform into what we increasingly see today.

Do we want to continue to have a burgeoning military-industrial-congressional- intelligence-surveillance-cybersecurity-media complex? For whom does it benefit? Do we want to concede the eroding of basic human rights? Why?..

So I leave you with this as I channel Frederick Douglass. On August 3, 1857, Frederick Douglass delivered a West India Emancipation speech. At Canandaigua, New York, on the 23rd anniversary of the event, he said, quote, “..Those who profess to favor freedom and yet deprecate agitation are men who want crops without plowing up the ground; they want rain without thunder and lightning. They want the ocean without the awful roar of its many waters.” “Power and those in control concede nothing without a demand. They never have and they never will.” Let me translate into today’s language. Every one of us, every one of us in this room and beyond this room, each and every one of us must keep demanding, must keep fighting, must keep thundering, must keep plowing, must keep on keeping things struggling, must speak out, and must speak up until justice is served, because where there is no justice there can be no peace.” (Real News Network, Nov 4, 2012, “Whistleblower Threatened with 35 Years of Tyranny, Warns of Impending Tyranny“) 

Drake was not aware of the torture of TIs. But would he have been shocked by it? Does it conflict with his understanding of what the Deep State is able and willing to do? Obviously not.

William Binney learned the same lesson. He worked for the NSA for 30 years, and resigned in 2001. Binney was a Russia specialist who started work in NSA as an analyst and became successively a Technical Director, and then a geopolitical world Technical Director. In the 1990s, he co-founded a unit on automating signals Intelligence. His career culminated as Technical Leader for Intelligence in 2001. Having expertise in intelligence analysis, traffic analysis, systems analysis, knowledge management, and mathematics (including set theory, number theory, and probability), Binney has been described as one of the best analysts in the NSA’s history. Binney complained to the Department of Defense in 2002 that NSA had wasted taxpayer money by buying a data collection system — Trailblazer — that collected 20 trillion communication transactions of American citizens. Binney was particularly angry because he believed the surfeit of information prevented them from detecting 9/11.

Binney’s outspoken criticism of the agency subjected him to reprisals. On July 2007, after The New York Times reported on the government’s warrantless wiretapping, the FBI broke into his house with guns drawn and confiscated his computers and business records. Although he was cleared of wrong-doing the NSA revoked his security clearance forcing him to close his business at a cost of $300,000 a year. (See Wikipedia/William Binney/U.S. Intelligence Official.)

Binney described his arrest:

“The first I knew the FBI was in my house was the guy pointing a gun at me when I was coming out of the shower. That’s the first I knew. My son let them in, and they pushed him out of the way at gunpoint, and then they came up into my bedroom and pointed guns at my wife and me, so that’s the first I knew they were there. And it surprised me. I said: “Well, what are you doing here? I’ve been cooperating with you, telling you everything I know about this, everybody involved in this program, so why are you doing this?” Basically they wanted me to tell them something that would implicate someone in a crime, OK? The point was they were after Diane Roark because they didn’t like her, and also Tom Drake…Then they told me they thought I was lying to them,…So then I started to get mad. I said: “OK, you want to know what the crime is? Bush, Cheney, Hayden, and Tenet were the central conspirators to subvert the Constitution and the laws of the United States, and here is how they did it. The raid took about seven hours — they were there from 9:00 in the morning to the middle of the afternoon, and they took my computer, all the electronic hardware, discs and things that go with that…” (PBS Frontline/United States of Secrets/William Binney.)

On May 31, 2016, Binney told Loud & Clear host Brian Becker on Radio Sputnik, “They [the NSA] don’t care what they do, they feel that they have the right to do anything that they feel necessary, and they will cover up crimes and procedures and violations of regulations that they’ve done to achieve whatever their ends are.” This is a man who worked for NSA for decades, and became increasingly disillusioned with policies after he became a whistle-blower. “The president can declare anyone a terrorist threat and have the military take them off the street, anywhere, and incarcerate them indefinitely without any due process. Those are violations of fundamental rights of the Constitution,” he explained. “That’s exactly what Special Order 48 issued by the Nazis in 1933 did, right after the Reichstag fire. It says almost exactly the same thing.” (Sputnik News, May 31, 2016, “NSA Surveillance Takes a Page from Nazi Germany“, accessed July, 2016). 

In early October, 2016, William Binney and Kurt Wiebe, another whistle-blower who used to be an analyst for the NSA, in an interview with Ella Felder, told her and the several hundred TIs who were listening in on a mass telephone conference call that they had made a commitment to expose the plight of TIs. Wiebe explained that he did not know about TIs when he was at the NSA:

“We understand the predicament you are in, we have been in similar situations but don’t give up the faith — just because we haven’t seen it at NSA or CIA doesn’t mean a doggone thing…NSA and CIA work in compartmented areas, or on a Need to Know basis. We do know government has a history of experimentation against people, and the DOD has authorization to conduct experiments on people, sometimes with consent, some without consent. We know government has the power to deliver all kinds of aggressive measures against people.” (The Everyday Concerned Citizen, October 16, 2016, NSA Whistleblower Powerhouses Stand Up to Support “Targeted Individuals” Worldwide”)

Binney said they were planning on doing research and compiling reports from TIs,

“And then finally, we’ll try to put together recommendations on how people should proceed, to try and prove what is happening with them specifically with compiled evidence — in such a way that you can bring the evidence into a court of law. We’re trying to use the discipline that we use for our data analysis, that would be demonstrable in a court of law.”

Binney, Drake and others escaped the most punitive arm of the Deep State. The two most famous whistle-blowers were not so fortunate. Bradley/Chelsea Manning was the most unfortunate of the whistleblowers. For his service to humanity in exposing US war crimes, this young man/now woman received a formal sentence of 35 years. Political dissidents from Noam Chomsky to Daniel Ellsberg hailed him as a national hero, while politicians called him a traitor. Edward Snowden, who exposed the surveillance Panopticon, is more fortunate than Manning—he is forced to live in exile in Russia.

 

Back to Top

TIs and No-Touch Torture

TIs are plagued by basically two categories of what they experience as torture or harassment: 1) group stalking and 2) subjugation to experimentation with neuro-weaponry, and directed energy weapons. The first class of experiences is deemed highly improbable by Sheridan and James, and thus those who experience them are “delusional.” The second class is supposedly impossible.

Sheridan and James write concerning allegations of group stalking: “the resources or elaborate organization required to carry them out made the alleged activities highly improbable.” They give several examples: “hostile operatives being inserted in victim’s workplace and their children’s schools; 24-hour electronic surveillance involving teams of men in black vans; surveillance by cameras placed throughout the city; staff of shops and libraries being amongst the group stalkers; everyone in the street being ‘plants’ acting out roles towards the victim; ‘more than a thousand’ people being involved; traffic lights being manipulated always to go red on approach… collaboration between diverse agencies, such as the Automobile Association, a building society, a website, and neighbors.”

Below is a description of an example of group-stalking by Ramola D. She describes two changes in her life; first, the relocation of her family to a suburban neighborhood in Massachusetts, and then the transition that occurs when she becomes a TI. The rich prose and the very thick detailed descriptions give the account a sense of realism that one would not typically find in descriptions by “psychotics.”

Over the last couple years, after we moved up to the Boston area from Washington DC in the summer of 2011, I have been working mostly from home on various writing projects, editing a literary journal, and running creativity workshops and summer camps in art, science, and writing for children, as well as working at local academic institutions nearby. I’ve had a real taste this way of the quiet, lazy feel of the South Shore; I’ve enjoyed the ambience of living in a “settled” hundred-year old neighborhood in Quincy filled with stately, long-lasting oaks and maples, gentle and genteel neighbors, mostly older, with the occasional friendly young family with kids…the usual scurry of backyard bird life woken by the occasional inland-straying seagull, and above all, daytime quiet. Quiet, sleepy, placid, slow, laid-back, relaxed, easygoing are words I might have used to describe both the South Shore and its residents back then…

This unfortunately is no longer the case. Over the past year, things have changed dramatically in Quincy.

Now police sirens scream night and day down the once-quiet streets, including the main streets Newport Avenue and Hancock and, in my neighborhood, the close-by Harvard Street–and I mean, quite frequently, as if a thousand criminals were driving hellfire down the South Shore with trusty Quincy cops in high pursuit–and fire engines also shriek fairly often as they clang and roll by, often on quiet walks down winding sidestreets where no hint of burning houses can be seen, to add to which EMS trucks and vans also clog sidestreets and main streets, using sirens and trundling urgently by, as if the number of accidents or emergency medical calls had somehow increased overnight. Daytime quiet therefore no longer exists–there has been a dramatic escalation in the use of sirens, and it continues. This absurdity–especially absurd in its contrast to previously-peaceful Quincy–is clearly contrived. The local police have been incentivized to act like crazed patrollers of a criminal town. To add, if anyone’s noticed–all across the country, police cars and sirens have changed–they are outfitted with dozens of lines of blue lights now, their siren whoops and hollers now, rather than emitting a single round call, and the whole vehicle buzzes and shakes and whoops and dazzles as it flies by–bizarre? You bet.

Traffic also has changed. The roads of Quincy are now clogged with gigantic SUVs, Hummers, large pick-up trucks, and military-style pick-ups with menacing metal frames over the truckbed, large trucks of every kind, and frequent clogging of roads with roadwork trucks, even when there is no roadwork in sight. Starting in Fall 2013, traffic lights suddenly increased in duration. This has not abated. Traffic lights are noticeably longer, which means the long lines of cars with engines chugging, releasing masses of dirty exhaust into the atmosphere at lights are longer, and drivers–the usual Bostonian highway bellicosity notwithstanding–are markedly more belligerent, frequently tailgating, cutting off directly in front of cars, and crowding like swarming bees on highways.” (The Everyday Concerned CitizenWhy I Started This Blog)

It sounds crazy but the author seems sane! The author is an accomplished professional, a former professor, with a husband and child, with no history of “psychiatric” problems. The writing style itself reflects the mind of a writer fully in control of her craft, and of herself. If Ramola D appeared before a jury, undoubtedly the jurors would find her a credible witness––not dismiss her as delusional. To back up her story, there would be other targets with similar stories. The second change had taken place after Ramola had begun writing to her representatives asking about the chemtrails she saw in the sky. She also complained in her child’s school about the ethics of a childcare operation. At a trial against the American Deep State, historians would be called as expert witnesses to demonstrate that very similar tactics were used by Stasi — the secret police — in East Germany, or by Russian Intelligence. This establishes a pattern of such activities by Deep States.

It is impossible to fully explain in rational terms these programs since they are based on institutionalized paranoia, on collective insanity. The psychologists who say that such operations are highly unlikely fail to understand the mindset of those who designed these programs. Ramola D credibly argues that the purpose of such programs is to get the target labeled insane, so that the Deep State’s victimization of American citizens will remain invisible. But such a goal in itself makes no sense, is insane; it also indicates that the Deep State does not regard mental health professionals as very canny. She writes that these tactics seem “a desperate attempt to get the individual diagnosed professionally (by either an unsuspecting or complicit psychiatrist) as a “paranoid schizophrenic”, the moment he or she begins talking about covert harassment…being stalked by helicopters, being covertly implanted, being “gangstalked” on the roadways, or being surrounded by people wearing his favorite colors or talking about him or saying things in his presence straight out of his [own] head.” (The Everyday Concerned Citizen, 2015: “Targeted Individuals” are Non-Consensual Subjects in Criminal, Clandestine, Classified “Top Secret” MKULTRA-Extended Mind & Behavior Control/Torture Experimentation by Joint Military/Intel/Justice/Academic Institutions, as well as Targets of COINTELPRO and Electronic Warfare)

According to the Department of Defense in 2002, operations such as these are designed to be used against citizens of the enemy country (not against or upon citizens of its own host country) — the goal is to break the political will of the enemy. (Rich, 2011, New World War, Morrisville, NJ: Lulu Enterprises, p. 295.)

The evidence for the existence of group stalking is not just TIs’ and historians’ testimony but government documents (the books on Stasi are based on archives that became available with the demise of the Soviet Union) revealing similar programs in totalitarian societies and in the US in other periods. (Of course the programs have become more sophisticated over the years.)

For example, COINTELPRO was a program implemented by the FBI in the 1960s and 1970s designed to disrupt anti-war organizations and groups that were thought to be communist or socialist. J. Edgar Hoover announced the directives “to expose, disrupt, misdirect, discredit or otherwise neutralize” persons in these groups. (Mark Rich, 2011, New World War, p.87.) The Church Committee stated that under COINTELPRO, “the arsenal of techniques used against foreign espionage agents is transferred to domestic enemies.” (Ibid.) COINTELPRO included using undercover agents posing as activists in order to carry out surveillance or to act as provocateurs (in many cases that meant becoming the intimate partner of the activist––a heinous kind of subterfuge), and fomenting hostility between different factions of the left. Human Rights Watch notes,“The CIA then began monitoring student activists and infiltrating anti-war organizations by working with local police departments to pull-off burglaries, illegal entries (black bag jobs), interrogations and electronic surveillance. After President Nixon came to office in 1969, all of these domestic surveillance activities were consolidated into Operation CHAOS.” (Project Freedom, Echelon, “The NSA’s Global Spying Network,” accessed July, 2016.)

In 2002, we learned from the mainstream media that the Bush Administration planned to recruit millions of United States citizens as domestic informants in a program “likely to alarm civil liberties groups.” The Terrorism Information and Prevention System, or TIPS, meant the US would have a higher percentage of citizen informants than the former East Germany did. The program would use a minimum of 4 per cent of Americans to report “suspicious activity.” The scope of the surveillance network was broad: TIPS volunteers would be recruited primarily from among those whose work provides access to homes, businesses or transport systems. Letter carriers, utility employees, truck drivers and train conductors are among those named as targeted recruits. (The Sunday Morning Herald, July 15, 2002, “US Planning to Recruit 1/24 Americans as Spies”)

The program would involve a joint effort by local police, DOJ, state and local businesses. Even though the program was rejected by Congress, that does not mean it was not implemented–it merely went “dark” as the CIA calls it. That makes it all the more effective with Congress unaware of its existence and the media convinced it therefore did not exist. Mark Rich reports, “the American Civil Liberty Union contends that it and similar programs are being used aggressively across the nation.” ( Rich, The Hidden Evil, 2008, Morrisville, NC: Lulu Enterprises, pp.100-6, Informants, The Hidden Evil (online), accessed July 2016). According to Nick Turse, Bush had initiated similar programs under the auspices of Citizen Corps coordinated by the Department of Homeland Security. (See Turse, 2009, The Complex: How the Military Invades our Everyday Lives, NY; Metropolitan Books, excerpt at Google Books, accessed November, 2016.)

Rich describes a typical pattern of group stalking reported by TIs:

“City vehicles, postal vehicles, fire trucks, school buses, and taxis are reportedly stalking people. Construction projects encircle a targeted person’s home and also spring up at frequently visited places. Utility companies interrupt service. Local businesses provide poor service, appear incompetent or clumsy and work with civilian informants to harass targeted people in their stores.” (Ibid).

Note how this matches the report above of Ramola D, as well as activities reported by the “delusional” subjects of Sheridan and James. There is no evidence that those who constructed the psychiatric metanarrative read about TIPs, read the ACLU report (“The Surveillance Industrial Complex,” 2004, Jay Stanley, New York ACLU), or read about remarkably similar practices engaged in by secret police in East Germany, and elsewhere.

Only two websites and no books on this topic are mentioned in the bibliography of the article by James and Sheridan. And although these websites are excellent, it is obvious that James and Sheridan dismissed the reports on these websites without reading the material let alone grappling with the challenge it posed to their arrogant claim that all 120 of the TIs whose accounts they read were delusional!

In East Germany, the citizen-informants included doctors, lawyers, journalists, sports-figures, writers, actors, high officials in religious organizations, pastors, waiters, hotel personnel, and other workers. “Schools, universities, and hospitals were infiltrated from top to bottom,” wrote John Koehler, author of Stasi: The Untold Story of the East German Secret Police. Markus Wolf, a former Stasi officer, said that, in Germany, TIs were gangstalked by citizen agents who “literally encircled their everyday movements.” (See Rich, 2008, op.cit.) The homes of these persons were “put under siege.” (Rich, p.105.) TIs (the term was not used in East Germany) were typically stalked wherever they went. A report authored by Ray Cline, former Associate Director of the CIA, said that Stasi’s network of informers reached into “every crevice of society.” Although the goal here and in the Soviet Union was ostensibly “national security,” Cline noted that the surveillance system was really used to terrorize the population and inhibit them from “speaking out.”

It appears that no one has admitted to being citizen-spies in these programs, Rich wrote in 2008. According to a former Soviet citizen-informant, they were told “secrecy” was essential and they had to sign a contract to not reveal their work for the Deep State. They were told the public often did not realize “the danger these people represent to our society.” (Cited in Rich, 2008, op. cit., online edition.) In the US, one can only guess the citizen informers are told that the TIs they are stalking are threats to national security. “The behavior exhibited by these [ordinary] citizens indicates that they are absolutely convinced that this policy is legitimate and necessary.”

In almost all cases, the families of TIs believe they are mentally ill, and many of them end up (at least briefly) in a psychiatric hospital — most trust the doctors and unwisely confide in them — where the label they are given (“paranoid schizophrenic” is typical) discredits them permanently, particularly among their families. Even those who have spouses who are critics of the national security state find their spouses seem to have a need to deny such covert harassment including the use of neuro-weaponry is happening so close to home. Many TIs think therapists must be c­onsciously collaborating but, as I argued above, most professionals are deeply conformist political centrists (usually social liberals) and unaware of the existence of Deep State operations. This is a distinctive kind of totalitarian system that relies in general on a precarious balance of stealth/invisibility and complicitous cooperation.

Thus occurrences such as those reported by Ramola D and others are deemed “highly unlikely” by Sheridan and James, and thus neophytes who might take TIs’ allegations seriously are set straight by those professionals familiar with the psychiatric metanarrative. Besides group stalking, the other most common disturbance reported by TIs is voices in their head, what is known as Voice to Skull technology. Sheridan and James say that such technology is impossible. They don’t merely claim that there is no evidence such technology exists, they claim it is impossible for it to exist! This is laughable. This is the era of quantum physics––of quantum effects, and paradoxes that by all previous standards were impossible, and that has thus taught genuine scientists to be more humble. I never cease to be amazed by the hubris and idiocy of mental health professionals — nor do I think these authors are deliberately propagating disinformation.

Dr. Robert Duncan’s testimony has been ignored by the mainstream media although he has multiple graduate degrees from Harvard and Dartmouth. He has worked for the Department of Defense and the CIA on AI (Artificial Intelligence) and neuroscience projects which seek to stimulate and rewire the human brain (see below). He has testified that he worked on the development of this technology used to make a variety of neuro-weapons. In his book, Project Soul Catcher: Secrets of Cyber and Cybernetic Warfare Revealed (2010, Boise, Idaho: Higher Order Thinkers Publishing), he discusses weaponry that can cause virtually all of the effects reported by TIs — from “synthetic telepathy” to “Voice to Skull” voices. He became a whistle-blower when he discovered this technology was being used in non-consensual experiments on American citizens (or to punish persons who had angered the wrong people), just as LSD had been used in non-consensual experiments by the CIA in a previous era in MK Ultra, as documented by the US Congress’ Church Committee. He writes “I apologize to the human race for any contribution to these 4th generation weapons that I may have worked on that are more horrific than the nuclear bomb and whose cover-up is more pervasive than the Manhattan Project” (See www.drrobertduncan.com — not Duncan’s own website).

Dr. Barrie Trower is a former Royal Navy Microwave Weapons Expert and former Cold-War captured spy debriefer for the UK Intelligence Services with advanced degrees in physics. He states:

“During the 1950s and 1960s during the Cold War, it was realized…that microwaves could be used as stealth weapons. The Russians beamed the American embassy during the Cold War and it gave everybody working in the embassy cancer, breast cancers, leukemias, whatever, and it was realized then that low level microwaves were the perfect stealth weapon to be used on dissident groups around the world, because you could make dissident groups sick, give them cancer, change their mental outlook on life without them even knowing they were being radiated, and one of my particular tasks…I spent eleven years questioning captured spies…one of my particular tasks was to learn the particular frequencies of microwaves that they used on which particular victims, if I may use that word, and what the outcome was, and I built up a dossier…I’m probably the only person in the world with the complete list…I built up a dossier of what pulse frequencies of microwaves will cause what psychological or physiological damage to a person.” (See Institute for Geopathology/Barrie Trower.)

Trower’s testimony makes clear that — contrary to psychiatric claims — that not only are Voice to Skull weapons possible but the military already possesses them:

“So the military can now put voices into people’s heads to do whatever deed they wish it to achieve, and the super stores have also realized that rather than say ‘put that down, you’re going to steal it’, if you’re indecisive and you’re shopping, they can say ‘you really do want to buy this’, and after nine months, and I got the figure from one of your calls, somebody took one of your super stores to court for beaming them. And they made a phenomenal profit in just nine months, phenomenal profit. But because your Federal Communications Committee says that microwaves were safe, the case fell. (Barrie Trower, The Cooking of Humanity.)

Gloria Naylor tells of her own victimization by neuro-weaponry in her “novel,” 1996. In the Appendix she describes the experience of herself and others: 

Sleep deprivation is common and dreams are manipulated. Victims say, “They [whoever is targeting them] can see through my eyes, what I see.” Sometimes victims describe seeing the images of projected holograms. Thoughts can be read. Most victims describe a phenomenon they call “street theater.”

For example, people around the victim have repeated verbatim, the victim’s immediate thoughts, or harassive and personalized statements are repeated by strangers wherever the victim may go.

Emotions can be manipulated. Microwave hearing, known to be an unclassified military capability of creating voices in the head, is regularly reported. Implanted thoughts and visions are common, with repetitive themes that can include pedophilia, homophobia, and degradation. Victims say it is like having a radio or TV in your head. Less frequently, remote and abusive sexual manipulation is reported. Almost all victims say repetitive behavior control techniques are used and include negative, stimulus-response, or feedback loops. (Cited in Cheryl Welsh, 2008,In Contravention of Conventional Wisdom: CIA No touch torture makes sense of mind control allegations”, accessed November 2016.)

I have now been told of experiences just like these by several dozen TIs — all have the same pattern — the voices that respond maliciously to their own thoughts, the manipulation of dreams, (some describe unwanted sexual feelings or orgasms — “electronic rape”), many say the torturers can see through their eyes, etc — these experiences often reported by people in the age range 40 through 60s with no history of “psychosis.” (The experience of psychosis usually happens in early adulthood.)

Welsh finds that these mind control techniques are similar to the new kind of “no touch” torture used by the CIA in Guantanamo and elsewhere, which is discussed in the article. She writes, “The mind control techniques seem to be psychological techniques to disorient the victim and cause him to feel completely controlled, dependent, and at the mercy of his torturers.” The victim is estranged from his everyday world — like the “psychotic” — and trapped in a theater of the mind. Unlike the psychotic’s experience, this mind theater is engineered by the torturers. The goal is to break down the personality of the subject to gain complete control over him/her. I want to mention that although the new type of torture is based on a paradigm developed by the CIA and military, it is useless for extracting accurate information from subjects. In fact, when used upon TIs, it does not even have the intended results, because TIs increasingly resist isolation by joining — often over the Internet and by phone — other groups of TIs — and they usually become social activists against the Deep State.

Quoting from Alfred McCoy’s book, A Question of Torture, CIA Interrogation, from the Cold War to the War on Terror, Welsh states, “Thus, much of the pain from all forms of torture is psychological, not physical, based upon denying victims any power over their lives. In sum, the torturer strives ‘through insult and disqualification, by means of threats…to break all the victim’s possible existential platforms.”

Welsh insightfully writes,

“Alhough TIs go to extremes in trying to escape the physical targeting, they are unsuccessful. The psychological trauma is inflicted by the sense of causing one’s own pain. [In Guantanamo, causing one’s own pain was achieved by making prisoners stand for hours.] Many TIs report that the targeting causes TIs to become isolated from friends, families, and in many cases TIs are unable to work. This common reaction to targeting seems to be a type of self-inflicted psychological pain.”

What Welsh does not mention is that the rise of weekly or twice- weekly TI telephone conference calls sometimes with hundreds of TIs participating, has greatly diminished the psychological impact upon the victim — not that it ceases to be torture, but it does overcome largely the harrowing sense of isolation, and makes life tolerable for many. This is one reason the psychiatric metanarrative, which seeks to force TIs back into isolation and dependency on an expert who regards her as insane, is so harmful — and TIs would be well advised to avoid (and certainly not to argue with) all professionals who accept this metanarrative.

Welsh’s article makes the use of neuroweaponry less mysterious — although one cannot help but be puzzled by the sensibility of those who designed these tortures, which I repeat are not effective means of obtaining information. Drawing upon the work of students of CIA torture, Welsh highlights the psychological theory and distinctive goals of CIA torture — to break down the personality, not through direct psychical torture and injury but through the creation of physical distress and acute psychological trauma. In Guantanamo and elsewhere, the effect is achieved through a combination of making prisoners adopt stress positions (e.g., standing for hours), and subjecting them to isolation and control of the environment through sensory deprivation, constant noise, and discordant music. Welsh notes, “It seems logical to surmise that the successful techniques of no touch torture would cross over to more technically based remote, advanced mind control programs.”

Medical doctor John Hall writes in Guinea Pigs, Technologies of Control“Fast forward to today, we have over 300,000 people in the United States voicing complaints of electronic harassment….We have known for some time that several technologies exist that are capable of putting voices in one’s head to subliminally harass or control them.” (Guinea Pigs, Technologies of Control, 2014, Houston: Strategic Book Publishing). Why are so few people aware of this technology?

As Ramola D succinctly puts it, ”Neuroscientists in particular know that we stand today on the lip of a massive revolution in human affairs with the new knowledge of remote influencing technologies [remote from the target, often by satellite] capable of manipulating the human body and human brain. So do the Military and Intelligence agencies.” (Washington’s Blog, The American Public Informs President Obama’s Commission for the Study of Bioethical Issues About Ongoing Non-Consensual Human Experimentation in the USA Today, accessed July 2016.) By dismissing or ridiculing the complaints of the victims of these new technologies, psychiatrists, psychologists, and others in the helping professions, as well as journalists who unquestioningly propagate the psychiatric metanarrative, betray their own vocational mandates.

 

Back to Top

Neuroweaponry and Classified Military Research

In McPhate’s article, he implies that the tortures carried out on unwitting prisoners in the CIA’s /Deep State’s quest to gain absolute power over the human mind was an aberration that came to an end in the 1960s. “The military establishment, the theory goes, never gave up on the ambitions of MK Ultra, the C.I.A.’s infamous program to control the mind in the 1950s and ’60s,” he states.

He apparently has not read the numerous books documenting that the Deep State including CIA, NSA, and the military never gave up its research on influencing or controlling the mind. This has always been the purpose on their unclassified research. “The major areas of unclassified neuroscience research, molecular biology, cognitive neuroscience and brain imaging research, which had their beginnings in the 1950s, remain the dominant areas of research in neuroscience today,” writes Cheryl Welsh, a lawyer, TI and founder of Mind Justice. (Mind JusticeResearch Possibilities, Reliable Newspaper and Magazine Sources, Document Proof of Mind Control Technology.) Bioelectrical experiments on the brain were off limits to those who did not agree to put their talent to the service of the Deep State.

One might add that this arrangement — whereby the most potent tools for influencing the brain remained classified — was also in the interests of the pharmaceutical industry, a multi-billion dollar industry that would be financially threatened and diminished by the discoveries of bioelectric research. The psychiatric-pharmaceutical complex mushroomed in the 1980s and 1990s —  psychiatrists invented bogus explanations for life problems that required chemical fixes, e.g. the theory of “biochemical imbalances,” now discredited. But, as Welsh notes, there is evidence that research on the bioelectricity of the brain, the basis of the neuro-weaponry and mind control instruments used on TIs — has remained classified in CIA mind control programs that began in the 1950s and in DARPA programs to develop technologies for remote access to the brain. ”In the 1960s and 1970s, the electromagnetic aspect of neuroscience research was well funded and classified by the US government.” (Cheryl Welsh, Misled and betrayed: How US cover stories are keeping a Cold War weapon and illegal human testing secret, accessed July 2016.)

At the same time a cover story was propagated in the press that neuroweapons are “science fiction.” “As a result of both secrecy and prevailing scientific thought, however, bioelectromagnetic research has remained underfunded and disregarded by the mainstream scientific community.”(Cheryl Welsh, Misled and betrayed: How US cover stories are keeping a Cold War weapon and illegal human testing secret, accessed July 2016.) In other words the public knows little about mind control weapons because the military and Intelligence made sure the research was kept secret, and those few unclassified scientists who showed an interest in bio-electricity and would not submit to government control were steered away from researching the technology that held the most promise for mind control.

But actually there is more evidence for the existence of neuroweaponry despite efforts to keep it secret and despite the press secrecy and ridicule as exemplified in The New York Times article. Nick Begich, Ph.D., author and public speaker in his book, Controlling the Human Mind:The Technologies of Political Control and Tools for Peak Performance (Begich, 2006, Anchorage, Alaska: Earthpulse Press) unearths information that corroborates Welsh’s claim and that shows even in the unclassified sector there is evidence of the existence of the kind of advanced bio-electrical technology that is now used in non-consensual experiments on Americans. (See also Paul Baird, “Patented Technologies” at Surveillance Issues/Advanced Surveillance and Harassment Technologies, accessed November, 2016.) Actually the motive is not always obvious. Some believe the main purpose is no longer experimentation but primarily the torture of political enemies, or to create an environment of fear that stifles dissent.

Begich agrees the research that was soon classified began in the 1950s or 60s. While the research using LSD was publicized by the Church Committee, the CIA also had other projects. For example, MK-ULTRA Subproject 119 involved a critical view of the literature and scientific “bioelectric signals from the human organism, and activation of human behavior by remote [electronic] means” (Begich, Controlling the Human Mind:The Technologies of Political Control and Tools for Peak Performance, p.60). This description was written in 1960, thus corroborating Welsh’s argument.

In 1996, the US Air Force published a document called The Information Revolution and the Future Airforce by Colonel John Warden III, that laid out their plans for the future. It is worth quoting at length –it belies the psychiatric claim that the possession of advanced neuroweaponry is “impossible.”

“Prior to the mid-21st century, there will be a virtual explosion of knowledge in the field of neuroscience. We will have achieved a clear understanding of how the human brain works, how it really controls the various functions of the body, and how it can be manipulated (both positively and negatively). One can envision the development of electromagnetic energy sources, the output of which can be pulsed, shaped, and focused, that can couple with the human body in a fashion that will allow one to prevent voluntary muscular movements, control emotions (and thus actions), produce sleep, transmit suggestions, interfere with both short-term and long-term memory, produce an experience set, and delete an experience set [emphasis added]. This will open the door for the development of some novel capabilities that can be used in armed conflict, in terrorist/hostage situations, and in training….” (Begich, p.110).

The above descriptions are consistent with exactly the kind of problems that TIs claim they have as a result of what they believe to be targeting by neuro-weaponry! Psychiatrists do not read these documents (unless they work for the CIA), but by their standards the author of this document is delusional––because according to the psychiatric metanarrative, technology with these capacities could not possibly exist!

Furthermore, as early as 1980, John B. Alexander of the U.S. Army said,

“Mind-altering techniques designed to impact opponents are well-advanced. The procedures employed include manipulation of human behavior through the use of psychological weapons affecting sight, sound, smell, temperature, electromagnetic energy or sensory deprivation.” (Begich, p.100.)

Colonel Warden’s report goes on specifically to mention the creation of voices, referred to as Voice to Skull by TIs,

“It would also appear to be possible to create high fidelity speech in the human body, raising the possibility of covert suggestion and psychological direction… Thus, it may be possible to ‘talk’ to selected adversaries in a fashion that would be most disturbing to them.” (Begich, p.110, also at Earthpulse/Mind Control, accessed July 2016.)

Not only is this kind of impossible technology forecast in this report but Begich found that quite a few patents (unclassified) proving this technology — called Voice to Skull by TIs — existed.

In the early research, Begich comments it was reported that “clear sound signals” had been sent and received — this is reported in the non-classified sector. Dr Robert Becker, a physician known for his work on bio-electricity, wrote in 1995 about a current Voice to Skull device, that “such a device has obvious applications in covert operations designed to drive a subject crazy with voices, or to deliver undetectable instructions to a potential assassin.” (Begich, p.124.)

Begich in 2006 notes, about the Air Force report, confirming Welsh’s contention made years after the report, that the technology goes back to the 1950s: “The above report was a forecast for the year 2020. However, the reality is that these technologies already exist and there are a number of patents in the open literature which clearly show the possibilities. This research is not new but goes back to the 1950s.” (p.112.) The work done in the classified sector was far more advanced than someone without knowledge of this area could discern in 1995. Begich says that “what was known from experience” is that the government withheld patents under the advisement of the military. When inventors’ intellectual property is seized, “the inventors are given a choice — work for the government or you cannot continue your research on or even talk about the invention under a national security order. Those who do not cooperate have their work…shut down.” (Ibid, p.125.)

While the research in the 1990s was not new, what was new was the idea of openly using these weapons upon the civilian populations of “the enemy” and also as we will see upon US citizens. In 1995, the EPA wrote, “A new class of weapons, based on electromagnetic fields, has been added to the muscles of the military organism. The C3I [Command, Control, Communications and Intelligence] doctrine is still growing and expanding. It would appear that the military may yet be able to completely control the minds of the civilian population.” (p.112.)

The non-covert targeting of civilian populations by the military is a significant departure from its history. Clearly manipulation was used in the past but it was not openly espoused. But with such advanced technology evidently the military did not want to be confined to covert operations. Begich’s statement that in the past “the military used persuasion through real information…to win populations over” needs to emended. The military equally or more often used false information as well as false flag operations (e.g., attacks covertly committed by the military and attributed to Communists or terrorists) on civilians in enemy countries. But what is unprecedented was the ability and intention of the military to use “mind manipulation” —  through directed energy interventions on the brain itself — to gain support, or perhaps more likely not to garner support but to quell the resistance of civilian populations to US military interventions. (Ibid, also at Earthpulse/Mind Control, accessed July, 2016).

These kinds of weapons — those discussed above and others, euphemistically termed “non-lethal weapons” — are to be used not only against citizens of the “enemy” or against stateless terrorists but against Americans — and not only for the purpose of non-consensual experimentation which we have seen has been standard practice for decades, but also to control domestic “adversaries”! As Dr. Nick Begich notes, “On July 21, 1994, Dr. Christopher Lamb, Director of Policy Planning, issued a draft Department of Defense directive which would establish a policy for non-lethal weapons.” The policy connected the military’s weapons’ research to civilian law enforcement agencies. (Begich, p.156, also at The Everyday Concerned Citizen, Is the US Department of Justice Secretly Permitting Local Law Enforcement and the Military to Assault American Citizens Using Covert Directed-Energy “Non-Lethal” Weapons?, accessed July, 2016.)

According to this directive, non-lethal weapons are to be used on the government’s domestic “adversaries”. The definition of “adversary” now appears to include any American whose activities are disapproved of by the military or by law enforcement. The directive states (emphasis added): “The term ‘adversary’ is used above in its broadest sense, including those who are not declared enemies but who are engaged in activities we wish to stop. This policy does not preclude legally authorized domestic use of the nonlethal weapons by United States military forces in support of law enforcement.” (Ibid, p.157,  The Everyday Concerned Citizen, Is the US Department of Justice Secretly Permitting Local Law Enforcement and the Military to Assault American Citizens Using Covert Directed-Energy “Non-Lethal” Weapons?, accessed July, 2016.)

Begich aptly notes, “This allows the use of the military against the citizens of the country that they are supposed to protect…” It belies McPhate’s contention below that the goals of MK-ULTRA were abandoned in the 1970s. This describes a police state in which “non-lethal” weapons may be used upon anyone engaged in “activities” the military or police “wish to stop” — a police state in which the first Amendment has been completely vitiated, and the military, police, and Intelligence agencies are sovereign rulers invading not just persons’ homes (without warrants) but the sacred sanctuary of their brains, and in which even freedom of thought is monitored, proscribed, punished, manipulated. Or in other words 1984 on steroids! This of course by the standards of Psychiatry is both highly improbable and impossible. Tell that to the Military!

Furthermore, this plan is not merely a daydream of the Department of Defense. In 1995, the Pentagon received from the government $50 million to be used conjointly with the Department of Justice to develop these weapons —  and significant funding has been available every year since then. (Begich, p.158.) Begich aptly notes, “Not since the Civil War…has the military machine been turned against American citizens.” (Ibid, p.159.) Ramola D notes that “we are being publicly told that the Department of Defense long ago, in 1994, struck a deal with the Department of Justice to permit the military to use non-lethal weapons on American civilians, inside America, in support of law enforcement.”(The Everyday Concerned Citizen, Is the US Department of Justice Secretly Permitting Local Law Enforcement and the Military to Assault American Citizens Using Covert Directed-Energy “Non-Lethal” Weapons?, accessed July, 2016.)

According to military analyst and Washington Post journalist William Arkin, Department of Defense spending on electro-magnetic weapons had reached a billion dollars a year in 2008. (Belitsos, op.cit. “The Covert Use of Energy Weapons for Political Control, accessed July, 2016.) Air Force Secretary Michael Wynne stated in 2007 that nonlethal weapons should be tested on U.S. civilians in crowd control situations before being used on the battlefield. Domestic use would make it easier to avoid bad press in the international community: “Because if I hit someone with a non-lethal weapon and they claimed that it injured them, I think I would be vilified in the world press.” (The Seattle Times, September 13, 2006, “Test Non-Lethal Weapons in the US, See also Associated Press article at “US to Use Microwave Weapons on American Citizens“, accessed July 2006.) So in order to avoid unfavorable international publicity, it is better to test these experimental weapons on domestic political dissidents!

I have now presented, to the jury of readers, a summary of the case against the Deep State—based on a demonstration that Deep State operations, as described in the TI metanarrative, do in fact exist. Above I listed the obstacles, 1) to 6) , to fairly assessing the testimony of the targeted individual. There is lack of familiarity with TIs, 1), and with accounts of group stalking, 5), and of advanced neuro-weaponry, 3), which I have tried to remedy.

I have attempted here to overcome a formidable but egregious mistaken objection to the TI metanarrative which is based on 2), people’s difficulty believing the US government would subject American citizens to harm. I have shown above that this is not merely a “conspiracy theory” meme but has been corroborated by legislative as well as Presidential commissions and reports by US representatives: Over and over American citizens have been subjected by US intelligence and military to dangerous, harmful, and often lethal experiments — for the ostensible sake of national security. The use of cybernetic weaponry for political control has been openly advocated by top officials in the military in documents produced by the military. To think that experimentation and this kind of application of weaponry came to an abrupt end in the late 1970s when the Church Committee convinced Congress to make it illegal would be naïve (see Jon Rappoport, Jan 9, 2015, CIA Mind Control Program: Did it Really End?, accessed November 2016), considering the historical record — as noted — of the CIA, and considering that no one was ever held accountable for these crimes against humanity — no one paid a fine, no one went to prison, no one lost his job. Not even Helms who, as mentioned above, had destroyed the MK ULTRA files.

I have attempted to address 4), the belief that only TIs are making these kind of “paranoid” claims about Deep State (including the CIA) operations. I have examined testimony by whistle-blowers, former employees of US intelligence — not only is there no oversight to protect the public but the Deep State is able to manipulate State power to deter whistle-blowers from speaking up.

I have addressed 5), the difficulty believing that such resource-intensive activities as group stalking take place, by showing that activities like group stalking have existed before in totalitarian countries — and that there is evidence, presented in mainstream press and ACLU reports, to suggest that a massive program, using citizen-spies, of surveillance and harassment was implemented post-9/11. Furthermore, it is obvious from cursory research that advanced technology which psychiatrists claim could not exist, 5), does in fact exist.

Above all, I tried to show that, contrary to 6), public faith in psychiatric “expertise, that psychiatric authority is not based on the access to and application of a legitimate body of knowledge but is based on pretense and the enactment of a variety of ceremonies that create the illusion in the public mind that mental health professionals are scientists, are doctors of medicine (often they are MDs but their medical expertise is irrelevant to what they do as psychiatrists) when in actuality their categories of “mental illnesses” have no more validity than a collectively shared fantasy and their methods of “treating” mental illness are nothing more than methods of social control. Those therapists who are helpful to clients are effective simply because they are compassionate, intelligent, and humane — the adoption of a “medical model” would undermine the efficacy of any therapist.

The psychiatric metanarrative about TIs is yet another example of the mental health professions’ historical subordination of the quest for truth to financial exigencies, and to their own social mandate to control and correct those who deviate from dominant social norms, to domicile, tranquilize, contain and mute troubled or troubling persons, persons who are disturbing to their own families and kinship groups. The casualty has been the truth and the erstwhile losers have been those individuals who are battling to assert and recover those constitutional rights and liberties on which this country was founded — albeit imperfectly.

Below is a discussion of the article in The New York Times about TIs which was based on the psychiatric metanarrative.

 

Back to Top

Discussion of the New York Times Article About TIs Based on the Psychiatric Metanarrative

United States of Paranoia: They See Gangs of Stalkers

MIKE McPHATE  | JUNE 10, 2016 | The New York Times

Nobody believed him. His family told him to get help. But Timothy Trespas, an out-of-work recording engineer in his early 40s, was sure he was being stalked, and not by just one person, but dozens of them.

He would see the operatives, he said, disguised as ordinary people, lurking around his Midtown Manhattan neighborhood. Sometimes they bumped into him and whispered nonsense into his ear, he said.

“Now you see how it works,”they would say.

At first, Mr. Trespas wondered if it was all in his head. Then he encountered a large community of like-minded people on the internet who call themselves “targeted individuals,” or T.I.s, who described going through precisely the same thing.

The group was organized around the conviction that its members are victims of a sprawling conspiracy to harass thousands of everyday Americans with mind-control weapons and armies of so-called gang stalkers. The goal, as one gang-stalking website put it, is “to destroy every aspect of a targeted individual’s life.”

McPhate picks a poor example of a TI—or the best example if his goal was to persuade readers TIs are really psychotics.

Trepas’ confusion is made clear by the end of the article when Trepas himself wonders if TIs really exist. He could have picked Ramola D, winner of Grace Paley award for short stories; or Karen Stewart who worked for NSA for 28 years; or Gloria Naylor, best-selling novelist; or numerous other people I could name who were very accomplished before they became TIs. But then New York Times readers would be less inclined to dismiss TIs as psychotic. Mr. Trepas is not representative of the majority of TIs with whom I have spoken.

The author has set up his narrative. Mr. Trepas is a troubled person. He sees what he thinks are spies “disguised” as ordinary persons. (A knowledgeable TI would know that “ordinary persons” are recruited into the surveillance program.) At first McPhate tells us Trepas wonders if he is delusional, if “it was all in his head.” But then he encounters a large community of “like-minded people” who were organized around the conviction that there is a “sprawling conspiracy” to harass thousands of Americans.

Trepas begins to view his “delusional thoughts” as a legitimate interpretation of his experience, this is where the problem is defined. McPhate tells readers repeatedly throughout the article that the problem is the psychotic does not recognize he is mentally ill. This is the essential plot of the narrative — the basis of the conflict that propels the action in the psychiatric metanarrative about TIs. The problem is created or aggrandized when the pseudo-TI, or the covert psychotic, encounters a group of “non-compliant psychotics”– the psychiatric term for patients who are unwilling to take the medications psychiatrists say they need, and/or deny they are mentally ill. They are the unwitting villains in the psychiatric metanarrative about TIs.

The article continues:

A growing tribe of troubled minds

Mental health professionals say the narrative has taken hold among a group of people experiencing psychotic symptoms that have troubled the human mind since time immemorial. Except now victims are connecting on the internet, organizing and defying medical explanations for what’s happening to them.

From McPhate’s viewpoint and that of many if not most Americans, mental health professionals are the experts on reality. The “medical” experts say that the TIs’ interpretation of their experience should be discounted–and therefore the journalist will discount it. The TI is a psychotic in a new guise and her interpretations should not be taken seriously but viewed only as symptoms of her troubled mind. Psychotics have existed “since time immemorial.”

But now “victims” of “psychosis” are connecting with other covert psychotics on the Internet and “defying” “medical” explanations of their experience. This spells trouble. Only the psychiatric, the medical, explanation is real. In the psychiatric metanarrative, the TI is a non-compliant psychotic, and the behavior and beliefs of non-compliant psychotics are taken out of their social context — in which they make sense — and construed as unintelligible symptoms of an illness. The TI is treated by mental professionals as a non-compliant mental patient, and there is nothing she can say to change that diagnosis except by deciding to be a compliant mental patient.

The community, conservatively estimated to exceed 10,000 members, has proliferated since 9/11, cradled by the internet and fed by genuine concerns over government surveillance. A large number appear to have delusional disorder or schizophrenia, psychiatrists say.

Again it is repeated that there is a large and growing number of these troubled minds. Their growth is attributed to 9/11 and the Internet, and they are “fed” by “genuine concerns” over government surveillance. The journalist obviously must acknowledge the genuineness of this concern because, after all, readers know about Edward Snowden’s disclosures — but he wastes no time in getting back to his topic. A large number of these persons are schizophrenic or afflicted with delusional disorder — psychiatrists say so. The term “schizophrenic” is introduced, a term that has taken on the most ominous connotations, as opposed to the more mild term “delusional disorder.”

In the psychiatric metanarrative, schizophrenics are afflicted with the worst mental illness and thus constitute the lowest caste in the psychiatric status hierarchy of the mentally afflicted. They are the untouchables who for centuries were sequestered in state institutions and are now in our midst but restrained — often by force of law — by the fetters of toxic sedating “anti-psychotic” drugs. Thomas Szasz called schizophrenia “the sacred symbol” of psychiatry and argued that its evocation of chaos and unreason gave psychiatry its identity as the epitome and protector of order and reason (even to Freud who wrote contemptuously of schizophrenics), guarding us from these barbarians who had arisen inexplicably from the midst of Western civilization itself.

So “a large number” — psychiatrists say — of TIs are schizophrenics or otherwise afflicted. What about those who are not psychotic? Will the journalist give them a voice, allow them to express their concerns, and to comment on the psychiatric narrative? Or will they remain voiceless? In fact by the end of the article they have disappeared altogether, since McPhate does not interview one TI or one whistle-blower — with the possible exception of Dr John Hall — whom he presents as credible.

Yet, the phenomenon remains virtually unresearched.

The phenomenon has been defined by McPhate: Psychotic persons who defy psychiatric explanations and thus, do not get the help they need. But research is required on this medical problem.

For the few specialists who have looked closely, these individuals represent an alarming development in the history of mental illness: thousands of sick people, banded together and demanding recognition on the basis of shared paranoias.

Specialists in what? Psychobabble? The journalist defines the “alarming development” in the history of psychiatry: Thousands of sick paranoid people “banded together” — a “growing tribe of troubled minds.”

They are banded together like criminals — “a tribe of troubled minds” — and “demanding recognition.” The problem is a medical problem — and thus a social problem because we have now a tribe of psychotics who refuse to accept that they are mentally ill and thus will not get the psychiatric help they need. Psychiatry’s narrative, dramatized by the journalist, seems designed to evoke the public’s deepest fears about this “alarming development.” The words themselves suggest something sinister. These paranoid persons “defy” and “demand” (from society). The journalist thus takes the psychiatric narrative and gives it a journalistic and dramatic form — he is documenting a serious new medical-social problem. The TI’s metanarrative, insofar as it is alluded to — that the TI is a victim of surveillance, groupstalking, mind manipulation — is depoliticized, emptied of substantive content, and redefined as psychotic symptomotology. The journalist and the psychiatrist can make the TI’s narrative disappear — they can banish from the public imagination any genuine concerns the TIs’ metanarrative may evoke about surveillance and other pernicious operations of the Deep State.

But of what do they “demand” recognition? The question is elided by the phrasing: “on the basis.” The journalist implies they demand not just recognition but acceptance of their collective “paranoias.” This is in fact true, however carelessly phrased. TIs do not want to be classified and dismissed as psychotics, as paranoid. They want the TI metanarrative as expressed by their most articulate spokespersons to be taken seriously and reckoned with by other members of civil society — including mental health professionals whose responsibility is to help the distressed, and journalists whose responsibility is to search for the truth.

The journalist does not investigate what the TI defines as an alarming development: The growth of an apparatus of surveillance, control, and torture which victimizes American citizens, and is outside accountability. All indications suggest he has not even read the books given him by TIs he consulted -– and he has certainly not seriously considered the testimony by scientists and former agents who confirm the TIs’ “delusions.”

They raise money, hold awareness campaigns, host international conferences and fight for their causes in courts and legislatures.

These psychotics are busy and effective activists for their cause.

Perhaps their biggest victory came last year, when believers in Richmond, Calif., persuaded the City Council to pass a resolution banning space-based weapons that they believe could be used for mind control. A similar lobbying effort is underway in Tucson.

They deceived the people of Richmond, California.

An “echo chamber” of paranoia

Dr. Lorraine Sheridan, who is co-author of perhaps the only study of gang-stalking, said the community poses a danger that sets it apart from other groups promoting troubling ideas, such as anorexia or suicide. On those topics, the internet abounds with medical information and treatment options.

This tribe, this community of psychotics poses a real and distinctive danger to themselves and to the public because of the Internet — according to the expert on group stalking whose “investigation” “found” group-stalking did not exist. As mentioned above, this study was flawed and showed lack of rudimentary knowledge about experimental methodology.

An internet search for“gang-stalking,”however, turns up page after page of results that regard it as fact. “What’s scary for me is that there are no counter sites that try and convince targeted individuals that they are delusional,”Dr. Sheridan said.

According to the mental health professional, a psychologist and “expert” on gang-stalking, these delusional persons go to the Internet and find copious websites with “information” that confirm the reality of their sense that they are being stalked. The expert finds it frightening that there are no “counter” websites to tell them they are “delusional.” Of course she accepts the psychiatric metanarrative. Not because she is intentionally complicit — although past history suggests some of the most prominent psychiatrists and psychologists worked for the CIA. But because (see discussion above), like most mental health professionals, she is angered and disturbed by non-compliant patients — patients who won’t take their “medication,” and who will not accept the psychiatrists’ evaluation of them as “mentally ill.”

They end up in a closed ideology echo chamber,” she said.

We are told by the expert on reality how the psychotic delusion is anchored in the sick mind. It never occurs to her that she may be in a closed ideology echo chamber…

“In instructional tracts online, veterans of the movement explain the ropes to rookies:

Do not engage with the voices in your head.

If your relatives tell you you’re imagining things, they could be in on it.

Do not visit a psychiatrist.”

Here we see the basis of the psychiatrist’s own fear. These “psychotics” are violating the sacred psychiatric injunction: When troubled, consult a mental health professional.

This violation threatens to undermine psychiatric authority, or more precisely the authority of the mental health system with its hierarchy of professionals, including psychologists, social workers, and other allied disciplines.

TIs should take note. If they randomly consult a psychiatrist or any mental health professional, the odds are they will be treated as non-compliant psychotics. The psychiatric metanarrative denies that the State in America has the ability and the will to subject persons to sophisticated forms of tortures — and refuses to look seriously at the copious evidence that it has done so in the past and is doing so now.

Note that the journalist uses again the term “tribe,” with its menacing connotations — earlier the reference was to a tribe of troubled minds. Don’t be fooled, the experts warns: This new breed of psychotics comes from all classes and even includes professionals in higher socio-economic echelons, highly educated people, people the average person would not suspect were really psychotics, even schizophrenics, passing as normal.

In Facebook forums and call-in support groups, they commiserate over the skepticism of their loved ones and share stories of black vans that circle the block or co-workers conscripted into the campaign.

They are unhappy that their loved ones don’t believe them and they share stories the journalist depicts as bizarre. This emerging psychiatric meta-narrative dramatized by the journalist makes the TIs appear very paranoid, and it seeks to drive a wedge between the TI and her loved ones who will increasingly find the psychiatric metanarrative recounted in the Press — even in the prestigious New York Times.

A T.I. subgenre has blossomed on Amazon. Left, the cover of John Hall’s “Guinea Pigs: Technologies of Control,” and Robert Duncan’s “How to Tame a Demon.”

They have self-published dozens of e-books, with titles like “Tortured in America”and“My Life Changed Forever.”In hundreds of YouTube videos they offer testimonials and try to document evidence of their stalking, even confronting unsuspecting strangers.

All this evidence the expert warns is part of a planned effort — a conspiracy comes to mind, although the psychiatric expert would never call it a conspiracy — to “try to document” evidence that they are not psychotics but victims.

They don’t “try to” document evidence–they do document this. And McPhate chose to ignore it, despite McPhate’s correspondence with TIs and whistle-blowers — as TIs have noted. (See Human Rights Watch3 Blog, The Questionable Reporting of The New York times, accessed August, 2016.) He also does not mention that some of the people documenting the group stalking and the use of neuroweaponry are whistle-blowers or other experts (journalists for alternative blogs) with credentials and backgrounds that help establish their credibility.

Ramola D provides a list of authorities at The Everyday Concerned Citizen/Robert DuncanRamola herself is a prolific writer and TI (since late 2013) who won a Washington Writers’ Publishing House award in 1998 for her poetry collection Invisible Season, and the 2008 AWP Grace Paley Prize in Short Fiction for her collection Temporary Lives & Other Stories — she was for years a professor at George Washington University and is the recipient of a 2005 National Endowment for the Arts Fellowship in Poetry.

Of course, by omitting these credentials, it is easier to convince readers these whistle-blowers are delusional. Dr. Robert Duncan, for example, has multiple graduate degrees from Harvard and Dartmouth. He has worked for the Department of Defense and the CIA on AI and neuroscience projects which seek to stimulate and rewire the human brain. He became a whistle-blower when he discovered this technology was being used in torturous non-consensual experiments on American citizens, just as LSD had been used in non-consensual experiments by the CIA in a previous era in MK ULTRA, as documented by the US Congress’ Church Committee.

Although McPhate corresponded with Duncan, he left all of Duncan’s comments out of the article. McPhate’s manipulation of his readers is further illustrated by the fact that he selects one of Duncan’s relatively unimportant books to mention (“How to Tame a Demon”) — a book with a title (in the context McPhate has established) that makes it appear to the reader that Duncan is a psychotic who is obsessed by (literal) demons.

He could have mentioned Duncan’s seminal book, Project Soul Catcher: Secrets of Cyber and Cybernetic Warfare Revealed — but that title would not have been as likely to make Duncan look paranoid. Just mentioning a few of Duncan’s accomplishments would have undermined the psychiatric metanarrative McPhate promulgates. For example, Duncan writes, “My projects have included algorithms for Echelon and CIA natural-language parsing and classification of document content, IRS formula for red-flagging audits, writing the artificial intelligence code to automate tracking of the Soviet Nuclear Submarine Fleet and all water vessels, work integrating HAARP with SIGINT, SIGCOM, and SPAWAR…” — that is just the beginning of a long list. (See Dr. Robert Duncan.com, not Duncan’s website, accessed 2016.)

Again note that the TIs are presented as a threat: “Unsuspecting strangers” (emphasis added) -– that is, strangers who do not realize that TIs are really psychotics — are alerted they may be “confronted” by these disguised non-compliant psychotics. I have spoken to dozens of TIs. I don’t know any who “confronted” strangers. Many sought to tell their story to mental health professionals — invariably with adverse effects.

“They wanted to basically destroy me, and they did,” a young mother in Phoenix says in one video, choking back tears. She lost custody of her daughter and was sent to a behavioral health hospital, says the woman, whose name is being withheld to protect her privacy. “But I am going to fight back for the rest of my life.”

She adds, “And guess what, I’m not crazy.”

Here is the leitmotif, formulated in different ways, but always the denial of one’s insanity —  woven throughout the narrative. The journalist is trying to persuade the readers that the psychiatric metanarrative with its trope of the (mad and bad) non-compliant patients — here in the guise of the TI — is the truth, beyond doubt. The real problem, he tells us, echoing the psychiatrist, is that the covert psychotic will not admit, or does not realize — as a victim of the delusions of other TIs — that she is psychotic.

The journalist shows no sympathy for this bereaved woman who lost custody of her daughter. Or if he has any sympathy it is because she is, in his mind, a non-compliant psychotic who resists getting psychiatric help. He quotes her remark that she’s not crazy, but if there is any doubt that his intent is to convey that she is crazy, it is dispelled in the succeeding sentence about Dr. Sheridan’s study which found that all of the people who claimed to be victims of group stalking were delusional!

The woman quoted above lost custody of her daughter — probably because she went to an authority and volunteered information. The desire for the recognition for one’s identity, one’s sanity as a human being who is a subject, an equal, a person whose experiences and perspective are regarded as meaningful, leads many TIs — who cannot confide in family and friends — to seek out psychiatrists or therapists under the illusion that they will be understanding.

McPhate’s discussion with several mental health professionals is indicative: they do not hide their disdain for “patients” who refuse to accept they are ill. Although this is not discussed by McPhate, psychiatrists and other mental health professionals are particularly irked by the unwillingness of many patients to take psychiatric drugs. Ever since “psychotics” were released from state mental hospitals, they have been battling with mental health professionals for the right to liberty — a major site of contestation is the bodies of mental patients.

Many patients are reluctant to take “anti-psychotics” (above all other “meds”) because of the extremely discomforting or painful “side effects” typical of the neuro-toxic (see above) brain-damaging “anti-psychotics,” and/or because they are increasingly aware of adverse effects on their health. (See Seth Farber, 2012, The Spiritual Gift of Madness: The Failure of Psychiatry and the Mad Pride Movement, Rochester, Vermont: Inner Traditions.) Yet professionals insist that patients’ unwillingness is based on an irrational refusal to get well. (Yet we saw above that in the long run, these drugs actually impede the recovery process, although professionals are “in denial” about this fact.) Subconsciously, the psychiatrist sees the refusal to “accept one’s illness” as a threat to her authority, her legitimacy, her professional identity. (See Rosenhan experiment discussed above.) It is also a challenge to her socio-economic status, since an exodus of patients from the system would result in a loss of jobs and markets. It should be noted studies have shown mental patients were not significantly more violent than “normal” people.

Dr. Sheridan’s study, written with Dr. David James, a forensic psychiatrist, examined 128 cases of reported gang-stalking. It found all the subjects were most likely delusional.

I discussed this study above. This representation of the study is inaccurate. It did not “find” the subjects were delusional. It found that 2 mental health professionals, a psychiatrist and a psychologist, independently reached the conclusion that 128 subjects had to be delusional because what they reported in their written accounts was either highly unlikely or impossible. But on what basis can one call an event “highly unlikely”? Sheridan and James give examples of such events including hostile operatives being inserted in victim’s workplace and their children’s schools, 24-hour electronic surveillance involving teams of men in black vans, etc.

Scientific studies of the sort published in this journal generally calculate the probability statistically. There is no way for Sheridan and James, or anyone, to measure the likelihood of 24-hour surveillance. The TI reports seem highly unlikely to the professionals because it is an event they have never read about in the newspapers and that seems to lack a rationale. But before they come to convict the TI of being delusional — the diagnosis has very negative social consequences — they should examine the TI’s evidence.

Sheridan and James are like a jury which heard only the argument of the prosecution, and plugged up their ears when the expert witnesses for the defense — for the TI — took the stand.

In the light of this evidence, these allegations are very plausible — Intelligence agencies have behaved this way in the past here and elsewhere. Sheridan and James and McPhate have such strong prejudices that they refuse to examine the evidence — any decent lawyer for TIs would have easily gotten them thrown out of the jury pool. To determine conclusively if a TI is delusional one could hire a private investigator to determine if they are being stalked. (Of course if the perpetrators are canny they would realize an investigator was on the case, and temporarily stop the stalking.) Or one could examine the kind of documentary evidence for the operations of the Deep State I present above. Sheridan and James are not investigators — they are biased mental health professionals. And McPhate is not an investigative journalist — at least not here.

My own conviction as a psychologist who has not abandoned critical thinking is that most of the TIs I have met are not delusional. (In a few cases I have been unsure and a few I thought were delusional.) Certainly their allegations are very plausible and thus these allegations should not be dismissed as delusional. In most cases I have examined there is a clear difference between the “schizophrenic” and the TI. (I do not accept that “schizophrenia” is an incurable disease — I regard it as a emotional-spiritual crisis; its seeming chronicity a result of the iatrogenic drugs and standard practices of mental health professionals.)

“One has to think of the T.I. phenomenon in terms of people with paranoid symptoms who have hit upon the gang-stalking idea as an explanation of what is happening to them,” Dr. James said.

 A mishmash of conspiracy theories

McPhate uses the pejorative term mishmash as if conflict and diversity is not the norm in virtually every intellectual discipline dealing with complex phenomena. I doubt he would say quantum physics is a mishmash of theories.

Perhaps unsurprisingly, the community is divided over the contours of the conspiracy. Some believe the financial elite is behind it. Others blame aliens, their neighbors, Freemasons or some combination.

The movement’s most prominent voices, however, tend to believe the surveillance is part of a mind-control field test done in preparation for global domination. The military establishment, the theory goes, never gave up on the ambitions of MK Ultra, the C.I.A.’s infamous program to control the mind in the 1950s and ’60s.

What is implied here is that MK ULTRA was an anomalous program that ended in the 1960s.

A leading proponent of that view is an anesthesiologist from San Antonio named John Hall.

McPhate lets Hall talk but at this point in the article the framework is now established — the psychiatric metanarrative. So the unwary reader assumes these are the words of a mentally-afflicted man and they ring hollow.

John Hall, an anesthesiologist in San Antonio, has been a leading voice of those who feel targeted.

In his 2009 book, “A New Breed: Satellite Terrorism in America,”Dr. Hall gave his own account of being targeted. Agents bleached his water, he wrote, and bombarded him with voices making murderous threats.

The book made a splash because of the messenger: a licensed member of the medical establishment who was telling those who feel targeted that psychiatrists were misleading them. A janitor knows as much about the human mind, he wrote.

As we saw above, a janitor often does know more about the human psyche than the psychiatrist who cannot even distinguish the sane from the insane. In Rosenhan’s study it was other mental patients who suspected the pseudo-patients were not insane. None of the professionals guessed. Their training and miseducation prevents them from understanding what goes on in persons’ minds.

Dr. Hall, 51, was invited for an interview on “Coast to Coast AM,” a conspiracy-minded radio show based in California that is said to reach millions of listeners. After that, he said,“I had probably three or 4,000 emails from people saying:‘It’s happening to me in this state.’It’s happening to me in Florida.’It’s happening to me in California.’”

The similarities of the cases spoke to a wide-ranging campaign, he said. “If the psychiatrists want to say that this is schizophrenia or delusional disorder, that’s fine,” he said. “But every one of these victims have the same story.”

Dr. Hall discusses gang stalking, psychiatry and MK Ultra.

While Dr. Hall has faced scrutiny from the Texas Medical Board over his mental fitness, he retains his license. Over time, however, many others who identify as gang-stalking victims end up out of work. They are mocked by colleagues, tolerated by family. Friends and spouses fall away.

McPhate reports this outcome as if it is a result of TIs’ psychosis — their intractable attitude, their refusal to get psychiatric treatment.

A pretext for violence

The despair that results has led some to lash out in violence.

Many in the community, for example, are convinced that Aaron Alexis, who killed 12 people at the Washington Navy Yard in 2013, was a victim. Mr. Alexis, a former sailor, left behind a document accusing the Navy of attacking his brain with “extremely low frequency” electromagnetic waves. On the side of his shotgun were etched the words “my elf weapon.”

It was unclear when Myron May’s mental distress began, but by the fall of 2014, it had become too much. He quit his job as a prosecutor in New Mexico and traveled to Florida. There, he videotaped a testimonial about how gang-stalking had ruined his life.

“As you can see right now,” he says into the camera, “I am totally not crazy.”

Myron May: “I’m what’s called a targeted individual.”

Laying out his case, he describes an episode at a gas station where he believed somebody in dark glasses was mimicking his movements. “It was really creepy,” he said. “Everything I did, he did.”

Later in the video, he prays for forgiveness for his future sins. “Father,” he says, “right now I ask that you look down on all the targeted individuals across the globe. Help them to cope with this madness.”

“On Nov. 20, 2014, Mr. May walked into a library at Florida State University, where he had graduated in 2005, and shot three people, leaving one paralyzed. He dared the police to kill him, then fired in their direction before being fatally shot, officials said. He was 31.

Officers standing over the body of Myron May on Nov. 20, 2014, after the shooting at Florida State University.

The vast majority of people with psychosis never resort to violence. Still, studies suggest that a small number of those experiencing psychotic episodes — especially paranoid thoughts, accompanied by voices making commands — are more likely to act on hostile urges than people without a mental illness.

And what if paranoid thoughts are put in their mind by the CIA? Is the percentage of identified TIs — who McPhate claims are paranoid psychotics —  or real paranoids more likely to act on hostile urges than the angry non-TI, non-psychotic? McPhate presents no evidence to confirm this.

Furthermore several psychiatrists have demonstrated that the commonly prescribed “anti-depressants” (Selective Serotonin Reuptake Inhibitors or SSRI) actually cause some patients to become violent. Dr Peter Breggin writes, “It’s not the patient’s ‘mental illness’ that causes violence, it’s the drugs…[A]ntidepressants can and do cause violence on every level from people who feel more irritable or less loving toward their families to people who commit domestic violence or carry out mass murders.” (See Peter Breggin, July 25, Mad in America, “Violence Caused by Antidepressants”, accessed November, 2016).

Yet the idea that TIs and other “non-compliant psychotics” have a tendency toward violence is an integral part of the psychiatric metanarrative — a justification for forcing so-called patients, including TIs, to take psychiatric drugs, sometimes the very drugs that cause violence!

Many in the T.I. community, as anyone would, have repudiated the shootings by Mr. Alexis and Mr. May. But some also harbor troubling views about their perceived oppressors. They question how people could be so cruel.

Why is this troubling? Don’t most people take the view that their oppressors are cruel? It is troubling because McPhate accepts the psychiatric metanarrative which posits that the TI, the non-compliant psychotic, has a tendency to retaliate against her enemies — and thus requires psychiatric restraint — forced drugging.

Karen Stewart of Tallahassee, Fla., believes large numbers of regular people have been brainwashed by the National Security Agency into thinking that she is a traitor or terrorist. Wherever she goes, she says — to church, to the grocery store, to the doctor’s office — they are there, watching.

McPhate withholds critical information from the readers: Karen Stewart worked for the NSA as an Intelligence analyst from 1982 to 2010 — for 28 years. For 28 years she was never considered a psychotic. The biographical facts that are omitted buttress the TI metanarrative whereas the false depiction of Ms. Stewart strips her of her credentials, her authority, and reduces her to the status of an ordinary non-compliant lunatic. McPhate’s inaccurate depiction serves one purpose however — it strengthens the credibility of the psychiatric metanarrative.

Stewart writes elsewhere that she was “railroaded out” of NSA

“just two years before I could retire because I had dared ask the Inspector General to investigate a matter involving work credit and promotion theft. I moved to Florida in 2011 to get away and wait for the lawsuit (appeal to forbidden retaliatory firing) to be adjudicated by the Judge Lawrence Gallagher at the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission (EEOC) in Baltimore.” (Washington’s BlogNSA Whistleblower Karen Stewart Speaks Candidly About Illegal and Criminal NSA & FBI Programs of Organized Stalking and Electronic Harassment in the USA & Abroad)

She states,

“Under former President Bush and now continued under President Obama, what apparently started decades ago as illegal and clandestine programs of experiments on human subjects, such as the CIA’s MK ULTRA, has resulted in the proliferation of Defense Contractors such as Lockheed-Martin, Raytheon, General Dynamics, and others, making secret agreements with Federal agencies such as DOD, DIA, NSA, DHS, etc., to allow them and related laboratories and universities to expand inhumane experimentation programs such as illegal experiments for Directed Energy Weapons on unwitting and non-consenting American citizens.”(See The Everyday Concerned Citizen/Karen Stewart, NSA Whistleblower: Synopsis of the Silent Holocaust Taking Place in the United States.

It baffles her, she said. But worse, “It makes me angry to see how many people in this country are sociopaths. They are absolute groupthink drones,” she said. “I don’t even consider them human anymore.”

“A need for meaning’

Susan Clancy, a Harvard-trained psychologist who has researched people who believe they’ve been abducted by aliens, said it could be extremely difficult to dissuade patients who have latched onto beliefs that they think explain their delusions.

“I think it’s a need for meaning and a need to understand your life and the problems you’re having,” she said. “You’re not some meaningless nobody. You’re being followed by the C.I.A.”

McPhate brings in yet another professional — this one from Harvard — to give weight to the psychiatric metanarrative. Yet he made contact with a number of former whistle-blowers, and quotes only one — without even mentioning her career at NSA.

Yet many of the people McPhate interviewed were not “meaningless nobodies.” Stewart was an NSA employee for decades. Robert Duncan, the whistle-blower whom he interviewed, is a former CIA employee and a scientific prodigy with multiple degrees from Ivy League schools. John Hall was a physician. Rosanne Schneider, whom he interviewed (but does not mention), is an author and artist. And furthermore there are numerous highly accomplished TIs. But including them would have undermined the psychiatric metanarrative.

In that way, Dr. Clancy said, the behavior shares a trait with religious belief: To abandon it would be life upending.

Paula Trespas, Mr. Trespas’s mother, said she avoided debating with him.

“It wasn’t something that he was making up,” she said. “He really felt the way he felt and experienced what he experienced. I got to the point where I was just finally saying to him: “I’m very, very sad that you have to go through this. I wish that there was something that I could do.’ ”

The big hope is that society will wake up to what’s happening and put a stop to it, those who feel targeted say. In some cases, they do seek psychiatric help. In others, the delusions subside. For the rest, the prognosis isn’t good, psychiatrists say. Many contemplate suicide.

Mr.Trespas, now 49, says he went so far as to prepare a rope.

Sitting at a coffee shop in Brooklyn last month, he says the stalking has thankfully quieted down. But he says his harassers have also been seeding his body with Morgellons, a painful, insectlike infestation of the skin that many doctors say is psychosomatic.

He is gaunt, with weary, sad eyes. It’s been eight years since it all began, he says. He can’t hold a job. His friends have drifted away.

The TI community includes a wide range of persons — many are accomplished writers or professionals, as McPhate noted above. Yet by choosing one of the loneliest, most confused, and most forlorn TIs, one who is not even sure of the TI metanarrative, he reinforces the credibility of the psychiatric metanarrative. This is a self-identified TI who may or may not be a TI. (Many TIs have reported that they have encountered disinformation agents posing as TIs.)

The online community has been a crucial support, he says. “But we don’t know exactly what’s happening,” he says. “Maybe we’re believing the wrong thing. I don’t know. That’s why I try to keep my mind open about who and what and why and how.”

Trepas is the only TI I’ve heard of who thinks “maybe we’re believing the wrong thing.”

One thing he is certain of though, he says: He’s not crazy.

McPhate ends the story on the cautionary motif of the psychiatric metanarrative: TIs are psychotics who refuse to accept that they have an illness — they are non-compliant psychotics.

It is a sad fact that the mainstream media has followed the lead of the psychiatric “authorities” in dismissing the allegations of TIs and defining them all as non-compliant treatment-resistant psychotics. They thus help to promulgate the psychiatric metanarrative about TIs. Journalists and mental health workers rest their case ultimately on articles like that of Sheridan and James. This article has the appearance of a genuine “investigation,” of a scientific study — but it is all hot air. It substitutes reliability for validity, the agreement or shared fantasy of mental health professionals for correspondence to social reality. In other words the hidden sub-text of pseudo-investigations like Sheridan and James is, “It is so because we the experts say it is so.”

It is my hope that in the future The New York Times will serve its function as the fourth estate. Instead of dismissing TIs and promulgating the psychiatric metanarrative, McPhate or another journalist will seriously investigate TIs’ claims. Instead of interviewing only the most troubled TIs, and thus, wittingly or unwittingly, reinforcing the psychiatric claim that TIs are covert psychotics, this journalist would interview some of the more articulate spokespersons for TIs (some of whom are mentioned above), and seriously consider their allegations.

He or she would not treat psychiatric opinions as revealed truth but would give voice to dissidents who do not subscribe to the psychiatric metanarrative. The journalist would present the testimony of a few of the whistle-blowers who have worked in intelligence — Robert Duncan is today the most prominent and outspoken of former employees of American intelligence who worked on cybernetic weaponry. While not revealing classified information, Duncan has exposed the advanced technologies used against innocent persons. As a whistle-blower he follows in the tradition of men like Edward Snowden and William Binney whose views as a supporter of TIs could also be solicited.

The torture of American citizens described by TIs is a violation of international proscriptions against torture and against non-consensual experiments on subjects. The policy of both APAs prohibit psychiatrists and psychologists from inflicting harm upon anyone. The Coalition for an Ethical Psychology wrote:

“The APA and other health professional organizations have a duty to support the ethical practice of the profession, which includes protecting their members from complicity in human rights abuses and other violations of international law.”(See Coalition for Ethical Psychology, Preserve Do-No-Harm for Military Psychologists: Coalition Responds to Department of Defense Letter to the APA, accessed November, 2016).

By labeling TIs as “psychotic”, mental health professionals are wittingly or unwittingly complicitous in the most serious kinds of human rights abuses — in crimes against humanity.

 

Back to Top

The CEP and the Power of the Ethically Guided Minority

The Coalition for Ethical Psychology has served an important and exemplary role within the American Psychological Association.They were formed in 2006 in response to psychologists’ participation at Guantanamo as mentioned above. Their goal is “to expose and oppose psychologist involvement in any state-supported abuse with a national security rationale.” They state,

“We are alarmed that the APA, the world’s largest mental health organization, has overlooked, and even colluded with, subversion of psychology to state power. The ethical commitment of psychology as a profession is to improve human welfare universally.” (See Coalition for Ethical Psychology, About.)

This is a far more subversive goal than the founders may realize, since the entire mental health system is a regime of surveillance and control — of the “mentally ill” — and a servant of State power. CEP places APA members between conflicting mandates: On the one hand, is the ancient injunction of the helping professions to “do no harm” and the ethical obligation to serve the universal good, and on the other hand is their perceived obligation to the state to control trouble or troubling individuals. This is a conflict of interests considering the repressive and often punitive nature of the modern state. Another factor compromising their ability to help clients is the professionals’ financial ties to the pharmaceutical industry, which has been enormously lucrative for mental health professionals and leads them to place profits before people. This conflict is most obvious with psychiatrists but it affects everyone working in the “mental health” system.

The mental health system is a social control agency similar to law enforcement and criminal justice, although distinctive in many respects, as shown above. The linchpin of the system is the administration of psychiatric drugs disguised as medicine: Psychiatric patients in the public sector — state mental hospital or group homes and “out-patient treatment” — are often subjected to involuntary psychiatric “out-patient” commitment (most heinously, the involuntary injection of psychotropic drugs). Involuntary treatment has recently itself been declared to be a violation of international law and human rights by the UN Committee on the Rights of Persons with Disabilities. (See Tina Minkowitz, Mad in America, Oct 13 2013, “UN Prohibition of Psychiatric Commitment: Review and Analysis”.)

Dr. Bonnie Burstow writes,

“Take away the medical veneer and what we have here are substances given for non-existent disorders [problems in living], all of which by their nature create chemical imbalances, all of which disable, a number of which are associated with violence, all of which profoundly damage the brain. . . Is damage as treatment the best we can do? Is a society of rampant iatrogenic damage acceptable?” (Bonnie Burstow, Psychiatry and the Business of Madness, 2015, New York, p.200)

An ethical psychology or psychiatry is impossible in an unethical society. As R.D. Laing pointed out, the well-adjusted bomber pilot — dropping bombs on women and children of the “enemy” — serving the interests of the State and of corporations, would be considered “mentally healthy” by mental health professionals although he is committing war crimes that violates elementary moral norms. That is, in an ethically perverse society, conformity and adjustment is sanctified and murder in service of the state assumes a façade of moral legitimacy.

The organizers of Coalition for an Ethical Psychology (CEP) are therapists in private practice (not in the public sector) and thus relatively free of State coercion. They are often unaware that the public mental health system is normally abusive. Abuse is not an aberration. CEP and others dedicated to realizing the ideal of an ethical society seek to expose unethical practices in the helping professions, and pressure professionals to uphold transcendent ethical norms. Every act of exposure and protest — no matter how selective — gives witness to values that transcend the mental health system and the State to which it is customarily subordinate.

I hope I have made it clear that many or most self-identified TIs are victims of no-touch torture and/or non-consensual experimentation. The declaration that all TIs are delusional is based upon premises that do not stand up to historical examination. Thus, the promulgation of the psychiatric metanarrative about TIs by professionals who have failed to investigate the allegations of thousands of self-identified Tis is a failure to take its own ethical mandate — to improve human welfare — seriously. If not an act of deliberate deception, it is an act of bullshitting, to quote Levine. Sheridan and Young’s pseudo-scientific study (see above) claims to have “found” that all TIs are delusional psychotics and thus enables professionals to silence and “treat” them, while avoiding the inner moral conflict that would ordinarily result from condoning and facilitating (no-touch) torture.

Like psychologists’ participation in the torture regime in Guantanamo, treating TIs as psychotic is a blatant, witting or unwitting, subservience to Deep State actions that are violations of human rights as recognized by international law. It is comparable to the Soviet psychiatry “treatment” of dissidents. The fact that a small minority of persons within the American Psychological Association have succeeded on occasion in pushing the group to take the high road and stand up for universal human welfare against the dictates of the State is testimony to the power of the individual inspired by transcendent moral ideals. Had the individuals who formed CEP not had such a strong commitment to the truth, had they not forced APA membership to confront their leaders’ involvement in designing a torture regime, the APA would still permit its members to participate in torture under the guise of “national security.” As Bruce Levine said, it’s easier to continue to bullshit than to face the truth. CEP provides a lesson in leadership, in creative maladjustment, for all of us.

A logical next step for an organization like CEP which opposes “psychologist involvement in any state-supported abuse” is to investigate the allegations of TIs and expose and oppose the a priori “diagnoses” of all TIs as psychotics. This focus may seem arbitrary or misleading since as stated, state-supported abuse is the norm in the mental health professions, but it has its own logic. Robert Whitaker and dissident professionals who have written for Mad in America oppose involuntary psychiatric drugging — another state-assisted abuse — but they would undoubtedly have no success in getting any professional body to publicly oppose involuntary drugging. Tina Minkowitz Esq., lawyer and psychiatric survivor, did however succeed in persuading the UN Committee on the Rights of Persons with Disabilities to assert forced treatment as a human rights abuse. (However UN bodies have little effect in the United States.) The CEP agenda must be guided by what is possible, and practical — and by the orientation of their own organization.

While treatment with brain-damaging drugs is the norm in the mental health system, overt torture is still regarded by most APA members with disdain — after all, it has no medical rationalization. Therefore it is possible that CEP could persuade members of the APA to oppose the routine labeling of TIs — without any investigation — as “psychotic.” (As I have shown, this diagnosis is “justified” by invalid studies.) An APA resolution of this kind would be publicized by the mainstream media, and would undermine the psychiatric metanarrative. Short of this, The New York Times and the mainstream media will continue to defer to Psychiatry and describe all TIs as non-compliant psychotics. Furthermore, while the corporate Press will continue to propagate the psychiatric metanarrative, it is time for journalists who have opposed US torture at Guantanamo and elsewhere, to expose no-touch torture on TIs and the complicity of mental health professionals in covering up these human rights abuses.

The therapeutic state fueled now by pharmaceutical industry grows without constraints while the Deep State operates without Congressional or public oversight. The development of a totalitarian regime — nominally a constitutional republic — in which human rights and the constitutional right to liberty are routinely trampled upon is today an ominous prospect in America. The prevention of such a development is now dependent upon the willingness of small minorities of individuals who are inspired by transcendental ethical ideals to mobilize larger groups to oppose the human rights abuses that are committed by the Deep State and by the mental health system and disguised and justified as “medical” treatments for an ever increasing number of covert “psychotics.”

 

Back to Top

***

This article may be re-published or re-posted in full or part, with attribution and linkback, by granted permission of the author. Please share widely.

Not long ago, in June 2016, The New York Times published a piece by Mike McPhate, titled “United States of Paranoia: They See Gangs of Stalkers,” purporting to offer an unbiased journalistic exploration of the subject of “Targeted Individuals.” This piece garnered quite some attention and consternation from among the ranks of those actually being targeted, surveiled, and assaulted today with EMF/sonic/scalar weapons–as well as those educated, informed Americans who are well-aware that such high-tech surveillance, targeting, and assault is indeed occurring–and was covered here earlier, in response, as well as here, in reportage of a key interviewee, Dr. Robert Duncan’s response.

Now Dr. Seth Farber, a deeply insightful psychologist, psychotherapist, scholar, and author steps forward to address the glaring omissions, elisions, deceptions, and inadequacies of Mr. McPhate’s article, pointing up the hollowness of its claim to objectivity, and offering a comprehensive discursive response that considers the diverse aspects of contemporary psychiatry, contemporary surveillance, historic non-consensual human experimentation, historic covert Intelligence operations, whistleblower testimony, classified military research, neuroweaponry, and the increasingly-evident hand of the “Deep State” which bear on this issue. I am pleased to publish this tremendous tour de force by Dr. Farber, honored that my words are included in it, and highly recommend that every single psychiatrist, psychologist, medical professional, and journalist in the USA and worldwide read it, closely and completely, to fully understand the extreme nature of Targeting in our midst today, as well as the unethical, colluding role played by psychiatrists and co-opted Media, in protecting it.

ayt-problems-with-psychiatristsaIn Dr. Farber’s words: The development of a totalitarian regime—nominally a constitutional republic—in which human rights and the constitutional right to liberty are routinely trampled upon is today an ominous prospect in America.” The prevention of such a development,” he emphasizes, is now dependent upon the willingness of small minorities of individuals who are inspired by transcendental ethical ideals to mobilize larger groups to oppose the human rights abuses that are committed by the Deep State and by the mental health system… I hope with all my heart that this article will be the harbinger of such profoundly-needed change. — Ramola D, December 2016

***

Dr. Seth Farber, Ph.D, is an author, psychotherapist, and an editor of The Journal of Mind and Behavior –he completed his doctorate in psychology at California Institute of Integral Studies in 1984. His work has been influenced by such renowned dissident psychiatrists as the late Thomas Szasz, M.D. who wrote the Foreword to Farber’s first book, Madness, Heresy and the Rumor of Angels: The Revolt against the Mental Health System (1993). See his books and email address at http://www.sethHfarber.com.

The Psychiatric Metanarrative, Targeted Individuals, and the Deep State: A Response to The New York Times

by Seth H. Farber, Ph.D

Introduction
The Corporate Media and Psychiatry: Veiling the Human Rights Violations of the Deep State
Advancing the Psychiatric Metanarrative, Neutralizing Deep State Critics
The Psychiatric Fantasy System and the Battle Against Non-Conformity
The Psychiatric Pharmaceutical Industrial Complex
The Deep State on Trial
The CIA Assassination of Its Own Agent — Protecting Whose Security?
Whistleblowers Post 9/11
TIs and No-Touch Torture
Neuroweaponry and Classified Military Research
Discussion of the New York Times Article About TIs Based on the Psychiatric Metanarrative
The CEP and the Power of the Ethically Guided Minority

Introduction

As a dissident psychologist-therapist and critic of the mental health system, I hope the Mike McPhate article in The New York Times will open the eyes of targeted individuals (“TIs”) and other supporters of constitutional rights, to the fraudulent nature of the mental health professions (“United States of Paranoia: They See Gangs of Stalkers,” June 11, 2016). Most TIs already know that if they are mentioned at all by the mainstream (i.e., corporate) press, it is to be ridiculed as “conspiracy theorists,” or dismissed as plain psychotics. The term “TI” refers to an individual who is a victim of organized group stalking and non-consensual harassment or experimentation with the use of advanced neuro-biological weaponry–these activities are believed to be initiated by Intelligence organizations. Ramola D (Dharmaraj), an award winning fiction-writer and poet, former English professor and social activist who became a TI in 2013, now an independent journalist, writes that the source of the targeting is “joint Military/Intel/Justice/Academic institutions.” (The Everyday Concerned Citizen, Human Rights, Accessed July 2016). Mental health professionals with rare exceptions believe TIs are paranoid psychotics who are not “targeted” by anyone.

Back to Top

The Corporate Media and Psychiatry: Veiling the Human Rights Violations of the Deep State

McPhate’s article exemplifies the collusion of the mainstream (corporate) media with Psychiatry, thus veiling (unwittingly, at this locus near the bottom of the hierarchy of power) the operations of the Deep State. I use “Psychiatry” as a synecdoche to denote the mental health system with its panoply of psychologists, social workers and various mental health professionals and workers. I use it also to denote the entire psychiatric-pharmaceutical industrial complex since the mental health system is oriented toward pushing toxic drugs (‘prescribing medications”)– and is financed largely by the multi-billion dollar pharmaceutical industry.

McPhate’s article in The New York Times is a chilling example of journalists’ willingness to abdicate their power of critical thought and leave the determination of what is “reality” in the hands of the secular priesthood which reigns today in the name of psychiatry –– although it is almost certain that had McPhate seriously discussed the Deep State, his article, as mentioned, would not have been printed. In McPhate’s article the pretense of journalistic “balance” is virtually abandoned. Instead we hear only one authoritative voice –- that of the psychiatrist, the mental health professional. (A month later The New York Times published another article that also deferred to the psychiatric metanarrative, “The Baton Rouge Gunman and ‘Targeted Individuals,’” July 19, 2016, accessed October, 2016.) Although journalists defer habitually (i.e., without deliberation) to the “expertise” of psychiatrists, the editorial board and publishers of the corporate newspapers like The New York Times have obviously deliberately decided not to print articles that discuss the operations or even the existence of targeting by “the Deep State.” Thus it is not surprising that McPhate wrote an article that would not have threatened any of the vested interests discussed below.

Peter Dale Scott, Professor Emeritus at the University of California, is most often associated with the esoteric and little known but increasingly publicized concept of the Deep State. It is the explicit or implicit root metaphor that is at the basis of the TI metanarrative, as well as the metanarrative of “9/11 Truthers,” critics of the official government account of the attacks on 9/11. The TI metanarrative is complex and has given rise to too many variations among its users. Hopefully the discussion here will provide enough background to give readers a rudimentary sense of the TI metanarrative and its understanding of the growing encroachment of the Deep State into the lives of ordinary Americans.

Scott describes the Deep State as

“a parallel secret government, organized by the intelligence and security apparatus, financed by drugs [and other sources], and engaging in illicit violence, to protect the status and interests of the military against threats from intellectuals, religious groups, and occasionally the constitutional government.” (Voltaire Network interview with Scott, April 6, 2011, accessed 2016.)

I would add that it protects not just military interests but corporate and law enforcement interests as well, and that it is largely unaffected by public opinion or elections and operates autonomously beyond the reach of the law, behind the structure of the legislative, judicial, and executive branches of government, influencing the operations of these branches and maintaining social control in societies that are nominally democratic. Ironically, although targeting maintains social control by creating an atmosphere of fear, it also, presumably inadvertently, transforms many of those targeted individuals who are not political activists (the majority of TIs) into political activists and critics of the Deep State and its anti-democratic functions.

Ramola D, an eloquent spokesperson for the TI narrative, tersely and succinctly conveys in a few words the extent of targeting today:

“All over the US today, and indeed the world, people are being nonconsensually rolled into covert programs of 24/7 physical assault, torture, and slow-kill assassination by EMR microwave/radio/sonic neuroweapons, also called Directed Energy Weapons or Non Lethal Weapons; 24/7 remote access, manipulation, and assault of their brains and central nervous systems; and 24/7 “full spectrum surveillance” involving overt community surveillance, concealed electronic monitoring, and public/community stalking, accompanied by discrediting and social ostracism by defamation and slander campaigns, and in-community harassment and PsyOps projects (more on all this below & in succeeding posts).” (The Everyday Concerned Citizen, 2015: “Targeted Individuals” are Non-Consensual Subjects in Criminal, Clandestine, Classified “Top Secret” MKULTRA-Extended Mind & Behavior Control/Torture Experimentation by Joint Military/Intel/Justice/Academic Institutions, as well as Targets of COINTELPRO and Electronic Warfare.)

But despite its prevalence, targeting amazingly remains largely “in the dark” to those who are not participants or victims. Wikispooks notes,

“In contrast to overtly authoritarian rule, deep states must operate more or less secretly, like terrorist groups, so preserving secrecy is a high priority. Control of the commercially-controlled media is essential to the effective preservation of secrecy needed for the deep state to work effectively.” (Accessed 2016 at Wikispooks/Deep State)

Psychiatry also plays a critical role in maintaining secrecy — in veiling the operations of the Deep State — although I will argue here that it does this even though the majority of mental health professionals are completely unaware of the existence of the Deep State. It is able to play this function unwittingly because the profoundly conformist nature of Psychiatry leads it to define any deviation from the norm as pathology — including any belief in the existence of a shadow government or Deep State (such a belief is disparaged as “conspiracy theory”), let alone being a victim of this entity (which is deemed “delusional”).

This is not to deny that a small but influential group of leading figures and institutions in Psychiatry have, from the establishment of the CIA to date, consciously (and secretively) collaborated with non-consensual and thus illegal experiments carried out by the CIA and other intelligence agencies, and psychologists with the sanction of the American Psychological Association: APA psychologists recently played a role in designing torture of Guantanamo detainees. (In fact leaders of both APAs have long had a close relationship with the CIA.)

This led to a backlash by membership of the American Psychological Association—organized by a few principled psychologists—which voted in 2008 to prohibit psychologists from working in national security settings, against the opposition of the APA leadership (Roy Eidelson, 2013, “APA Fiddles While Psychology Burns,“ in Psychology Today, August 5, 2013, accessed November, 2016).

(The activities of the infamous psychiatrist Ewan Cameron who reduced hundreds of patients to a vegetable-like state through intensive electroshock, funded by the CIA and the Canadian government, set a precedent followed by other mental health professionals who collaborated with the Deep State in designing and implementing programs of torture, used for various purposes. (See Colin Ross, 2006, The CIA Doctors, Richardson, Texas: Manitou).

But the attitude of mental health professionals to “mental patients” has been losing its soft edge of seemingly benign paternalism, and becoming increasingly punitive, although still wrapped in terminology of medical care. Psychiatry has undergone radical changes since the early 1960s when the state mental hospitals began to be emptied and the project of “deinstitutionalization” was announced. The state hospital population shrunk nationwide from over half a million in the late 1950s to 40,000 today. The ideal, if not the reality, was progressive–to reintegrate the “mentally ill” into the community. What took place was “transinstitutionalization” (see Thomas Szasz, 1998, Cruel Compassion, NY: Syracuse University Press): Patients were placed into small scale group homes and (originally) cheap hotels where they were given stupefying “anti-psychotic medication” and isolated from the community. Yet there were legal safeguards that were designed to protect arbitrary confinement and forced drugging of patients.

But the merger of psychiatry with the pharmaceutical industry created a new imperative — to confine ever more patients, to induct ever more persons into the mental health system, and to force psychiatric drugs on an ever increasing number of the “mentally ill.” Furthermore, as society has morphed into a national security state, so the mental health system has become more repressive and the legal safeguards of patients’ right to liberty have been razed. In the 1990s, states enacted involuntary outpatient commitment laws — the main purpose of these laws was to force “non-compliant” former mental patients to take neuro-toxic “anti-psychotic” drugs on an outpatient basis (see below). (The drugs in a “depot” form were injected into the patient’s body where it would be released gradually over the month.) In the psychiatric metanarrative, non-compliance is treated both as pathology and as misbehavior, as a sign that the patient is both mad and bad.

Recently, although the Murphy Bill (HR 2646, which passed the House in 2015) met resistance in the Senate, some of its worst provisions were incorporated into HR 34, the 21st Century Cures Act – a boondoggle for the pharmaceutical industry which lowers FDA safety standards (see Dr. Mercola, July 13, 2016, 21st-Century Cures or Corruption?) — which passed overwhelmingly in the Senate on December 7, 2016. This revised bill incorporates many of the worst provisions of the Murphy bill, including the one at the top of Psychiatry’s wish-list: The ability to force psychiatric treatment (psychiatric drugs) on anyone psychiatrists deem too mentally ill to realize drugs are “good” for them. In other words, a history of violence is no longer a criterion for forcing toxic drugs on “non-compliant” patients. Psychiatry will no doubt continue to push for those provisions not included in the new bill.

Patients’ rights activist Lauren Tenney, Ph.D. stated about the bill,

“It is urgent that people realize that no child will grow up without psychiatric evaluation. All people will become, in a generation or two, acclimated to being psychiatrized; psychiatry and its arms of drugs and institutions will become even more standard [than it is now] in our society.” (Mad in America, Nov 29, 2016, “Warning: A Psychiatric tsuNAMI is Upon U.S.”/From Katherine Hine–Warning, the US govt is trying to legalize forced psych drugging!)

Today in states across the country new hospitals “are being built in droves,” as Janet Phelan puts it. (See “Still Crazy After All These Years: Psychiatric Lockdown Returns to the US” in Activist Post, Oct 5, 2016, accessed November, 2016.) Sharon Cretsinger, social worker and director of Kent Empowerment Center, noted, about the Murphy Bill, that “the most frightening parts of [the Murphy Bill] are the severe limitations placed on PAIMI advocates (Protection and Advocacy for Individuals with Mental Illness) who are specifically prohibited from discussing with “individuals who lack insight into their condition” their right to refuse medication or act “against the wishes of their caregivers.” (Ibid)

PAIMI, an agency “which was specifically set up to address the needs and questions of individuals in treatment,” is prevented from advocating for patients, except in cases of “abuse and neglect.” The limits placed on advocates, Cretsinger says, “shows clearly that Murphy’s bill does not (want) anyone refusing treatment [‘medication’], or even talking about refusing treatment.” The Bill increases funding for involuntary out-patient commitment and for Assertive Community Treatment. Phelan describes ACT, “This enables teams of mental health workers to troll the streets, looking for homeless or other individuals to ‘treat’ in situ.” Of course typically ACT leads to involuntary treatment.

The bill also authorizes grants for “programs for infants and children at significant risk of developing, showing early signs of, or having been diagnosed with mental illness including serious emotional disturbance.” Those eligible for these services are defined as “a child from birth to not more than 5 years of age.”

This is an obvious effort to “funnel” babies into treatment with powerful psychotropic drugs–and create life-long (albeit a shortened life) customers for the pharmaceutical industry. Already there are 8 million children on psychotropic drugs. But, heavily lobbied by the drug industry, our representatives have decided to get more children hooked on drugs–decided to sacrifice babies on the altar of Mammon.

This is the stream of history into which TIs have entered, one which has seen a political battle against psychiatric coercion by patients themselves, beginning in the 1970s with the formation of the first “mental patients’ liberation” organizations. (For a history from 1960 to 2012, see Farber, 2012, The Spiritual Gift of Madness:The Failure of Psychiatry and the Rise of the Mad Pride Movement, Rochester, Vermont: Inner Traditions.) By 2016, the website Mad in America was booming-–with tens of thousands of readers every week, including many psychiatric survivors–– readers participate in discussions beneath the articles. But as dissent has flourished on the Internet, the movement against psychiatric coercion has shriveled in the “real” world. Patients were making progress but the tide began to reverse in the 1990s, and thereafter. The Murphy Bill, a product of post-9/11 America, represents a new, more pernicious, more repressive phase in the social control of mental patients. It mirrors the militarization of the police. (See Randy Balko, author of The Rise of the Warrior Cop , quoted at US Police Have Killed Over 5000 Civilians Since 9/11, MintPress News, accessed October, 2016.)

To what degree it will lead to deliberate collaboration of psychiatry with the military, law enforcement, and/or various agencies of the Deep State is unpredictable, although going full speed ahead on such a course risks the danger of polarization among mental health professionals who for the most part see themselves as “medical specialists” on a par with cardiologists and do not like to think of themselves as dirty cops. The backlash of APA membership’s against its leadership’s participation in scarcely veiled torture is indicative. (See James Risen, 2015, The New York Times, August 7, 2015, “Psychologists Approve Ban on Role in National Security Interrogations“.) At the top of the hierarchy of professionals we can infer that status-conscious professionals will be pleased, as always, to collaborate secretly with high status officials in Deep State agencies. The promulgation of the new psychiatric metanarrative will enable the majority of mental health professionals to tacitly co-operate with the Deep State with more extensive and more punitive modes of social control–while preserving their identity as medical helpers by defining TIs as just another category of “non-compliant psychotics”–-and with more punitive measures as a necessary response to the growing epidemic of mental illness and the emergence of more “troubling” (to use McPhate’s word), more “treatment-resistant” (a common professional term) manifestations of “psychosis.”

 

Back to Top

Advancing the Psychiatric Metanarrative, Neutralizing Deep State Critics

In fact McPhate’s article — strategically placed in The New York Times, the renowned bastion of (corporate) liberal journalism — helps to craft and popularize the emerging psychiatric metanarrative about TIs, which we will analyze below. (A metanarrative is a grand narrative, or theory that tries to give a coherent totalizing account to a variety of historical events and a multitude of human experiences.) As opposed to the psychiatric metanarrative, a TI metanarrative is also emerging and being used as a tool by TIs. While the narrative has a number of variations depending on the perspective of the individual theorist (whether a TI or not), it has a basic skeletal structure which has been shaped by the experiences and theories of many TIs and by the experiences and political theories of an increasing number of technical experts and whistle-blowers -– former employees of the CIA, NSA, and other Intelligence or military organizations.

These former employees are almost always highly educated and among the most intelligent strata of society, and include computer experts, highly sophisticated scientists (from electrical engineers to physicists) and spies. Intelligence agencies recruit the best and the brightest -– and increasing numbers of these persons are possessed by a keen conscience. Thus they find themselves morally unable to perform the tasks they are assigned or to sanction what they know is being done in the name of protecting national security.

If they are asked why they left the CIA or NSA, they invariably give the same answer. From William Binney who worked for the NSA for over 30 years before he resigned in 2001 to Edward Snowden, these persons will tell you with patriotic fervor that they took an oath, not to uphold the government or the NSA but to uphold the US Constitution. In other words these whistle-blowers argue that our actual government today as influenced by the agencies of the Deep State is in conflict with constitutional democracy as conceived by our founding fathers. Edward Snowden has given words and a face to today’s political dissident/whistle-blower in the US, persecuted or in exile ostensibly for giving information to the enemy, but in reality for exposing operations of the State to American citizens. (Chelsea or Bradley Manning did not receive equivalent public exposure -– primarily because she was imprisoned and silenced before she could speak to the Press.)

If McPhate even read any of the accounts by critics of the Deep State (he demonstrates no familiarity with their disclosures), he must have disregarded them, because the psychiatric metanarrative is presented in his article as the truth and the TI metanarrative is viewed through the prism of the psychiatric metanarrative as nothing more than a delusional symptom of the paranoid schizophrenic’s diseased mind. When McPhate describes TIs as unequivocally psychotic, he is ignoring or discounting the accounts of some of the smartest former employees of Intelligence, including those who designed the technology used for surveillance and control, and including those experts he interviewed. Robert Duncan, a whistle-blower and former CIA employee who helped to develop the cybernetic weapons that to his dismay are being used on innocent Americans, was interviewed and then virtually ignored (see below) by McPhate.

McPhate’s article is based uncritically on the psychiatric metanarrative that journalists for the corporate press are trying to make the official metanarrative: All TIs are mentally ill persons–they are not individuals who are victims of group-stalking and various forms of non-consensual experimentation with neuro-weaponry. (McPhate implies that not all Tis are mentally ill but seems to consider that fact irrelevant to his discussion.) They are psychotics who come together with other psychotics and reinforce each other’s delusions — thus they phobically avoid consulting mental health professionals to get the professional help they need.

The psychiatrist is the socially sanctioned arbiter of what is real (for most persons in secular society), and the TI’s metanarrative with its references to historical events and accounts by contemporary whistle-blowers and its claims about the power of the (secretive) Deep State is not even recounted except very briefly and elliptically by the journalist — ostensibly because the psychiatric authority has determined it provides no cues to reality and it will only mislead readers. Psychiatry’s business is the construction and reproduction of “reality” — psychiatry provides the stamp of authority for the official reality and works with journalists to propagate the new metanarrative about TIs. By failing to interrogate power, journalists are betraying their vocation as the 4th estate, which historically held private and government institutions accountable to democratic ideals and exposed potential totalitarian and plutocratic threats to democracy. (Today such journalism can be found in books and in Internet magazines, but only rarely in the mainstream Press.)

Most persons including TIs assume that the psychiatric diagnostic system is legitimate. This is why TIs often claim they were “misdiagnosed.” They assume that there are correct diagnoses, free of bias, just as in other fields of medicine. Many TIs think if they find an honest psychiatrist they will be cleared, legitimized, given a “correct” diagnosis, not realizing that the psychodiagnostic system itself is a fantasy, a delusion! They don’t understand that every mental health diagnosis is a misdiagnosis, that the system of psychodiagnosis is nothing but a collective fantasy -– in psychiatric terms, it is a consensually validated (financially remunerative) delusional system.

For example, TIs who have gone to the mental health system have typically been diagnosed as “schizophrenic,” “paranoid,” and with “delusional disorder.” All of these diagnoses imply the TI is hearing voices that do not exist, or imagining people are stalking her or manipulating her brain with neuro-weaponry/or attacking her body with remote-influencing technologies. In the psychiatric metanarrative on TIs’, the TI is so overwhelmed by a paranoid distrust of people in general that she fantasizes the government or the CIA or other malevolent forces are persecuting her.

Yet many TIs optimistically and/or naively think they can change their psychiatrist’s mind by presenting documentary evidence of the existence of these Deep State operations. What they do not understand is psychiatrists and other mental health professionals are indoctrinated to regard any behavior or allegations that deviate from the social norm as pathological. This is not surprising considering the historical function of Psychiatry was the control of deviants, of poor people, of mad people, the preservation of the status quo. (Since the 1980s, its function has also been to market drugs for its pharmaceutical partners.) The purpose of institutional “mental health” was not to rehabilitate people, to help them heal from their wounds or to promote progressive social change. (Some people were helped in unusual instances by mental health professionals -– this happened far more frequently in the private sector.) But the allegation that the government -– the CIA, the Military — is secretly using bizarre neuro-weaponry (or directed-energy weaponry) against Americans and subjecting them to gang stalking is not something the mental health professional wants to even consider. It is no surprise that in the emerging Psychiatric metanarrative, allegations of Deep State covert operations are construed as symptoms of paranoid delusions.

 

Back to Top

The Psychiatric Fantasy System and the Battle Against Non-Conformity

This is nothing new. Psychiatrists typically react to proponents of radical change by seeking to pathologize them. Braginsky and Braginsky did a series of studies in the early 1970s published in their book Mainstream Psychology:A Critique (see discussion in Sarbin, T. And Mancuso, J., Medical Diagnosis or Moral Verdict, 1980, NY; Pergamon Press). Psychiatrists watched an interview between a doctor and a pseudo-patient. In the first segment, the patients reported irritability, poor sleep, etc. In the second and third segment segments, they expressed either middle of the road or New Left views. In the fourth segment, both groups criticized mental health professionals.

Sarbin and Mancuso summarize: “As the New Left radical’s complaints shift from statement about self to statements about society, the patient is regarded as increasingly psychologically disturbed.” The moderate patient’s degree of psychopathology remains stable as he or she expresses anti-New Left sentiments. The judgments of the severity of the pathology of both groups “dramatically increase when they criticize mental health professionals” (Sarbin and Mancuso, 1980, pp.94-5). Even the politically moderate patient who was perceived as only moderately disturbed (despite being presented as a hospitalized mental patient) is diagnosed as very “psychotic” after his attack on the mental health profession.

The experiment was repeated with a different group of psychiatrists with one change: In the 4th segment, both groups make flattering statements about the mental health professionals, e.g. “helpful,” kind,” and “very special” people. The result for Segments 1-3 were the same but after watching Segment 4, the psychiatrists decided the patients were cured (p.95). This is an extreme reaction and one that likely reflected the fact that the psychiatrists did not know the patients’ diagnosis upon admission – the patient unlike in the study below did not feign psychotic symptoms — and (the fact) that the study was conducted during a more tolerant phase of the mental health system in the early 1970s as compared to today.

One would expect that today the patients upon praising mental health professionals would be deemed to be psychotics in remission, as was the case with Rosenhan’s experiment -– conducted during the same period but with patients identified as “schizophrenic.” Athough Rosenhan’s experiment was conducted at the same time, and the patients were cooperative, they did not go so far as to flatter the doctors. Furthermore psychiatrists in the Braginsky and Braginnsky experiment were not told the pseudo-patients’ original diagnosis was “schizophrenia”––since they did not complain of voices or delusions, they could as easily have been hospitalized for depression. Today psychiatry is more aggressive than in the early 1970s and even “normal” patients are regarded as mentally ill.

Surprisingly few people, even mental health professionals, know about the classic Rosenhan experiment; it created an explosion of controversy within the mental health field at the time,it appeared, although it never entered the public imagination. Rosenhan, a psychologist, and 7 mentally healthy associates–all went to emergency rooms of local hospitals and feigned they were having auditory hallucinations. The pseudo-patients included a psychology graduate student in his twenties, three psychologists, a pediatrician, a psychiatrist, a painter, and a housewife. Once admitted they acted completely normally-–but none of the staff suspected they were sane. Significantly, quite a few patients made comments to the pseudo-patients like, “You’re not really crazy.”

They were interviewed by psychiatrists or psychologists who wrote evaluations of the patients and interpreted all their present behavior as evidence of their schizophrenia, and claimed to discover the roots of their alleged schizophrenia in their early childhood experiences. (At the time of this experiment Psychiatry was still based on the psychoanalytic dogma that pathology was caused by incidents in early childhood). Rosenhan noted, “Once a person is designated abnormal all his other behaviors and characteristics are colored by that label. Indeed that label is so powerful that many of the pseudo-patients’ normal behaviors were overlooked entirely or profoundly misinterpreted.” (Accessed 2016 at isites.Harvard.edu: On Being Sane in Insane Places, by David L. Rosenhan (pdf))

It took most of the pseudo-patients weeks to obtain release–in order to do so, all had to agree to take psychiatric drugs (which they later flushed down the toilet–no longer possible) and agree with the psychiatrists that they were mentally ill. All were finally released in times ranging from 7 to 52 days with the diagnosis of “schizophrenia in remission.” Rosenhan noted in an interview many years later, “I told friends, I told my family: ‘I can get out when I can get out. That’s all. I’ll be there for a couple of days and I’ll get out.’ Nobody knew I’d be there for two months … The only way out was to point out that they’re [the psychiatrists] correct. They had said I was insane, [I told them] ‘I am insane; but I am getting better.’ That was an affirmation of their view of me.” (Accessed 2016 at Wikipedia/Rosenhan Experiment.) In other words, to get the psychiatrist’s approval, the patient must affirm the psychiatrist’s view of the patient. For the TI today, this would mean feigning acknowledgment of the truth of the psychiatric metanarrative about Tis-–that they were delusional.

The reason professionals could not tell the clients had not really had “psychotic” breaks (were not “insane”) is because “mental illness” is a projection of the psychiatrist– the projection is triggered by a few cues that do not necessarily include the symptoms of “schizophrenia.” Knowing the patient has the diagnosis itself is enough to trigger the projection — which is a major reason (in addition to the debilitating effects of the “meds”) — why “schizophrenia” (an emotional crisis) becomes chronic once the patient becomes inducted into the mental health system: She is regarded as incurably ill and these expectations become a self-fulfilling prophecy. As holistic physician Gary Kohls put it, “The truth is that people diagnosed as ‘mentally ill’ for life are often simply those unfortunates who have found themselves in acute or chronic states of potentially reversible crises or temporary ‘overwhelm’ due to any number of preventable, treatable, and even curable situations.” (“Kris Kristofferson’s Dramatic Cure of his “Incurable” Alzheimer’s Disease/Another Iatrogenic Illness Unveiled” by Dr. Gary G. Kohls, on GlobalResearch.ca, accessed September, 2016.)­

Since psychiatry is an agency of surveillance and control, it views with apprehension any patient who resists, or critiques its power. In the Braginsky and Braginsky experiment, a radical critique of society was viewed as a sign of pathology. Mental health professionals regard anyone who comes for help as mentally ill to some degree. If the patients imply that there is something wrong with the world then the psychiatrist qua social control agent is likely to regard them as paranoid — in the psychiatrists’ world view, society is “natural,” normative, even if it needs a little patching up, and “maladjustment” is a symptom of “pathology.”

Radical psychiatrist R. D. Laing saw it very differently: This reification of an insane world was itself a symptom of insanity, and “schizophrenics” were invalidated because they were beginning to wake up from the social fantasy. Laing had reversed the premise of the psychiatric metanarrative by defining adjustment as pathological, “Social adjustment to a dysfunctional society may be very dangerous. The perfectly adjusted bomber pilot may be a greater threat to species survival than the hospitalized schizophrenic deluded that the Bomb is inside him.” (R. D. Laing, 1967, The Politics of Experience, New York: Pantheon Books, p120). This was written during the height of the nuclear weapons race — and Laing saw in the “delusions” of the mad, a metaphorical critique of society and a sign of a resistance to a conformity that threatened the survival of the species. In accord with Laing’s critique, but before Laing had developed it, Martin Luther King Jr. stated, “The world will be saved by the creatively maladjusted.” Today many of the creatively maladjusted come from the ranks of those most directly attacked by the Deep State. And they too, like the mad, are perceived as a threat to the psychiatric guardians of the status quo.

But this kind of threat is easily deflected by redefining it as a medical problem, as pathology. TIs are hardly the first to be pathologized. The medicalization of dissidence and deviance is the real specialization of the psychiatric profession, as the late Thomas Szasz, dissident psychiatrist, argued in book after book. Mental illness is a “myth,” as Szasz said, a misleading trope––the entire system is based on a spurious metanarrative that has deceived the American public for well over a century. Mental health professions are comprised of pretend doctors treating non-existent illnesses. There are of course therapists who help people but they are the minority — almost all in the private sector — and for the most part inaccessible to those without money. Subsuming anyone’s life under a pseudo- medical “diagnosis” obscures their abilities, simplifies their life story, and leads the professional to prescribe a “medical” solution (e.g., stupefying psychiatric drugs) for a non-medical problem, for what Szasz aptly called “problems in living.”

Each person’s unique life story can only be understood when she is grasped in her full individuality including both her strengths and her weaknesses, her virtues and her bad habits. Only a psychotherapist who understands this can be helpful. A therapist who fails to see a client’s strengths will underestimate her ability to recover from trauma. The therapist who seeks to promote conformity will not be able to help the troubled oddball become a creatively maladjusted social change agent. But this hardly matters if the goal of the mental health system is not to help people but to maintain social control.

It is revealing that before 1973 homosexuality was viewed as a mental disorder but as a result of agitation and lobbying by homosexual psychiatrists the APA decided by a close vote that homosexuality was no longer a disorder. Taking into account the conformist orientation of the mental health system — as illustrated in the last few paragraphs — we realize that the diagnoses are based upon values that can always be contested. They are not based on biological facts like real medical diagnoses. In the first place “mental illness” is not an objective biological fact–there are no biological referents to which the construct corresponds. This is why psychiatrists, in order to maintain their facade of legitimacy substitute reliability for validity.

“Reliability” is a scientific term that refers to agreement — in the above case, the agreement among mental health professionals, almost always with financial ties to the pharmaceutical industry — who invent the psychiatric diagnoses, whereas validity refers to a correspondence to reality. (Postmodernists may quibble, but for now I will leave such ontological qualifications for another time.) This is a blatant epistemological error. Because a hundred psychiatrists agree someone is “seriously ill,” and delusional does not mean that person is delusional. The witch prickers would usually agree which suspects were witches — but women do not make pacts or have sexual relations with the Devil (the definition of a witch), so in actuality there were no witches. These highly educated clergymen, the intellectual elite of their era, were wrong. The term “witch” was reliable but invalid, it did not correspond to any social reality other than the shared fantasy of the witch-prickers. Today the term “psychotic” tells us little about the person so described and a lot — as we see — about the shared fantasies of psychiatrists..

Cardiologists do not determine diseases by voting. Mental health professionals, as seen, have a tendency to rate those persons who resist or reject or criticize their own authority as mentally ill. They are also wary of those who make trenchant criticisms of society. It is therefore not surprising that psychiatrists regard TIs as delusional, as psychotic, just as in the 1960s, they tended to view New Leftists as mentally ill. Without even examining the Deep State literature, psychiatrists have promulgated a metanarrative that views them all as delusional, as schizophrenics — as non-compliant psychotics who refuse to take their ‘meds” or accept that they are mentally ill. Mental health professionals have been in conflict with “non-compliant” patients since psychotropic drugs were first used in the mid-1950s. This conflict took on a political dimension when the “mental patients’ liberation movement” (now the psychiatric survivors’ movement) originated in the early 1970s.

But what evidence do they present that TIs are all delusional? In McPhate’s article he extensively quotes from psychologist Lorraine Sheridan. She conducted an experiment with psychiatrist David James and coauthored an article titled “Complaints of group stalking (‘gang stalking’): an exploratory study of their nature and impact on complainants” published in The Journal of Forensic Psychiatry and Psychology Vol 26, No 5, 2015. The journal is read “throughout the world” by “psychiatrists, psychologists, criminologists, lawyers, sociologists, nurses, social workers and other legal and medical professionals” who use this journal as “their major forum for penetrating, informed global debate on the latest developments and disputes affecting the practice of forensic psychiatry.” Sheridan and James write, “All cases of reported group-stalking were found likely to be delusional, compared with 3.9% of individually stalked cases.” But they found no such thing. By their own definition, a delusion is “a false belief based on incorrect inference about external reality.” In order to know the belief is likely to be delusional, they have to know about the external reality.

100% of the 128 allegedly group-stalked individuals were determined to be deluded. How? Two clinicians read extensive questionnaires filled out by the subjects and both agreed all of the time that each subject was deluded. But reliability is not validity. It cannot tell us about the external world. Mental health professionals have no “expertise” in determining what is real, although credulous people — like New York Times journalists — think their credentials give them the ability to know if a patient is delusional. But, to know that, one has to know what is real. The claim of Sheridan and James that group stalking does not take place is an un-validated theory about the nature of (social) “reality.” They have made no effort to confirm its validity by examining the reality. .

Sheridan and James claim that all 128 self-identified TIs had 1 or more of three kinds of delusions. The first was of group stalking. They write these are “cases where the resources or elaborate organization required to carry them out made the alleged activities highly improbable.” But probability is not a scientific or quantifiable concept as they use it. Upon what do they base this determination? Upon nothing–it has no force beyond a decree. The subject’s claims that they were subjected to neuro-weaponry, such as “voice to skull” fell, according to the authors, into the category of a delusion based on “impossibility” or “bizarre impossibility.” What about quantum physics, about “spooky action at a distance” (Einstein), entanglement, Bell’s theorem? All impossible according to the scientific paradigm that had reigned for centuries, just like the technology that Sheridan and James dismiss as impossible. These “scientists” are ignoramuses who have learned nothing from the history of science. (Below is evidence that this impossible technology exists.)

If 2 million clinicians instead of 2 agreed that 128 subjects were delusional, it would still prove only that clinicians tend to agree about TIs and about reality. All of the professionals who examined Rosenhan and his compatriots agreed they were insane. But they were not. Their diagnoses were all invalid. The witch-prickers agreed which suspects were witches, but we know now there were no witches — women do not have sex with the Devil. Their diagnoses were wrong. If Sheridan and James really wanted to determine if TIs were delusional, not just write propaganda, they could have hired a private investigator — short of this they could have at least familiarized themselves with the TI metanarrative about group stalking. They could have examined the historical literature on Stasi in former East Germany and the ACLU book (cited below), The Surveillance Industrial Complex.

I do not think the Sheridan and James article is a work of deliberate deception. Rather it is “bullshit.”As Bruce Levine notes, the liar, unlike the bullshitter, knows what the truth is and endeavors to conceal it. “The vast majority of psychiatrists are bullshitters, uncommitted to either facts or fiction…It is not in the bullshitters’ interest to know what is true and what is false, as that knowledge of what is a fact and what is fiction hinders the capacity to use any and all powerful persuasion” — that is, to persuade people their psychiatric theories reflect reality. (See Levine, “Psychiatry’s Current Greatest Controversy: Fraud, Bullsh*t or What? at Mad in America, accessed September, 2016.) That is why these psychiatrists undertake no investigation––not even reading the literature on the Deep State by scholars and whistle-blowers, let alone by TIs. It’s not that they know that TIs are telling the truth, and endeavor to conceal it. As Levine puts it (about a different psychiatric myth), “ Most simply don’t know the truth because they have put little effort in discerning it.” The fact is they don’t really want to know if TIs’ allegations are correct. 

Their purpose is to not to discover the truth –- but to serve the mental health system. To quote Levine again, “The goal of bullshitters is not necessarily to lie about the truth but to persuade their audience of a specific impression so as to advance their agenda.” In this case the agenda — fostering the growth of the mental health system and maintaining social control — is advanced in two ways. First,by pathologizing TIs, mental health professionals are able to induct more clients into the mental health system, and thus to contribute to the growth of the psychiatric-pharmaceutical industrial complex. Second, by defining dissident or subversive ideas as “delusions,” as symptoms of “mental disorders,” they are able to neutralize or invalidate these ideas, suppress their expression and thus maintain social control — enforce the dominant social norms,

These redefinitions serve social control in a very specific way. They allow professionals to define exploitative practices as legitimate medical treatments — from drugging babies to silencing victims of no- touch torture — while maintaining their self-image as doctors, or medical helpers. Thus professionals can bullshit their way through life — by diagnosing babies and TIs as covert psychotics. Psychiatrists have no need to investigate whether TIs’ claims are valid because Sheridan and James and The New York Times have told them that all TIs are delusional. The substitution of reliability for validity, of bullshit for investigation-findings, is a sleight of hand performed in the most prestigious academic journals and newspapers, and propagated in the psychiatric metanarrative.

(This also serves psychiatrists’ own emotional needs by warding off ideas that threaten to disturb their comfortable mainstream views about the world in which we live — thus what is strange and frightening is reduced to the banal, the familiar. )

All the instruments of psychiatry are brought to bear to pressure, to persuade, to force the deviant to conform. In this manner, Psychiatry also unwittingly, and in some prominent cases, deliberately, serves to preserve the invisibility of the operations of the Deep State. That is to say, the Deep State is enabled to hide evidence of its crimes because Psychiatry destroys the credibility of its victims/critics by certifying them as insane. Thus relegated to the lowest social caste, they are now civilly dead. Bearing the stigmata of their diagnoses, their friends, family, and associates no longer attend to the meaning of their words. Their words are treated as “semantic exudates,” as Szasz once said, of their mental illness. They may speak the truth, but no one is listening.

The Psychiatric Pharmaceutical Industrial Complex

The nature of “mental illness” underwent another change starting in the 1980s. The change was not based on discoveries about the patient’s mind or brain. As usual the changes took place in Psychiatry and were projected onto the clients. As a result of Psychiatry’s alliance with the pharmaceutical industry, it redefined mental illness. The psychoanalytic theory that pathology resulted from traumas in early childhood — prevalent for most of the 20th century in the university and the clinic — was replaced by the dogma that it was a brain disorder.

Although Psychiatry could find no evidence of a brain disorder, it claimed if it kept searching eventually it would find the evidence.

Dr Peter Breggin, a psychiatrist and former student of Szasz became a spokesperson for the dissident position from the 1980s to the present. Breggin chronicles that Psychiatry began to undergo a financial crisis in the 1980s when due to rising popularity of psychotherapy starting in the 1960s, clients sought out less expensive therapists without medical degrees. To recover their hegemony and financial advantages, the American Psychiatric Association decided in 1980 to renounce a century-old practice banning, soliciting, or even accepting contributions from the pharmaceutical industry. This was a watershed––the medical model in biological form experienced a resurgence and the Psychiatric-Pharmaceutical-Industrial complex was born. As Peter Breggin wrote,“The floodgates were opened and would grow wider each year…Whatever function APA had ever fulfilled as a professional organization was now superseded by its function as a political advocate for the advancement of psychiatric and pharmaceutical interests.” (Toxic Psychiatry, 1991, New York: St Martin’s Press, p 355.)

Once again Psychiatry proved its understanding of problems in living was based on its own subjective fantasies, defined as reality by the authorities. Although Psychiatry claimed they had suddenly become more scientific and realized mental illnesses were really brain disorders, this transformation of the view of pathology, just like the transformation in 1973 of the view of homosexuality, was caused by changes within Psychiatry — its merger with the pharmaceutical industry — that led to a change in its collective cultural fantasy which it has the power to present to the public as reality.

Let me be clear, I am not denying that there is a relationship between the mind and the body. I am aware that physical stress contributes to emotional problems, and I am aware that emotional problems are reflected in the individual’s body and brain. But none of this justifies importing medical categories, medical “diagnoses” into the realm of human psychology and interpersonal relationships. Physical illnesses are based on biological facts whereas “mental illnesses” are based almost entirely upon psychiatric fantasies about patients. Psychodiagnosis works as social control but not as medicine or therapy. Because psychiatric diagnoses are derogatory evaluations about clients’ minds, they undermine clients’ self-confidence and thus become self-fulfilling prophecies. .

Even the leading establishment figures in Psychiatry now admit that psychiatric diagnoses are purely subjective, admit there is no evidence of any “chemical imbalance” — even as they try to hold on to “the medical model” — what I call medicalism — even as they continue the centuries’ long search for “defects” in the brains of the “mentally ill.” Thus Thomas Insel, the Director of the National Institute of Mental Health wrote in 2013 on the eve of the publication of the long-awaited 5th edition of the psychiatric Bible, The Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (the first edition was published in 1952, the DSM-IV was published in 1994, and the revised edition of DSM-IV was published in 2000) that the weakness of the manual was “ its lack of validity.” “Unlike our definitions of ischemic heart disease, lymphoma, or AIDS, the DSM diagnoses are based on a consensus about clusters of clinical symptoms, not any objective laboratory measure.” (See “The NIMH Withdraws Support for DSM-5Psychology Today, May, 2013. Accessed 2016.)

Even the Chairman of the Committee, Allen Frances, which composed the 4th edition of the DSM, had a change of heart and became a critic of the DSM — he admitted diagnoses were subjective. “There are no objective tests in psychiatry that say definitively that someone does or does not have a mental disorder.” (Mental Disorders: The Facts Behind the Marketing Campaign/CCHR, Accessed 2013.) His book Saving Normal argues that the DSM-5 classifies all kinds of normal behaviors as mental illnesses. (As indicated by the title, Frances wanted to restrict the application of the medical model in the helping professions, not to eliminate it.) For example, mourning the death of a parent or spouse or one’s partner for more than 2 weeks is interpreted by the DSM-5 (the DSM-IV required more than 2 months of grieving for the person to be deemed mentally ill) as a symptom of a “clinical depression,” not as a natural response to loss. The change reflects the increased symbiosis of psychiatric and drug companies. Defining mourning as a clinical depression enables the drug companies to significantly increase their markets, “If, for two weeks after losing the love of your life, you have sadness, loss of interest, trouble sleeping and eating and less energy, the DSM-5 now allows a drug salesman to teach the doctor that this is major depressive disorder and requires a pill,” Frances said. (Julie Deardorff, “Defining the Subtleties of Grief,” Chicago Tribune, March 5, 2014.)

The prototypical act of defiance of the psychiatric-pharmaceutical complex is refusing to take one’s “meds.” I began graduate school in the late 1970s. Since that time the canard has become received wisdom in society: patients who don’t take their “meds” have a resistance to getting well. This canard overlooks the sickening “side effects” of psychiatric drugs. It is a myth that these drugs are designed to cure or correct the “chemical imbalances” of mental disorders. The drugs have a sedating effect on all persons (as well as numerous unpleasant side effects) — well-suited for managing “mental patients” in a state hospital (where they were all warehoused until “deinstitutionalization” in the 1960s). Those who take these drugs for more than 2 years tend to develop brain damage that often mimics the symptoms of “psychosis” and makes a full recovery from “psychosis” almost impossible.

Author and award-winning medical journalist Robert Whitaker writes, “I think science is telling us that antipsychotics, on the whole, worsen long-term outcomes, even when prescribed for ‘clear cut psychiatric disorders,’ and thus, if psychiatry wants to develop evidence-based protocols, it needs to figure out how to minimize their long-term use. And that is a belief that directly challenges the conventional wisdom…” (See for example Robert Whitaker’s “evidence based” discussion of his investigation in his reply to psychiatrist Allen Frances at PeteEarley.com, “Robert Whitaker Explains His Research After Being Pigeonholed as Anti-Medication,” see also Whitaker, Anatomy of an Epidemic.)

Those who resist Psychiatry’s drugs (or ministrations) are “non-compliant” or “treatment resistant” patients — they arouse the anger and contempt of mental health professionals. The fact that psychiatric treatment is unsuccessful with “schizophrenics” — and causes severe health problems does not prompt a reevaluation of their treatments because the goal of the public mental health system is maintaining social control, and selling psychiatric drugs. The fusion of mental health with the pharmaceutical industry makes change virtually impossible — there is too much to lose.

Thomas Szasz believed that pseudo-medical explanations of problems in living had no objective referent, that “mental illness” was a myth, that the medical procedures of Psychiatry were mere ceremonies intended to make psychiatrists look like real doctors — and there is a plethora of ceremonies and narrative designed to mystify clients and the public. Thus he wrote in Insanity: The Idea and Its Consequences, “Explanations [of mental illness] in 20th century have run into the 100s if not thousands. Methods are equally numerous. Seeing through the riddle of mental illness is not so much like seeing the emperor is naked but rather more like realizing that the emperor’s wardrobe is rich and dazzling beyond the dreams even of emperors but that there is no emperor.” (Szasz, 1997, NY: Syracuse University Press.)

 

Back to Top

The Deep State on Trial

Let us first imagine we are putting the Deep State on trial, as a thought-experiment. The criminal, the defendant, is the Deep State — I do this in an effort to establish the validity of the TI metanarrative. If the Deep State exists and commits the crimes alleged by TIs, this does not prove every self-identified TI is a TI. But it proves some are — and the possibility must be weighed by every mental health professional that people claiming to be undergoing the kinds of experiences and tortures described in the TI meta-narrative may be genuine TIs. If the TI metanarrative is false, than every TI is really “psychotic.” The lawyer for the prosecution would want to exclude certain kinds of people from the jury because they could not decide fairly whether the Deep State was guilty — e.g., people in the employ of the Deep State, very pro-establishment people who think our government can do no wrong. For example, McPhate, following the psychiatric narrative claims, or at least implies, not that some TIs are psychotic but that almost all self- identified TIs are psychotic. (He does not discuss those who are not psychotics–he merely qualifies his assertions.) Someone with an a priori commitment to that viewpoint would not be able to objectively judge.

Let us consider first the obstacles faced by the prosecutor of the Deep State. The lawyer for the prosecution would have a number of obstacles to overcome. Several come to mind.

1) First, the average person has read nothing in the newspapers about TIs–except perhaps articles claiming they are psychotic. We tend to assume that what we have not heard of does not exist.

2) It is hard for most people to believe that the US government would subject its own citizens to torture. It is hard to believe that the government would violate the very Constitution upon which it rests.

3) Few people have heard of the advanced technology which the TI metanarrative claims to be in use. This is not reported in the Press and it sounds like “science fiction.”

4) Most people think only TIs or only psychotics are making these kind of claims. But it is not only TIs — covert psychotics from the psychiatric perspective — who make these claims. They are also made by highly accomplished former employees of the Deep State, the CIA, NSA, etc. These expert witnesses make the same kind of claims made by the TIs. In McPhate’s article, they are virtually ignored — he interviewed some of them but then failed to quote them or misrepresented them. People know Edward Snowden — no one has accused him of psychosis — but Snowden discussed only the prevalence of surveillance, not the existence of neuro-surveillance, “mind control,” no-touch torture, non-consensual experimentation on people with directed energy neuro-weaponry.

5) Another element in the TI’s metanarrative is group stalking — the mental health professionals claim credibly that it is very unlikely that such tremendous resources would be mobilized against one person. To the average person group stalking indeed seems odd and unreasonable. And there is no rationale for such alleged activities. (It is revealing that FOIA documents have shown that CIA assets in the media in the 1960s were instructed to emphasize how improbable a large operation would be, and impossible to keep secret; Alex Constantine, 1997, p 42, Virtual Government: CIA Operations, Los Angeles: Feral House).

6) The very formidable obstacle I tried to debunk above — belief in the validity of the mental­ health system in general, and in particular in the psychiatric metanarrative about TIs itself, which claims that virtually all TIs are delusional, are psychotics, and thus everything they claim about Deep State operations are just symptoms of their pathology.

Let me briefly touch on each of these points. We do not have to rely on TIs or victims to ascertain that the CIA and the military has subjected Americans to harmful experiments to further the various goals of the CIA and later the NSA, although anyone seriously investigating the issue would take victims’ accounts into consideration. The Church Committee was formed in the late 1970s to investigate CIA covert experiments. During the same period President Ford appointed the Rockefeller Commission. On the Senate floor, Senator Ted Kennedy summarized the results of the Church Committee investigations:

The Deputy Director of the CIA revealed that over thirty universities and institutions were involved in an ‘extensive testing and experimentation’ program which included covert drug tests on unwitting citizens ‘at all social levels, high and low, native Americans and foreign.’ Several of these tests involved the administration of LSD to ‘unwitting subjects in social situations.’ At least one death [Frank Olson’s], resulted from these activities.” (WikiSpooks/Project MKUltra)

But that was an understatement. The Church and Rockefeller Committees found this program consisted of 149 projects at 80 universities and other institutions involving drug testing and a variety of other studies on unwitting human subjects, including numerous studies using electromagnetic technologies. (Byron Belitsos, “The Covert Use of Energy Weapons for Political Control, accessed July, 2016.)

The Church Committee investigation was hampered by the fact that CIA director, Richard Helms destroyed the files on MK-Ultra in 1973 when he feared there would be an investigation. The Committee relied upon participants in the program for evidence -– they admitted secretively administering LSD (e.g., slipping it into subjects’ drinks at a party) to unwitting subjects. A memo in 1952 indicated the purpose of the program: “Can we get control of an individual to the point where he will do our bidding against his will and even against fundamental laws of nature, such as self-preservation?” (See WikiSpooks/Project ARTICHOKE accessed July, 2016, cited in Gordon Thomas, G., Journey into Madness. The Secret Story of Secret CIA Mind Control and Medical Abuse.) New York: Bantam, 1990). One can think of many military applications of such powers, whether directed against foreigners or Americans.

The US General Accounting Office issued a report in 1994 that summarized the findings of previous commissions, making clear that the program was conducted jointly by the CIA and the Department of Defense and casting doubt on the volunteer status of US soldiers who were among the subjects in these experiments. The report stated “Working with the CIA, the Department of Defense gave hallucinogenic drugs to thousands of ‘volunteer’ soldiers in the 1950s and 1960s. In addition to LSD, the Army also tested quinuclidinyl benzilate, a hallucinogen code-named BZ. Many of these tests were conducted under the so-called MKULTRA program, established to counter perceived Soviet and Chinese advances in brainwashing techniques.” (WikiSpooks/Project MKUltra, accessed July, 2016.) Although there was only one documented death (Helms had destroyed the files), one need not have an overly vivid imagination to envision the adverse effects of unknowingly ingesting LSD.

On January 15, 1994, President Bill Clinton formed the Advisory Committee on Human Radiation Experiments (ACHRE), chaired by Ruth Faden, Ph.D., MPH of the Johns Hopkins Berman Institute of Bioethics. ACHRE made clear that since the 1940s the Atomic Energy Commission had been sponsoring tests on the effects of radiation on the human body. American citizens who had checked into hospitals for a variety of ailments were secretly injected with varying amounts of plutonium and other radioactive materials without their knowledge. These experiments included other populations such as orphans given irradiated milk, children injected with radioactive materials, prisoners in Washington and Oregon state prisons. In other words, the Military and Intelligence was carrying out Dr Mengele experiments upon American citizens. Much of the experimentation was carried out in order to determine how the human body metabolizes radioactive materials, information that could be used by the Departments of Energy and Defense in Cold War in war planning. (Wikipedia/Human Radiation Experiments.)

Numerous human radiation experiments have been performed in the United States, many of which were funded by various U.S. government agencies such as the United States Department of Defense and the United States Atomic Energy Commission. Researchers had a pattern of choosing the most vulnerable people, but soldiers were also a group heavily exposed to experimentation.

Experiments included, but were not limited to:

feeding radioactive material to mentally disabled children [4]

exposing U.S. soldiers and prisoners to high levels of radiation [4]

irradiating the testicles of prisoners, which caused severe birth defects [4]

(U.S. House of Representatives, Committee on Energy and Commerce, Subcommittee on Energy Conservation and Power. American Nuclear Guinea Pigs: Three Decades of Radiation Experiments on US. Citizens. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office. Cited in Wikipedia/Human Radiation Experimentsaccessed July, 2016.)

The Washington Times summarized in 1994 the findings of ACHRE: “At least 500,000 people were used as subjects in Cold War era radiation, biological and chemical experiments sponsored by the federal government, a congressional agency said yesterday…the tests conducted ranged from radiation to biological and chemical agents like mustard gas and LSD.” (See p. 46, Nick Begich, 2006, Controlling the Human Mind, Anchorage, Alaska, Earthpulse Press.)

Byron Belitsos notes, “By 1963, 1,200 nuclear weapons tests conducted at the Nevada test site had exposed every person in the U.S. to deadly radioactive fallout, causing millions of fetal deaths, spontaneous abortions, stillbirths, and birth defects. The U.S. government also conducted over 4,000 radiation experiments on individual human test subjects without their informed consent. The delayed effects of decades of radiation exposure from weapons testing are today demonstrated by a U.S. population plagued with epidemic cancer and heart disease, neurological disorders, low fertility, chronic fatigue, obesity (thyroid involvement), immune system dysfunction and learning disabilities.” (Byron Belitsos, “The Covert Use of Energy Weapons for Political Control, accessed July, 2016.)

Anyone familiar with these experiments, documented by the U.S. government, should know that neither the military nor the CIA has any compunction about harming American citizens — thus familiarity with this history removes one of the major obstacles to accepting the TI meta-narrative. Nor can we dismiss these acts as something that happened in the past, and would not happen in our ostensibly more enlightened era. It is true that covert non-consensual experiments were officially banned by US Congress after the Church Committee findings. But no one was held accountable, no one went to prison, no one paid any fines, no one lost a job — this fact was not lost upon later whistle-blowers post-9/11 who were prosecuted for revealing criminal activities by the Deep State.

In the history of exposure of Deep State malfeasance, only the whistle-blowers themselves are punished. In the light of this lack of accountability, is it feasible to assume experiments on humans ceased? Did Deep State violations of the Constitution of which the public is aware cease after Bush? Obama of course refused to hold anyone accountable, and in office he carried out the same policy as Bush of shielding the state from scrutiny or litigation. It is significant that McPhate wrote, ironically, “The military establishment, the theory goes, never gave up on the ambitions of MK Ultra, the C.I.A.’s infamous program to control the mind in the 1950s and ’60s.” Without any evidence that he has studied the history of the CIA, he makes a patronizing tongue-in-cheek comment about TIs, as if the belief that the military continued its efforts to gain power over the human mind was such a far-fetched idea. “Hear no evil, see no evil, speak no evil” seems to be McPhate’s guiding principle.

Whistle-blowers since the origins of the CIA have made profound and searing criticisms of their former employers. The most scathing indictment of the Deep State has originally come from former agents, not from its victims (the victims, increasingly including prodigious scholars, are now catching up with former spies, journalists and scholars, in the production of analyses, exposures and histories) — although any agent who criticizes the Deep State becomes a potential victim. Many former employees have argued that the Deep State is totalitarian, and that America today is no longer a democratic republic — some have claimed it is guilty of crimes similar to the Nazi regime. (I will not discuss here Operation Paperclip — under which Nazi scientists were brought to the US to work for the military and US intelligence.) Those who became critics were among the most highly intelligent, patriotic, and morally principled people in the country. Their testimony and experiences vitiate the widespread public belief that the agencies of the Deep State protect the national security and freedom of Americans. It is because of this assumption that many Americans do not object to being placed under surveillance. And because of this they do not believe the TI metanarrative which posits that the protection of American citizens is not one of the primary goals of the Deep State — although law and order may be, or at least order — and that agencies of the Deep State have been willing to harm or put at risk the safety of American citizens in pursuit of other goals.

 

Back to Top

The CIA Assassination of its Own Agent––Protecting Whose Security?

We learn about the Deep State both from what whistle-blowers reveal and from what we see the Deep State is willing to do to silence whistle-blowers, to preserve its own secrecy, its own autonomy and lack of accountability to organs of the American people––to the Congress, to the Senate. Of course increasingly the Legislature defaults on its oversight responsibility, increasingly the Executive shields the Deep State from scrutiny–-thus shattering the foundation of Constitutional government. The belief that the government would never harm American citizens is shattered, thousands if not hundreds of thousands of its victims have been Americans. The Deep State goes to great lengths to preserve the secrecy of its programs, which is why so few people are aware of them.

Frank Olson might have become the first CIA whistle-blower but he died before he had a chance to reveal any secrets. But Frank Olson’s death was not self-inflicted as his son Eric Olson discovered– and many mainstream journalists and writers agreed. Olson is a psychologist who was determined to unravel the mystery of his father’s death and ultimately to be the voice for his father’s own moral doubts about the CIA. Michael Ignatieff, a friend of Eric Olson, writing in The New York Times Magazine reviews the findings of Olson, and it leads almost inexorably to the conclusion that the CIA assassinated his father (“CIA; What Did the CIA Do To His  Father?”). When the Olson family was issued a formal apology by President Ford and CIA Director William Colby in 1975, they were told their father was a military officer who was given LSD unknowingly as a part of MK-Ultra — this ostensibly led Olson to become deeply depressed and commit suicide. The family was given $750,000 by an act of Congress, and the matter was finished. But it wasn’t. The story was a cover story — and Colby and Ford had lied. And the CIA lied to the Press.

His son writes, “In 1952 Frank Olson [a leading biochemist] was acting chief of the Special Operations Division at Detrick; at the time of his death in 1953 he was SOD’s director of planning and evaluations. The Special Operations Divison at Detrick was the government’s most secret biological weapons laboratory.” Frank Olson knew — that despite vehement denials by the American government at the time — the United States was using biological weapons, including anthrax, in the Korean War. Considering that Olson had decided to resign from the CIA, this fact made Eric suspicious of the CIA account of his father’s alleged suicide.

He had his father’s body exhumed, and a forensic team, led by James Starrs of George Washington University, discovered “a blow to Olson’s temple which caused a fist-size bleed under the skin.” They concluded that someone had hit/knocked Olson out with a blow to the head and then dropped him out the window. Armed with this evidence, Eric persuaded Manhattan District Attorney Robert Morgenau in April, 1996, to subpoena a grand jury to examine the evidence for commission of homicide. During the course of this investigation (which found insufficient evidence to go to trial — perhaps because of the sudden death of a prospective witness, former CIA director Colby), Eric also learned that Olson’s death is taught as a case study of “the perfect murder” at the Mossad Training School outside Tel Aviv — this has been confirmed by two former Mossad agents, Ari Ben-Menashe and Victor Ostrovsky. (Family Statement on the Murder of Frank Olson.) 

A letter by the DA was sent to former CIA director William Colby, asking for an interview about Olson. There is evidence that Colby at this point himself felt moral qualms and was ready to spill the beans (Jeffrey Steinberg, “It Did Not Start with Abu Ghraib/Dick Cheney: Vice President for Torture and War“, Executive Intelligence Review, November 11, 2005, Accessed July 2016.) But a few days after receiving the letter Colby died in an alleged canoeing accident in the river near his Maryland home. According to newspaper accounts, much of which his wife contested — she was out of town at the time of Colby’s death — Colby went canoeing at night time (something he had never done before, according to his wife) without wearing his life vest. His computer was on and his dinner half eaten. Colby’s death helped kill the investigation.

It was around this time that Eric Olson had an epiphany, “In 1997, after the C.I.A. inadvertently declassified an assassination manual dating from late 1953, Eric Olson was able to read the following: ‘The most efficient accident, in simple assassination, is a fall of 75 feet or more onto a hard surface. Elevator shafts, stairwells, unscreened windows and bridges will serve. . .’ The manual went on to recommend a blow to the temple to stun the subject first: ‘In chase cases it will usually be necessary to stun or drug the subject before dropping him.’ Reading this passage at the kitchen table in Frederick, Eric realized that “dropped” was the right word.” (Ignatieff, NY Times, op.cit.)

Norman Cournoyer, one of Frank Olson’s oldest friends, called Eric in 2001 after reading the article in the Times. Frank Olson began work on interrogations methods for the CIA in the late 1940s. These were designed to extract information from even the most uncooperative subjects with the help of drugs and torture. Olson confided in Cournoyer (who also had top security clearance) that in 1953 he had been witness to more than one murder by interrogation––largely of Soviet spies. For most of the time, Olson remained in the CIA laboratory in the US.

But in 1950 he traveled to Europe and witnessed the CIA interrogations there — often “terminal”– of “expendables” including double agents, Soviet spies, and Nazi war criminals. Olson asked his friend: “Norm, did you ever see a man die? I did. People being interrogated died.” He told Cournoyer he was getting out of the CIA. He also told Cournoyer that the US was manufacturing biological weapons and he assumed had used it against the Koreans. By this point Eric concluded his father was murdered because the CIA concluded he was a security risk. Cournoyer agreed. “Was there reason for your Dad being killed by the CIA? I believe so,” he told Olson on German TV. (Jeffrey Steinberg, “It Did Not Start with Abu Ghraib/Dick Cheney: Vice President for Torture and War“, Executive Intelligence Review, November 11, 2005, Accessed July 2016.)

Author Gordon Thomas spoke to Dr William Sargant, the British psychiatrist who worked on CIA mind control experiments and examined Olson at the request of the CIA after he began to have moral qualms about his work. “Sargant told me he believed Frank Olson had witnessed murder being committed with the various drugs he had prepared. The shock of what he witnessed, Sargant believed, was all the harder to cope with given that Frank Olson was a patriotic man who believed that the United States would never sanction such acts….He decided Frank Olson could pose a security risk.” He conveyed this information to Olson’s superiors at the CIA. When he learned of his death “he came to the immediate conclusion that Olson only could have been murdered,” Thomas wrote to Eric. (Jeffrey Steinberg, “It Did Not Start with Abu Ghraib/Dick Cheney: Vice President for Torture and War“, Executive Intelligence Review, November 11, 2005, Accessed July 2016.)

Olson was invited to a meeting at Deep Creek a week before his death. The meeting was attended by future CIA director and head of covert operations, Richard Helms, as well as Sidney Gottlieb (one of the leaders of MK-Ultra). Gottlieb secretly spiked Olson’s cocktail with LSD. The real purpose of the meeting was to determine through using LSD if Olson would reveal the secret he knew upon leaving the CIA. Evidently they determined Olson was a “security risk.” As Steinberg put it, “What is clear and what was also clear to Frank Olson in the final weeks of his life is that he became a target of the very torture/interrogation techniques that he had witnessed in Europe. Returning from the LSD interrogation at Deep Creek Lake, he told his wife ‘I made a terrible mistake.’” (Jeffrey Steinberg, “It Did Not Start with Abu Ghraib/Dick Cheney: Vice President for Torture and War“, Executive Intelligence Review, November 11, 2005, Accessed July 2016.)

Eric finally concluded about his father, “He died because of security concerns regarding disavowed programs of terminal interrogation and the use of biological weapons in Korea.”

Eric has finally decades later given his father a voice from beyond the grave. (Family Statement on the Murder of Frank Olson.) 

The question must be asked: Whose security? Certainly not the security of the American people. The US was committing war crimes and violating international law by using biological weapons. These actions were risks to the security of all people. Their disclosure would have embarrassed the US government and would have resulted in the firing and resignation of people in government. It was their own security Olson’s superiors were worried about. Had Olson become a whistle-blower, international law would have been strengthened and the people of the world would have been protected against the risk of an epidemic caused by biological weapons.

The Frank Olson case reveals the CIA’s involvement in the creation and manufacture of illegal and dangerous weapons, its murder of those used as guinea pigs in its testing of interrogation methods, its willingness to assassinate one of its own agents, and its ability to enlist even the US President in a cover-up of the assassination of Frank Olson. Here we see even in its embryonic form the Deep State acting with flagrant disregard for human life, for the Constitution, and for the United Nations and international law. For the Deep State the Enemy is not merely another country — it’s here within. Even the CIA’s own agents are murdered if they try to leave the organization, or if they are deemed to present a “security risk.”

And, revealingly, Eric told Ignatieff he was regarded as mentally disturbed by many of his critics — just as TIs are today. Ignatieff wrote, “Eric knows that to charge the most secretive agency of American government with murder is to incur the suspicion that you have become deranged by anger, grief, paranoia, greed or a combination of all four. ‘Eric is crazy, Eric is obsessed,’he says, mimicking his accusers.” (Ignatieff, “CIA; What Did the CIA Do To His  Father?”)

 

Back to Top

Whistle-Blowers Post-9/11

Thomas Drake knows the power of the National Security Agency all too well. He is a former senior executive of the U.S. National Security Agency (NSA), a decorated United States Air Force and United States Navy veteran, and a whistle-blower. Drake’s crime seems to have been telling a reporter about fraud — specifically about NSA’s purchasing an Internet data collection system that cost billions of dollars more than necessary and that collected so much data that it resulted in Constitutional violations of privacy. This was the famous Trailblazer system — Drake argued like William Binney and several other NSA whistle-blowers that by choosing his tool instead of Thin Thread, the NSA was putting their own influence and power over the public good, over the nation. These men had been attracted to the NSA precisely because of their patriotism and desire to be of service to the nation. When they found there was a conflict they chose loyalty to nation — at great personal sacrifice.

Drake went to the press only after following prescribed channels of redress for Constitutional wrongs, only after failing to get NSA inspectors or Congress to take remedial action. The Justice Department in 2010 raided his house and charged him under the 1917 Espionage Act with violations that carried a penalty of up to 35 years in prison. But they dropped the charges when no evidence linked him to spying or a foreign power. The judge in the case called the prosecution “unconscionable.” Drake is the 2011 recipient of the Ridenhour Prize for Truth-Telling and co-recipient of the Sam Adams Associates for Integrity in Intelligence (SAAII) award. The government also took away his security clearance. He now works as a clerk in an Apple computer store…(Vocativ, September 19, 2013, “Should the NSA Be Dismantled?”, accessed July, 2016 ).

In excerpts from Thomas Drake’s SAAII award acceptance speech, he clearly formulates the nature of the conflict between the NSA and the republic.

With all the unitary executive privilege, all the secrecy and exigent conditions used as the excuse to torture, deny due process, and engage in off-the-books electronic surveillance, Jesselyn Raddick [his lawyer, and a whistle-blower herself, when working for Department of Justice] and I followed all the rules as whistle-blowers until it fundamentally conflicted with our oath to uphold the Constitution. Then we both made a fateful choice to exercise our First Amendment rights. We went to the press with patently unclassified information, about which the public had a right to know.

However rather than address its own corruption, ineptitude, and illegality, the government made us targets of federal criminal leak investigations, part of a vicious campaign against whistle-blowers that started under Bush and has now come to full fruition under Obama …We were transmogrified from public servants trying to improve our government, into traitors and enemies of the state. The government subjected us to severe retaliation that started with forcing us from our jobs as career public servants, rendering us unemployed and unemployable, while swinging a wrecking ball into the conditions of our jobs, in my case a security clearance, and in Jesselyn’s case, state bar licensure. We were blacklisted and no longer had a stream of income, while simultaneously incurring attorneys’ fees and necessitating second mortgages on our respective homes. But that was nothing compared to the overkill reprisal to come, placement on the no-fly list for Jesselyn and prosecution under the Espionage Act for me.

What we experienced sends unequivocally a chilling message, an unequivocally chilling message about what the government can and will do when one speaks truth to power: a direct form of political repression and censorship. If sharing issues of significant and even grave public concern which do not in any way compromise our national security is now considered a criminal act, we have strayed far from what our founding fathers envisioned. When exercising First Amendment rights is now considered espionage, this is anathema to a free, open, and democratic government….

Before the war on terrorism, our country well recognized the importance of free speech, privacy, legal counsel, and the right to be free from cruel and unusual punishment.. These are the hallmarks of tyranny and despotism, not democracy, and are…alien to the Constitution and our American way of life.

We did not take an oath to see secrecy and subterfuge used as cover for subverting the Constitution and violating the law. Our oath to the Constitution took primacy.

And today we have a frightening lack of responsibility and accountability within the national security complex, and it poses — I will mince no words here — it poses a direct threat to all our personal freedoms, as well as a clear and present danger to our constitutional republic….Our government has profoundly lost its constitutional compass and it’s been tainted to its core. And yet it is our enshrined liberties, it is our enshrined liberties that are our national security. What country do we want to keep?…

Jesselyn and I took an oath to support and defend the Constitution, not an oath of loyalty to the organization…We blew the whistle because we saw grave injustice and wrongdoing occurring within our respective organizations.

In my recently successfully concluded case that ended decisively in my favor, the government wanted to put me away in prison for many, many years in fact, at one point they threatened me with 35 years in prison — for simply telling the truth as a whistle-blower and exposing government wrongdoing and illegalities. The government found out everything they could about…me over many years, before I was even indicted. Having this secret ability…to collect and analyze data with few if any substantial constraints…is seductively powerful, and when …done in secret, it is the ultimate form of control over another...

Modern governments today increasingly perform mass surveillance of their citizens — explaining that they believe that it’s necessary to protect them from dangerous groups such as terrorists, criminals, or politically subversive dissenters — in order to track the citizenry and maintain social control. Read the history books. We are fast approaching a genuine surveillance society in the United States, a dark Orwellian future where every move, our every transaction, our every communication, and our every contact is recorded, compiled, and stored away, ready to be examined and used against us by the authorities whenever they want to at any time.

Five centuries ago, Machiavelli explained how to undertake a revolution from above without most people even noticing. On his Discourses on Livy, he wrote that one, quote, “must at least retain the semblance of the old forms; so that it may seem to the people that there has been no change in the institutions, even though in fact they are entirely different from the old ones”, unquote. In other words, keep the old government structures; meanwhile, you make profound changes to the actual system, because the appearances are all that most people notice. So, today, instead of seeing the mere corpse of the republic in which we supposedly live, we only see the clothing. We have had a quiet revolution that has not eliminated our elected representatives; it has simply made them largely irrelevant…

Being a student of history, I consider the immediate aftermath of World War II as a real turning point, when the American dream began to go south, at the very moment when the U.S. sat astride the world at the pinnacle of power. And…this is when the American republic began its transformation to a national security state and then exponentially accelerated as a result of 9/11 into a top-secret America…

With such a massively expanded ability by the government to spy on your personal life, we might as well bid adieu to the Fourth Amendment, the foundation of a citizen’s integrity as an individual person…as well as your ability to speak and associate freely with others under the Fourth Amendment.

Consider the conviction, as I summarized now for you, held by this country’s founding fathers, that a functioning constitutional republic and democracy requires what? An informed citizenry. So what happens in the case of an uninformed citizenry? The experiment in government by the people is doomed to failure and would inevitably transform into what we increasingly see today.

Do we want to continue to have a burgeoning military-industrial-congressional- intelligence-surveillance-cybersecurity-media complex? For whom does it benefit? Do we want to concede the eroding of basic human rights? Why?..

So I leave you with this as I channel Frederick Douglass. On August 3, 1857, Frederick Douglass delivered a West India Emancipation speech. At Canandaigua, New York, on the 23rd anniversary of the event, he said, quote, “..Those who profess to favor freedom and yet deprecate agitation are men who want crops without plowing up the ground; they want rain without thunder and lightning. They want the ocean without the awful roar of its many waters.” “Power and those in control concede nothing without a demand. They never have and they never will.” Let me translate into today’s language. Every one of us, every one of us in this room and beyond this room, each and every one of us must keep demanding, must keep fighting, must keep thundering, must keep plowing, must keep on keeping things struggling, must speak out, and must speak up until justice is served, because where there is no justice there can be no peace.” (Real News Network, Nov 4, 2012, “Whistleblower Threatened with 35 Years of Tyranny, Warns of Impending Tyranny“) 

Drake was not aware of the torture of TIs. But would he have been shocked by it? Does it conflict with his understanding of what the Deep State is able and willing to do? Obviously not.

William Binney learned the same lesson. He worked for the NSA for 30 years, and resigned in 2001. Binney was a Russia specialist who started work in NSA as an analyst and became successively a Technical Director, and then a geopolitical world Technical Director. In the 1990s, he co-founded a unit on automating signals Intelligence. His career culminated as Technical Leader for Intelligence in 2001. Having expertise in intelligence analysis, traffic analysis, systems analysis, knowledge management, and mathematics (including set theory, number theory, and probability), Binney has been described as one of the best analysts in the NSA’s history. Binney complained to the Department of Defense in 2002 that NSA had wasted taxpayer money by buying a data collection system — Trailblazer — that collected 20 trillion communication transactions of American citizens. Binney was particularly angry because he believed the surfeit of information prevented them from detecting 9/11.

Binney’s outspoken criticism of the agency subjected him to reprisals. On July 2007, after The New York Times reported on the government’s warrantless wiretapping, the FBI broke into his house with guns drawn and confiscated his computers and business records. Although he was cleared of wrong-doing the NSA revoked his security clearance forcing him to close his business at a cost of $300,000 a year. (See Wikipedia/William Binney/U.S. Intelligence Official.)

Binney described his arrest:

“The first I knew the FBI was in my house was the guy pointing a gun at me when I was coming out of the shower. That’s the first I knew. My son let them in, and they pushed him out of the way at gunpoint, and then they came up into my bedroom and pointed guns at my wife and me, so that’s the first I knew they were there. And it surprised me. I said: “Well, what are you doing here? I’ve been cooperating with you, telling you everything I know about this, everybody involved in this program, so why are you doing this?” Basically they wanted me to tell them something that would implicate someone in a crime, OK? The point was they were after Diane Roark because they didn’t like her, and also Tom Drake…Then they told me they thought I was lying to them,…So then I started to get mad. I said: “OK, you want to know what the crime is? Bush, Cheney, Hayden, and Tenet were the central conspirators to subvert the Constitution and the laws of the United States, and here is how they did it. The raid took about seven hours — they were there from 9:00 in the morning to the middle of the afternoon, and they took my computer, all the electronic hardware, discs and things that go with that…” (PBS Frontline/United States of Secrets/William Binney.)

On May 31, 2016, Binney told Loud & Clear host Brian Becker on Radio Sputnik, “They [the NSA] don’t care what they do, they feel that they have the right to do anything that they feel necessary, and they will cover up crimes and procedures and violations of regulations that they’ve done to achieve whatever their ends are.” This is a man who worked for NSA for decades, and became increasingly disillusioned with policies after he became a whistle-blower. “The president can declare anyone a terrorist threat and have the military take them off the street, anywhere, and incarcerate them indefinitely without any due process. Those are violations of fundamental rights of the Constitution,” he explained. “That’s exactly what Special Order 48 issued by the Nazis in 1933 did, right after the Reichstag fire. It says almost exactly the same thing.” (Sputnik News, May 31, 2016, “NSA Surveillance Takes a Page from Nazi Germany“, accessed July, 2016). 

In early October, 2016, William Binney and Kurt Wiebe, another whistle-blower who used to be an analyst for the NSA, in an interview with Ella Felder, told her and the several hundred TIs who were listening in on a mass telephone conference call that they had made a commitment to expose the plight of TIs. Wiebe explained that he did not know about TIs when he was at the NSA:

“We understand the predicament you are in, we have been in similar situations but don’t give up the faith — just because we haven’t seen it at NSA or CIA doesn’t mean a doggone thing…NSA and CIA work in compartmented areas, or on a Need to Know basis. We do know government has a history of experimentation against people, and the DOD has authorization to conduct experiments on people, sometimes with consent, some without consent. We know government has the power to deliver all kinds of aggressive measures against people.” (The Everyday Concerned Citizen, October 16, 2016, NSA Whistleblower Powerhouses Stand Up to Support “Targeted Individuals” Worldwide”)

Binney said they were planning on doing research and compiling reports from TIs,

“And then finally, we’ll try to put together recommendations on how people should proceed, to try and prove what is happening with them specifically with compiled evidence — in such a way that you can bring the evidence into a court of law. We’re trying to use the discipline that we use for our data analysis, that would be demonstrable in a court of law.”

Binney, Drake and others escaped the most punitive arm of the Deep State. The two most famous whistle-blowers were not so fortunate. Bradley/Chelsea Manning was the most unfortunate of the whistleblowers. For his service to humanity in exposing US war crimes, this young man/now woman received a formal sentence of 35 years. Political dissidents from Noam Chomsky to Daniel Ellsberg hailed him as a national hero, while politicians called him a traitor. Edward Snowden, who exposed the surveillance Panopticon, is more fortunate than Manning—he is forced to live in exile in Russia.

 

Back to Top

TIs and No-Touch Torture

TIs are plagued by basically two categories of what they experience as torture or harassment: 1) group stalking and 2) subjugation to experimentation with neuro-weaponry, and directed energy weapons. The first class of experiences is deemed highly improbable by Sheridan and James, and thus those who experience them are “delusional.” The second class is supposedly impossible.

Sheridan and James write concerning allegations of group stalking: “the resources or elaborate organization required to carry them out made the alleged activities highly improbable.” They give several examples: “hostile operatives being inserted in victim’s workplace and their children’s schools; 24-hour electronic surveillance involving teams of men in black vans; surveillance by cameras placed throughout the city; staff of shops and libraries being amongst the group stalkers; everyone in the street being ‘plants’ acting out roles towards the victim; ‘more than a thousand’ people being involved; traffic lights being manipulated always to go red on approach… collaboration between diverse agencies, such as the Automobile Association, a building society, a website, and neighbors.”

Below is a description of an example of group-stalking by Ramola D. She describes two changes in her life; first, the relocation of her family to a suburban neighborhood in Massachusetts, and then the transition that occurs when she becomes a TI. The rich prose and the very thick detailed descriptions give the account a sense of realism that one would not typically find in descriptions by “psychotics.”

Over the last couple years, after we moved up to the Boston area from Washington DC in the summer of 2011, I have been working mostly from home on various writing projects, editing a literary journal, and running creativity workshops and summer camps in art, science, and writing for children, as well as working at local academic institutions nearby. I’ve had a real taste this way of the quiet, lazy feel of the South Shore; I’ve enjoyed the ambience of living in a “settled” hundred-year old neighborhood in Quincy filled with stately, long-lasting oaks and maples, gentle and genteel neighbors, mostly older, with the occasional friendly young family with kids…the usual scurry of backyard bird life woken by the occasional inland-straying seagull, and above all, daytime quiet. Quiet, sleepy, placid, slow, laid-back, relaxed, easygoing are words I might have used to describe both the South Shore and its residents back then…

This unfortunately is no longer the case. Over the past year, things have changed dramatically in Quincy.

Now police sirens scream night and day down the once-quiet streets, including the main streets Newport Avenue and Hancock and, in my neighborhood, the close-by Harvard Street–and I mean, quite frequently, as if a thousand criminals were driving hellfire down the South Shore with trusty Quincy cops in high pursuit–and fire engines also shriek fairly often as they clang and roll by, often on quiet walks down winding sidestreets where no hint of burning houses can be seen, to add to which EMS trucks and vans also clog sidestreets and main streets, using sirens and trundling urgently by, as if the number of accidents or emergency medical calls had somehow increased overnight. Daytime quiet therefore no longer exists–there has been a dramatic escalation in the use of sirens, and it continues. This absurdity–especially absurd in its contrast to previously-peaceful Quincy–is clearly contrived. The local police have been incentivized to act like crazed patrollers of a criminal town. To add, if anyone’s noticed–all across the country, police cars and sirens have changed–they are outfitted with dozens of lines of blue lights now, their siren whoops and hollers now, rather than emitting a single round call, and the whole vehicle buzzes and shakes and whoops and dazzles as it flies by–bizarre? You bet.

Traffic also has changed. The roads of Quincy are now clogged with gigantic SUVs, Hummers, large pick-up trucks, and military-style pick-ups with menacing metal frames over the truckbed, large trucks of every kind, and frequent clogging of roads with roadwork trucks, even when there is no roadwork in sight. Starting in Fall 2013, traffic lights suddenly increased in duration. This has not abated. Traffic lights are noticeably longer, which means the long lines of cars with engines chugging, releasing masses of dirty exhaust into the atmosphere at lights are longer, and drivers–the usual Bostonian highway bellicosity notwithstanding–are markedly more belligerent, frequently tailgating, cutting off directly in front of cars, and crowding like swarming bees on highways.” (The Everyday Concerned CitizenWhy I Started This Blog)

It sounds crazy but the author seems sane! The author is an accomplished professional, a former professor, with a husband and child, with no history of “psychiatric” problems. The writing style itself reflects the mind of a writer fully in control of her craft, and of herself. If Ramola D appeared before a jury, undoubtedly the jurors would find her a credible witness––not dismiss her as delusional. To back up her story, there would be other targets with similar stories. The second change had taken place after Ramola had begun writing to her representatives asking about the chemtrails she saw in the sky. She also complained in her child’s school about the ethics of a childcare operation. At a trial against the American Deep State, historians would be called as expert witnesses to demonstrate that very similar tactics were used by Stasi — the secret police — in East Germany, or by Russian Intelligence. This establishes a pattern of such activities by Deep States.

It is impossible to fully explain in rational terms these programs since they are based on institutionalized paranoia, on collective insanity. The psychologists who say that such operations are highly unlikely fail to understand the mindset of those who designed these programs. Ramola D credibly argues that the purpose of such programs is to get the target labeled insane, so that the Deep State’s victimization of American citizens will remain invisible. But such a goal in itself makes no sense, is insane; it also indicates that the Deep State does not regard mental health professionals as very canny. She writes that these tactics seem “a desperate attempt to get the individual diagnosed professionally (by either an unsuspecting or complicit psychiatrist) as a “paranoid schizophrenic”, the moment he or she begins talking about covert harassment…being stalked by helicopters, being covertly implanted, being “gangstalked” on the roadways, or being surrounded by people wearing his favorite colors or talking about him or saying things in his presence straight out of his [own] head.” (The Everyday Concerned Citizen, 2015: “Targeted Individuals” are Non-Consensual Subjects in Criminal, Clandestine, Classified “Top Secret” MKULTRA-Extended Mind & Behavior Control/Torture Experimentation by Joint Military/Intel/Justice/Academic Institutions, as well as Targets of COINTELPRO and Electronic Warfare)

According to the Department of Defense in 2002, operations such as these are designed to be used against citizens of the enemy country (not against or upon citizens of its own host country) — the goal is to break the political will of the enemy. (Rich, 2011, New World War, Morrisville, NJ: Lulu Enterprises, p. 295.)

The evidence for the existence of group stalking is not just TIs’ and historians’ testimony but government documents (the books on Stasi are based on archives that became available with the demise of the Soviet Union) revealing similar programs in totalitarian societies and in the US in other periods. (Of course the programs have become more sophisticated over the years.)

For example, COINTELPRO was a program implemented by the FBI in the 1960s and 1970s designed to disrupt anti-war organizations and groups that were thought to be communist or socialist. J. Edgar Hoover announced the directives “to expose, disrupt, misdirect, discredit or otherwise neutralize” persons in these groups. (Mark Rich, 2011, New World War, p.87.) The Church Committee stated that under COINTELPRO, “the arsenal of techniques used against foreign espionage agents is transferred to domestic enemies.” (Ibid.) COINTELPRO included using undercover agents posing as activists in order to carry out surveillance or to act as provocateurs (in many cases that meant becoming the intimate partner of the activist––a heinous kind of subterfuge), and fomenting hostility between different factions of the left. Human Rights Watch notes,“The CIA then began monitoring student activists and infiltrating anti-war organizations by working with local police departments to pull-off burglaries, illegal entries (black bag jobs), interrogations and electronic surveillance. After President Nixon came to office in 1969, all of these domestic surveillance activities were consolidated into Operation CHAOS.” (Project Freedom, Echelon, “The NSA’s Global Spying Network,” accessed July, 2016.)

In 2002, we learned from the mainstream media that the Bush Administration planned to recruit millions of United States citizens as domestic informants in a program “likely to alarm civil liberties groups.” The Terrorism Information and Prevention System, or TIPS, meant the US would have a higher percentage of citizen informants than the former East Germany did. The program would use a minimum of 4 per cent of Americans to report “suspicious activity.” The scope of the surveillance network was broad: TIPS volunteers would be recruited primarily from among those whose work provides access to homes, businesses or transport systems. Letter carriers, utility employees, truck drivers and train conductors are among those named as targeted recruits. (The Sunday Morning Herald, July 15, 2002, “US Planning to Recruit 1/24 Americans as Spies”)

The program would involve a joint effort by local police, DOJ, state and local businesses. Even though the program was rejected by Congress, that does not mean it was not implemented–it merely went “dark” as the CIA calls it. That makes it all the more effective with Congress unaware of its existence and the media convinced it therefore did not exist. Mark Rich reports, “the American Civil Liberty Union contends that it and similar programs are being used aggressively across the nation.” ( Rich, The Hidden Evil, 2008, Morrisville, NC: Lulu Enterprises, pp.100-6, Informants, The Hidden Evil (online), accessed July 2016). According to Nick Turse, Bush had initiated similar programs under the auspices of Citizen Corps coordinated by the Department of Homeland Security. (See Turse, 2009, The Complex: How the Military Invades our Everyday Lives, NY; Metropolitan Books, excerpt at Google Books, accessed November, 2016.)

Rich describes a typical pattern of group stalking reported by TIs:

“City vehicles, postal vehicles, fire trucks, school buses, and taxis are reportedly stalking people. Construction projects encircle a targeted person’s home and also spring up at frequently visited places. Utility companies interrupt service. Local businesses provide poor service, appear incompetent or clumsy and work with civilian informants to harass targeted people in their stores.” (Ibid).

Note how this matches the report above of Ramola D, as well as activities reported by the “delusional” subjects of Sheridan and James. There is no evidence that those who constructed the psychiatric metanarrative read about TIPs, read the ACLU report (“The Surveillance Industrial Complex,” 2004, Jay Stanley, New York ACLU), or read about remarkably similar practices engaged in by secret police in East Germany, and elsewhere.

Only two websites and no books on this topic are mentioned in the bibliography of the article by James and Sheridan. And although these websites are excellent, it is obvious that James and Sheridan dismissed the reports on these websites without reading the material let alone grappling with the challenge it posed to their arrogant claim that all 120 of the TIs whose accounts they read were delusional!

In East Germany, the citizen-informants included doctors, lawyers, journalists, sports-figures, writers, actors, high officials in religious organizations, pastors, waiters, hotel personnel, and other workers. “Schools, universities, and hospitals were infiltrated from top to bottom,” wrote John Koehler, author of Stasi: The Untold Story of the East German Secret Police. Markus Wolf, a former Stasi officer, said that, in Germany, TIs were gangstalked by citizen agents who “literally encircled their everyday movements.” (See Rich, 2008, op.cit.) The homes of these persons were “put under siege.” (Rich, p.105.) TIs (the term was not used in East Germany) were typically stalked wherever they went. A report authored by Ray Cline, former Associate Director of the CIA, said that Stasi’s network of informers reached into “every crevice of society.” Although the goal here and in the Soviet Union was ostensibly “national security,” Cline noted that the surveillance system was really used to terrorize the population and inhibit them from “speaking out.”

It appears that no one has admitted to being citizen-spies in these programs, Rich wrote in 2008. According to a former Soviet citizen-informant, they were told “secrecy” was essential and they had to sign a contract to not reveal their work for the Deep State. They were told the public often did not realize “the danger these people represent to our society.” (Cited in Rich, 2008, op. cit., online edition.) In the US, one can only guess the citizen informers are told that the TIs they are stalking are threats to national security. “The behavior exhibited by these [ordinary] citizens indicates that they are absolutely convinced that this policy is legitimate and necessary.”

In almost all cases, the families of TIs believe they are mentally ill, and many of them end up (at least briefly) in a psychiatric hospital — most trust the doctors and unwisely confide in them — where the label they are given (“paranoid schizophrenic” is typical) discredits them permanently, particularly among their families. Even those who have spouses who are critics of the national security state find their spouses seem to have a need to deny such covert harassment including the use of neuro-weaponry is happening so close to home. Many TIs think therapists must be c­onsciously collaborating but, as I argued above, most professionals are deeply conformist political centrists (usually social liberals) and unaware of the existence of Deep State operations. This is a distinctive kind of totalitarian system that relies in general on a precarious balance of stealth/invisibility and complicitous cooperation.

Thus occurrences such as those reported by Ramola D and others are deemed “highly unlikely” by Sheridan and James, and thus neophytes who might take TIs’ allegations seriously are set straight by those professionals familiar with the psychiatric metanarrative. Besides group stalking, the other most common disturbance reported by TIs is voices in their head, what is known as Voice to Skull technology. Sheridan and James say that such technology is impossible. They don’t merely claim that there is no evidence such technology exists, they claim it is impossible for it to exist! This is laughable. This is the era of quantum physics––of quantum effects, and paradoxes that by all previous standards were impossible, and that has thus taught genuine scientists to be more humble. I never cease to be amazed by the hubris and idiocy of mental health professionals — nor do I think these authors are deliberately propagating disinformation.

Dr. Robert Duncan’s testimony has been ignored by the mainstream media although he has multiple graduate degrees from Harvard and Dartmouth. He has worked for the Department of Defense and the CIA on AI (Artificial Intelligence) and neuroscience projects which seek to stimulate and rewire the human brain (see below). He has testified that he worked on the development of this technology used to make a variety of neuro-weapons. In his book, Project Soul Catcher: Secrets of Cyber and Cybernetic Warfare Revealed (2010, Boise, Idaho: Higher Order Thinkers Publishing), he discusses weaponry that can cause virtually all of the effects reported by TIs — from “synthetic telepathy” to “Voice to Skull” voices. He became a whistle-blower when he discovered this technology was being used in non-consensual experiments on American citizens (or to punish persons who had angered the wrong people), just as LSD had been used in non-consensual experiments by the CIA in a previous era in MK Ultra, as documented by the US Congress’ Church Committee. He writes “I apologize to the human race for any contribution to these 4th generation weapons that I may have worked on that are more horrific than the nuclear bomb and whose cover-up is more pervasive than the Manhattan Project” (See www.drrobertduncan.com — not Duncan’s own website).

Dr. Barrie Trower is a former Royal Navy Microwave Weapons Expert and former Cold-War captured spy debriefer for the UK Intelligence Services with advanced degrees in physics. He states:

“During the 1950s and 1960s during the Cold War, it was realized…that microwaves could be used as stealth weapons. The Russians beamed the American embassy during the Cold War and it gave everybody working in the embassy cancer, breast cancers, leukemias, whatever, and it was realized then that low level microwaves were the perfect stealth weapon to be used on dissident groups around the world, because you could make dissident groups sick, give them cancer, change their mental outlook on life without them even knowing they were being radiated, and one of my particular tasks…I spent eleven years questioning captured spies…one of my particular tasks was to learn the particular frequencies of microwaves that they used on which particular victims, if I may use that word, and what the outcome was, and I built up a dossier…I’m probably the only person in the world with the complete list…I built up a dossier of what pulse frequencies of microwaves will cause what psychological or physiological damage to a person.” (See Institute for Geopathology/Barrie Trower.)

Trower’s testimony makes clear that — contrary to psychiatric claims — that not only are Voice to Skull weapons possible but the military already possesses them:

“So the military can now put voices into people’s heads to do whatever deed they wish it to achieve, and the super stores have also realized that rather than say ‘put that down, you’re going to steal it’, if you’re indecisive and you’re shopping, they can say ‘you really do want to buy this’, and after nine months, and I got the figure from one of your calls, somebody took one of your super stores to court for beaming them. And they made a phenomenal profit in just nine months, phenomenal profit. But because your Federal Communications Committee says that microwaves were safe, the case fell. (Barrie Trower, The Cooking of Humanity.)

Gloria Naylor tells of her own victimization by neuro-weaponry in her “novel,” 1996. In the Appendix she describes the experience of herself and others: 

Sleep deprivation is common and dreams are manipulated. Victims say, “They [whoever is targeting them] can see through my eyes, what I see.” Sometimes victims describe seeing the images of projected holograms. Thoughts can be read. Most victims describe a phenomenon they call “street theater.”

For example, people around the victim have repeated verbatim, the victim’s immediate thoughts, or harassive and personalized statements are repeated by strangers wherever the victim may go.

Emotions can be manipulated. Microwave hearing, known to be an unclassified military capability of creating voices in the head, is regularly reported. Implanted thoughts and visions are common, with repetitive themes that can include pedophilia, homophobia, and degradation. Victims say it is like having a radio or TV in your head. Less frequently, remote and abusive sexual manipulation is reported. Almost all victims say repetitive behavior control techniques are used and include negative, stimulus-response, or feedback loops. (Cited in Cheryl Welsh, 2008,In Contravention of Conventional Wisdom: CIA No touch torture makes sense of mind control allegations”, accessed November 2016.)

I have now been told of experiences just like these by several dozen TIs — all have the same pattern — the voices that respond maliciously to their own thoughts, the manipulation of dreams, (some describe unwanted sexual feelings or orgasms — “electronic rape”), many say the torturers can see through their eyes, etc — these experiences often reported by people in the age range 40 through 60s with no history of “psychosis.” (The experience of psychosis usually happens in early adulthood.)

Welsh finds that these mind control techniques are similar to the new kind of “no touch” torture used by the CIA in Guantanamo and elsewhere, which is discussed in the article. She writes, “The mind control techniques seem to be psychological techniques to disorient the victim and cause him to feel completely controlled, dependent, and at the mercy of his torturers.” The victim is estranged from his everyday world — like the “psychotic” — and trapped in a theater of the mind. Unlike the psychotic’s experience, this mind theater is engineered by the torturers. The goal is to break down the personality of the subject to gain complete control over him/her. I want to mention that although the new type of torture is based on a paradigm developed by the CIA and military, it is useless for extracting accurate information from subjects. In fact, when used upon TIs, it does not even have the intended results, because TIs increasingly resist isolation by joining — often over the Internet and by phone — other groups of TIs — and they usually become social activists against the Deep State.

Quoting from Alfred McCoy’s book, A Question of Torture, CIA Interrogation, from the Cold War to the War on Terror, Welsh states, “Thus, much of the pain from all forms of torture is psychological, not physical, based upon denying victims any power over their lives. In sum, the torturer strives ‘through insult and disqualification, by means of threats…to break all the victim’s possible existential platforms.”

Welsh insightfully writes,

“Alhough TIs go to extremes in trying to escape the physical targeting, they are unsuccessful. The psychological trauma is inflicted by the sense of causing one’s own pain. [In Guantanamo, causing one’s own pain was achieved by making prisoners stand for hours.] Many TIs report that the targeting causes TIs to become isolated from friends, families, and in many cases TIs are unable to work. This common reaction to targeting seems to be a type of self-inflicted psychological pain.”

What Welsh does not mention is that the rise of weekly or twice- weekly TI telephone conference calls sometimes with hundreds of TIs participating, has greatly diminished the psychological impact upon the victim — not that it ceases to be torture, but it does overcome largely the harrowing sense of isolation, and makes life tolerable for many. This is one reason the psychiatric metanarrative, which seeks to force TIs back into isolation and dependency on an expert who regards her as insane, is so harmful — and TIs would be well advised to avoid (and certainly not to argue with) all professionals who accept this metanarrative.

Welsh’s article makes the use of neuroweaponry less mysterious — although one cannot help but be puzzled by the sensibility of those who designed these tortures, which I repeat are not effective means of obtaining information. Drawing upon the work of students of CIA torture, Welsh highlights the psychological theory and distinctive goals of CIA torture — to break down the personality, not through direct psychical torture and injury but through the creation of physical distress and acute psychological trauma. In Guantanamo and elsewhere, the effect is achieved through a combination of making prisoners adopt stress positions (e.g., standing for hours), and subjecting them to isolation and control of the environment through sensory deprivation, constant noise, and discordant music. Welsh notes, “It seems logical to surmise that the successful techniques of no touch torture would cross over to more technically based remote, advanced mind control programs.”

Medical doctor John Hall writes in Guinea Pigs, Technologies of Control“Fast forward to today, we have over 300,000 people in the United States voicing complaints of electronic harassment….We have known for some time that several technologies exist that are capable of putting voices in one’s head to subliminally harass or control them.” (Guinea Pigs, Technologies of Control, 2014, Houston: Strategic Book Publishing). Why are so few people aware of this technology?

As Ramola D succinctly puts it, ”Neuroscientists in particular know that we stand today on the lip of a massive revolution in human affairs with the new knowledge of remote influencing technologies [remote from the target, often by satellite] capable of manipulating the human body and human brain. So do the Military and Intelligence agencies.” (Washington’s Blog, The American Public Informs President Obama’s Commission for the Study of Bioethical Issues About Ongoing Non-Consensual Human Experimentation in the USA Today, accessed July 2016.) By dismissing or ridiculing the complaints of the victims of these new technologies, psychiatrists, psychologists, and others in the helping professions, as well as journalists who unquestioningly propagate the psychiatric metanarrative, betray their own vocational mandates.

 

Back to Top

Neuroweaponry and Classified Military Research

In McPhate’s article, he implies that the tortures carried out on unwitting prisoners in the CIA’s /Deep State’s quest to gain absolute power over the human mind was an aberration that came to an end in the 1960s. “The military establishment, the theory goes, never gave up on the ambitions of MK Ultra, the C.I.A.’s infamous program to control the mind in the 1950s and ’60s,” he states.

He apparently has not read the numerous books documenting that the Deep State including CIA, NSA, and the military never gave up its research on influencing or controlling the mind. This has always been the purpose on their unclassified research. “The major areas of unclassified neuroscience research, molecular biology, cognitive neuroscience and brain imaging research, which had their beginnings in the 1950s, remain the dominant areas of research in neuroscience today,” writes Cheryl Welsh, a lawyer, TI and founder of Mind Justice. (Mind JusticeResearch Possibilities, Reliable Newspaper and Magazine Sources, Document Proof of Mind Control Technology.) Bioelectrical experiments on the brain were off limits to those who did not agree to put their talent to the service of the Deep State.

One might add that this arrangement — whereby the most potent tools for influencing the brain remained classified — was also in the interests of the pharmaceutical industry, a multi-billion dollar industry that would be financially threatened and diminished by the discoveries of bioelectric research. The psychiatric-pharmaceutical complex mushroomed in the 1980s and 1990s —  psychiatrists invented bogus explanations for life problems that required chemical fixes, e.g. the theory of “biochemical imbalances,” now discredited. But, as Welsh notes, there is evidence that research on the bioelectricity of the brain, the basis of the neuro-weaponry and mind control instruments used on TIs — has remained classified in CIA mind control programs that began in the 1950s and in DARPA programs to develop technologies for remote access to the brain. ”In the 1960s and 1970s, the electromagnetic aspect of neuroscience research was well funded and classified by the US government.” (Cheryl Welsh, Misled and betrayed: How US cover stories are keeping a Cold War weapon and illegal human testing secret, accessed July 2016.)

At the same time a cover story was propagated in the press that neuroweapons are “science fiction.” “As a result of both secrecy and prevailing scientific thought, however, bioelectromagnetic research has remained underfunded and disregarded by the mainstream scientific community.”(Cheryl Welsh, Misled and betrayed: How US cover stories are keeping a Cold War weapon and illegal human testing secret, accessed July 2016.) In other words the public knows little about mind control weapons because the military and Intelligence made sure the research was kept secret, and those few unclassified scientists who showed an interest in bio-electricity and would not submit to government control were steered away from researching the technology that held the most promise for mind control.

But actually there is more evidence for the existence of neuroweaponry despite efforts to keep it secret and despite the press secrecy and ridicule as exemplified in The New York Times article. Nick Begich, Ph.D., author and public speaker in his book, Controlling the Human Mind:The Technologies of Political Control and Tools for Peak Performance (Begich, 2006, Anchorage, Alaska: Earthpulse Press) unearths information that corroborates Welsh’s claim and that shows even in the unclassified sector there is evidence of the existence of the kind of advanced bio-electrical technology that is now used in non-consensual experiments on Americans. (See also Paul Baird, “Patented Technologies” at Surveillance Issues/Advanced Surveillance and Harassment Technologies, accessed November, 2016.) Actually the motive is not always obvious. Some believe the main purpose is no longer experimentation but primarily the torture of political enemies, or to create an environment of fear that stifles dissent.

Begich agrees the research that was soon classified began in the 1950s or 60s. While the research using LSD was publicized by the Church Committee, the CIA also had other projects. For example, MK-ULTRA Subproject 119 involved a critical view of the literature and scientific “bioelectric signals from the human organism, and activation of human behavior by remote [electronic] means” (Begich, Controlling the Human Mind:The Technologies of Political Control and Tools for Peak Performance, p.60). This description was written in 1960, thus corroborating Welsh’s argument.

In 1996, the US Air Force published a document called The Information Revolution and the Future Airforce by Colonel John Warden III, that laid out their plans for the future. It is worth quoting at length –it belies the psychiatric claim that the possession of advanced neuroweaponry is “impossible.”

“Prior to the mid-21st century, there will be a virtual explosion of knowledge in the field of neuroscience. We will have achieved a clear understanding of how the human brain works, how it really controls the various functions of the body, and how it can be manipulated (both positively and negatively). One can envision the development of electromagnetic energy sources, the output of which can be pulsed, shaped, and focused, that can couple with the human body in a fashion that will allow one to prevent voluntary muscular movements, control emotions (and thus actions), produce sleep, transmit suggestions, interfere with both short-term and long-term memory, produce an experience set, and delete an experience set [emphasis added]. This will open the door for the development of some novel capabilities that can be used in armed conflict, in terrorist/hostage situations, and in training….” (Begich, p.110).

The above descriptions are consistent with exactly the kind of problems that TIs claim they have as a result of what they believe to be targeting by neuro-weaponry! Psychiatrists do not read these documents (unless they work for the CIA), but by their standards the author of this document is delusional––because according to the psychiatric metanarrative, technology with these capacities could not possibly exist!

Furthermore, as early as 1980, John B. Alexander of the U.S. Army said,

“Mind-altering techniques designed to impact opponents are well-advanced. The procedures employed include manipulation of human behavior through the use of psychological weapons affecting sight, sound, smell, temperature, electromagnetic energy or sensory deprivation.” (Begich, p.100.)

Colonel Warden’s report goes on specifically to mention the creation of voices, referred to as Voice to Skull by TIs,

“It would also appear to be possible to create high fidelity speech in the human body, raising the possibility of covert suggestion and psychological direction… Thus, it may be possible to ‘talk’ to selected adversaries in a fashion that would be most disturbing to them.” (Begich, p.110, also at Earthpulse/Mind Control, accessed July 2016.)

Not only is this kind of impossible technology forecast in this report but Begich found that quite a few patents (unclassified) proving this technology — called Voice to Skull by TIs — existed.

In the early research, Begich comments it was reported that “clear sound signals” had been sent and received — this is reported in the non-classified sector. Dr Robert Becker, a physician known for his work on bio-electricity, wrote in 1995 about a current Voice to Skull device, that “such a device has obvious applications in covert operations designed to drive a subject crazy with voices, or to deliver undetectable instructions to a potential assassin.” (Begich, p.124.)

Begich in 2006 notes, about the Air Force report, confirming Welsh’s contention made years after the report, that the technology goes back to the 1950s: “The above report was a forecast for the year 2020. However, the reality is that these technologies already exist and there are a number of patents in the open literature which clearly show the possibilities. This research is not new but goes back to the 1950s.” (p.112.) The work done in the classified sector was far more advanced than someone without knowledge of this area could discern in 1995. Begich says that “what was known from experience” is that the government withheld patents under the advisement of the military. When inventors’ intellectual property is seized, “the inventors are given a choice — work for the government or you cannot continue your research on or even talk about the invention under a national security order. Those who do not cooperate have their work…shut down.” (Ibid, p.125.)

While the research in the 1990s was not new, what was new was the idea of openly using these weapons upon the civilian populations of “the enemy” and also as we will see upon US citizens. In 1995, the EPA wrote, “A new class of weapons, based on electromagnetic fields, has been added to the muscles of the military organism. The C3I [Command, Control, Communications and Intelligence] doctrine is still growing and expanding. It would appear that the military may yet be able to completely control the minds of the civilian population.” (p.112.)

The non-covert targeting of civilian populations by the military is a significant departure from its history. Clearly manipulation was used in the past but it was not openly espoused. But with such advanced technology evidently the military did not want to be confined to covert operations. Begich’s statement that in the past “the military used persuasion through real information…to win populations over” needs to emended. The military equally or more often used false information as well as false flag operations (e.g., attacks covertly committed by the military and attributed to Communists or terrorists) on civilians in enemy countries. But what is unprecedented was the ability and intention of the military to use “mind manipulation” —  through directed energy interventions on the brain itself — to gain support, or perhaps more likely not to garner support but to quell the resistance of civilian populations to US military interventions. (Ibid, also at Earthpulse/Mind Control, accessed July, 2016).

These kinds of weapons — those discussed above and others, euphemistically termed “non-lethal weapons” — are to be used not only against citizens of the “enemy” or against stateless terrorists but against Americans — and not only for the purpose of non-consensual experimentation which we have seen has been standard practice for decades, but also to control domestic “adversaries”! As Dr. Nick Begich notes, “On July 21, 1994, Dr. Christopher Lamb, Director of Policy Planning, issued a draft Department of Defense directive which would establish a policy for non-lethal weapons.” The policy connected the military’s weapons’ research to civilian law enforcement agencies. (Begich, p.156, also at The Everyday Concerned Citizen, Is the US Department of Justice Secretly Permitting Local Law Enforcement and the Military to Assault American Citizens Using Covert Directed-Energy “Non-Lethal” Weapons?, accessed July, 2016.)

According to this directive, non-lethal weapons are to be used on the government’s domestic “adversaries”. The definition of “adversary” now appears to include any American whose activities are disapproved of by the military or by law enforcement. The directive states (emphasis added): “The term ‘adversary’ is used above in its broadest sense, including those who are not declared enemies but who are engaged in activities we wish to stop. This policy does not preclude legally authorized domestic use of the nonlethal weapons by United States military forces in support of law enforcement.” (Ibid, p.157,  The Everyday Concerned Citizen, Is the US Department of Justice Secretly Permitting Local Law Enforcement and the Military to Assault American Citizens Using Covert Directed-Energy “Non-Lethal” Weapons?, accessed July, 2016.)

Begich aptly notes, “This allows the use of the military against the citizens of the country that they are supposed to protect…” It belies McPhate’s contention below that the goals of MK-ULTRA were abandoned in the 1970s. This describes a police state in which “non-lethal” weapons may be used upon anyone engaged in “activities” the military or police “wish to stop” — a police state in which the first Amendment has been completely vitiated, and the military, police, and Intelligence agencies are sovereign rulers invading not just persons’ homes (without warrants) but the sacred sanctuary of their brains, and in which even freedom of thought is monitored, proscribed, punished, manipulated. Or in other words 1984 on steroids! This of course by the standards of Psychiatry is both highly improbable and impossible. Tell that to the Military!

Furthermore, this plan is not merely a daydream of the Department of Defense. In 1995, the Pentagon received from the government $50 million to be used conjointly with the Department of Justice to develop these weapons —  and significant funding has been available every year since then. (Begich, p.158.) Begich aptly notes, “Not since the Civil War…has the military machine been turned against American citizens.” (Ibid, p.159.) Ramola D notes that “we are being publicly told that the Department of Defense long ago, in 1994, struck a deal with the Department of Justice to permit the military to use non-lethal weapons on American civilians, inside America, in support of law enforcement.”(The Everyday Concerned Citizen, Is the US Department of Justice Secretly Permitting Local Law Enforcement and the Military to Assault American Citizens Using Covert Directed-Energy “Non-Lethal” Weapons?, accessed July, 2016.)

According to military analyst and Washington Post journalist William Arkin, Department of Defense spending on electro-magnetic weapons had reached a billion dollars a year in 2008. (Belitsos, op.cit. “The Covert Use of Energy Weapons for Political Control, accessed July, 2016.) Air Force Secretary Michael Wynne stated in 2007 that nonlethal weapons should be tested on U.S. civilians in crowd control situations before being used on the battlefield. Domestic use would make it easier to avoid bad press in the international community: “Because if I hit someone with a non-lethal weapon and they claimed that it injured them, I think I would be vilified in the world press.” (The Seattle Times, September 13, 2006, “Test Non-Lethal Weapons in the US, See also Associated Press article at “US to Use Microwave Weapons on American Citizens“, accessed July 2006.) So in order to avoid unfavorable international publicity, it is better to test these experimental weapons on domestic political dissidents!

I have now presented, to the jury of readers, a summary of the case against the Deep State—based on a demonstration that Deep State operations, as described in the TI metanarrative, do in fact exist. Above I listed the obstacles, 1) to 6) , to fairly assessing the testimony of the targeted individual. There is lack of familiarity with TIs, 1), and with accounts of group stalking, 5), and of advanced neuro-weaponry, 3), which I have tried to remedy.

I have attempted here to overcome a formidable but egregious mistaken objection to the TI metanarrative which is based on 2), people’s difficulty believing the US government would subject American citizens to harm. I have shown above that this is not merely a “conspiracy theory” meme but has been corroborated by legislative as well as Presidential commissions and reports by US representatives: Over and over American citizens have been subjected by US intelligence and military to dangerous, harmful, and often lethal experiments — for the ostensible sake of national security. The use of cybernetic weaponry for political control has been openly advocated by top officials in the military in documents produced by the military. To think that experimentation and this kind of application of weaponry came to an abrupt end in the late 1970s when the Church Committee convinced Congress to make it illegal would be naïve (see Jon Rappoport, Jan 9, 2015, CIA Mind Control Program: Did it Really End?, accessed November 2016), considering the historical record — as noted — of the CIA, and considering that no one was ever held accountable for these crimes against humanity — no one paid a fine, no one went to prison, no one lost his job. Not even Helms who, as mentioned above, had destroyed the MK ULTRA files.

I have attempted to address 4), the belief that only TIs are making these kind of “paranoid” claims about Deep State (including the CIA) operations. I have examined testimony by whistle-blowers, former employees of US intelligence — not only is there no oversight to protect the public but the Deep State is able to manipulate State power to deter whistle-blowers from speaking up.

I have addressed 5), the difficulty believing that such resource-intensive activities as group stalking take place, by showing that activities like group stalking have existed before in totalitarian countries — and that there is evidence, presented in mainstream press and ACLU reports, to suggest that a massive program, using citizen-spies, of surveillance and harassment was implemented post-9/11. Furthermore, it is obvious from cursory research that advanced technology which psychiatrists claim could not exist, 5), does in fact exist.

Above all, I tried to show that, contrary to 6), public faith in psychiatric “expertise, that psychiatric authority is not based on the access to and application of a legitimate body of knowledge but is based on pretense and the enactment of a variety of ceremonies that create the illusion in the public mind that mental health professionals are scientists, are doctors of medicine (often they are MDs but their medical expertise is irrelevant to what they do as psychiatrists) when in actuality their categories of “mental illnesses” have no more validity than a collectively shared fantasy and their methods of “treating” mental illness are nothing more than methods of social control. Those therapists who are helpful to clients are effective simply because they are compassionate, intelligent, and humane — the adoption of a “medical model” would undermine the efficacy of any therapist.

The psychiatric metanarrative about TIs is yet another example of the mental health professions’ historical subordination of the quest for truth to financial exigencies, and to their own social mandate to control and correct those who deviate from dominant social norms, to domicile, tranquilize, contain and mute troubled or troubling persons, persons who are disturbing to their own families and kinship groups. The casualty has been the truth and the erstwhile losers have been those individuals who are battling to assert and recover those constitutional rights and liberties on which this country was founded — albeit imperfectly.

Below is a discussion of the article in The New York Times about TIs which was based on the psychiatric metanarrative.

 

Back to Top

Discussion of the New York Times Article About TIs Based on the Psychiatric Metanarrative

United States of Paranoia: They See Gangs of Stalkers

MIKE McPHATE  | JUNE 10, 2016 | The New York Times

Nobody believed him. His family told him to get help. But Timothy Trespas, an out-of-work recording engineer in his early 40s, was sure he was being stalked, and not by just one person, but dozens of them.

He would see the operatives, he said, disguised as ordinary people, lurking around his Midtown Manhattan neighborhood. Sometimes they bumped into him and whispered nonsense into his ear, he said.

“Now you see how it works,”they would say.

At first, Mr. Trespas wondered if it was all in his head. Then he encountered a large community of like-minded people on the internet who call themselves “targeted individuals,” or T.I.s, who described going through precisely the same thing.

The group was organized around the conviction that its members are victims of a sprawling conspiracy to harass thousands of everyday Americans with mind-control weapons and armies of so-called gang stalkers. The goal, as one gang-stalking website put it, is “to destroy every aspect of a targeted individual’s life.”

McPhate picks a poor example of a TI—or the best example if his goal was to persuade readers TIs are really psychotics.

Trepas’ confusion is made clear by the end of the article when Trepas himself wonders if TIs really exist. He could have picked Ramola D, winner of Grace Paley award for short stories; or Karen Stewart who worked for NSA for 28 years; or Gloria Naylor, best-selling novelist; or numerous other people I could name who were very accomplished before they became TIs. But then New York Times readers would be less inclined to dismiss TIs as psychotic. Mr. Trepas is not representative of the majority of TIs with whom I have spoken.

The author has set up his narrative. Mr. Trepas is a troubled person. He sees what he thinks are spies “disguised” as ordinary persons. (A knowledgeable TI would know that “ordinary persons” are recruited into the surveillance program.) At first McPhate tells us Trepas wonders if he is delusional, if “it was all in his head.” But then he encounters a large community of “like-minded people” who were organized around the conviction that there is a “sprawling conspiracy” to harass thousands of Americans.

Trepas begins to view his “delusional thoughts” as a legitimate interpretation of his experience, this is where the problem is defined. McPhate tells readers repeatedly throughout the article that the problem is the psychotic does not recognize he is mentally ill. This is the essential plot of the narrative — the basis of the conflict that propels the action in the psychiatric metanarrative about TIs. The problem is created or aggrandized when the pseudo-TI, or the covert psychotic, encounters a group of “non-compliant psychotics”– the psychiatric term for patients who are unwilling to take the medications psychiatrists say they need, and/or deny they are mentally ill. They are the unwitting villains in the psychiatric metanarrative about TIs.

The article continues:

A growing tribe of troubled minds

Mental health professionals say the narrative has taken hold among a group of people experiencing psychotic symptoms that have troubled the human mind since time immemorial. Except now victims are connecting on the internet, organizing and defying medical explanations for what’s happening to them.

From McPhate’s viewpoint and that of many if not most Americans, mental health professionals are the experts on reality. The “medical” experts say that the TIs’ interpretation of their experience should be discounted–and therefore the journalist will discount it. The TI is a psychotic in a new guise and her interpretations should not be taken seriously but viewed only as symptoms of her troubled mind. Psychotics have existed “since time immemorial.”

But now “victims” of “psychosis” are connecting with other covert psychotics on the Internet and “defying” “medical” explanations of their experience. This spells trouble. Only the psychiatric, the medical, explanation is real. In the psychiatric metanarrative, the TI is a non-compliant psychotic, and the behavior and beliefs of non-compliant psychotics are taken out of their social context — in which they make sense — and construed as unintelligible symptoms of an illness. The TI is treated by mental professionals as a non-compliant mental patient, and there is nothing she can say to change that diagnosis except by deciding to be a compliant mental patient.

The community, conservatively estimated to exceed 10,000 members, has proliferated since 9/11, cradled by the internet and fed by genuine concerns over government surveillance. A large number appear to have delusional disorder or schizophrenia, psychiatrists say.

Again it is repeated that there is a large and growing number of these troubled minds. Their growth is attributed to 9/11 and the Internet, and they are “fed” by “genuine concerns” over government surveillance. The journalist obviously must acknowledge the genuineness of this concern because, after all, readers know about Edward Snowden’s disclosures — but he wastes no time in getting back to his topic. A large number of these persons are schizophrenic or afflicted with delusional disorder — psychiatrists say so. The term “schizophrenic” is introduced, a term that has taken on the most ominous connotations, as opposed to the more mild term “delusional disorder.”

In the psychiatric metanarrative, schizophrenics are afflicted with the worst mental illness and thus constitute the lowest caste in the psychiatric status hierarchy of the mentally afflicted. They are the untouchables who for centuries were sequestered in state institutions and are now in our midst but restrained — often by force of law — by the fetters of toxic sedating “anti-psychotic” drugs. Thomas Szasz called schizophrenia “the sacred symbol” of psychiatry and argued that its evocation of chaos and unreason gave psychiatry its identity as the epitome and protector of order and reason (even to Freud who wrote contemptuously of schizophrenics), guarding us from these barbarians who had arisen inexplicably from the midst of Western civilization itself.

So “a large number” — psychiatrists say — of TIs are schizophrenics or otherwise afflicted. What about those who are not psychotic? Will the journalist give them a voice, allow them to express their concerns, and to comment on the psychiatric narrative? Or will they remain voiceless? In fact by the end of the article they have disappeared altogether, since McPhate does not interview one TI or one whistle-blower — with the possible exception of Dr John Hall — whom he presents as credible.

Yet, the phenomenon remains virtually unresearched.

The phenomenon has been defined by McPhate: Psychotic persons who defy psychiatric explanations and thus, do not get the help they need. But research is required on this medical problem.

For the few specialists who have looked closely, these individuals represent an alarming development in the history of mental illness: thousands of sick people, banded together and demanding recognition on the basis of shared paranoias.

Specialists in what? Psychobabble? The journalist defines the “alarming development” in the history of psychiatry: Thousands of sick paranoid people “banded together” — a “growing tribe of troubled minds.”

They are banded together like criminals — “a tribe of troubled minds” — and “demanding recognition.” The problem is a medical problem — and thus a social problem because we have now a tribe of psychotics who refuse to accept that they are mentally ill and thus will not get the psychiatric help they need. Psychiatry’s narrative, dramatized by the journalist, seems designed to evoke the public’s deepest fears about this “alarming development.” The words themselves suggest something sinister. These paranoid persons “defy” and “demand” (from society). The journalist thus takes the psychiatric narrative and gives it a journalistic and dramatic form — he is documenting a serious new medical-social problem. The TI’s metanarrative, insofar as it is alluded to — that the TI is a victim of surveillance, groupstalking, mind manipulation — is depoliticized, emptied of substantive content, and redefined as psychotic symptomotology. The journalist and the psychiatrist can make the TI’s narrative disappear — they can banish from the public imagination any genuine concerns the TIs’ metanarrative may evoke about surveillance and other pernicious operations of the Deep State.

But of what do they “demand” recognition? The question is elided by the phrasing: “on the basis.” The journalist implies they demand not just recognition but acceptance of their collective “paranoias.” This is in fact true, however carelessly phrased. TIs do not want to be classified and dismissed as psychotics, as paranoid. They want the TI metanarrative as expressed by their most articulate spokespersons to be taken seriously and reckoned with by other members of civil society — including mental health professionals whose responsibility is to help the distressed, and journalists whose responsibility is to search for the truth.

The journalist does not investigate what the TI defines as an alarming development: The growth of an apparatus of surveillance, control, and torture which victimizes American citizens, and is outside accountability. All indications suggest he has not even read the books given him by TIs he consulted -– and he has certainly not seriously considered the testimony by scientists and former agents who confirm the TIs’ “delusions.”

They raise money, hold awareness campaigns, host international conferences and fight for their causes in courts and legislatures.

These psychotics are busy and effective activists for their cause.

Perhaps their biggest victory came last year, when believers in Richmond, Calif., persuaded the City Council to pass a resolution banning space-based weapons that they believe could be used for mind control. A similar lobbying effort is underway in Tucson.

They deceived the people of Richmond, California.

An “echo chamber” of paranoia

Dr. Lorraine Sheridan, who is co-author of perhaps the only study of gang-stalking, said the community poses a danger that sets it apart from other groups promoting troubling ideas, such as anorexia or suicide. On those topics, the internet abounds with medical information and treatment options.

This tribe, this community of psychotics poses a real and distinctive danger to themselves and to the public because of the Internet — according to the expert on group stalking whose “investigation” “found” group-stalking did not exist. As mentioned above, this study was flawed and showed lack of rudimentary knowledge about experimental methodology.

An internet search for“gang-stalking,”however, turns up page after page of results that regard it as fact. “What’s scary for me is that there are no counter sites that try and convince targeted individuals that they are delusional,”Dr. Sheridan said.

According to the mental health professional, a psychologist and “expert” on gang-stalking, these delusional persons go to the Internet and find copious websites with “information” that confirm the reality of their sense that they are being stalked. The expert finds it frightening that there are no “counter” websites to tell them they are “delusional.” Of course she accepts the psychiatric metanarrative. Not because she is intentionally complicit — although past history suggests some of the most prominent psychiatrists and psychologists worked for the CIA. But because (see discussion above), like most mental health professionals, she is angered and disturbed by non-compliant patients — patients who won’t take their “medication,” and who will not accept the psychiatrists’ evaluation of them as “mentally ill.”

They end up in a closed ideology echo chamber,” she said.

We are told by the expert on reality how the psychotic delusion is anchored in the sick mind. It never occurs to her that she may be in a closed ideology echo chamber…

“In instructional tracts online, veterans of the movement explain the ropes to rookies:

Do not engage with the voices in your head.

If your relatives tell you you’re imagining things, they could be in on it.

Do not visit a psychiatrist.”

Here we see the basis of the psychiatrist’s own fear. These “psychotics” are violating the sacred psychiatric injunction: When troubled, consult a mental health professional.

This violation threatens to undermine psychiatric authority, or more precisely the authority of the mental health system with its hierarchy of professionals, including psychologists, social workers, and other allied disciplines.

TIs should take note. If they randomly consult a psychiatrist or any mental health professional, the odds are they will be treated as non-compliant psychotics. The psychiatric metanarrative denies that the State in America has the ability and the will to subject persons to sophisticated forms of tortures — and refuses to look seriously at the copious evidence that it has done so in the past and is doing so now.

Note that the journalist uses again the term “tribe,” with its menacing connotations — earlier the reference was to a tribe of troubled minds. Don’t be fooled, the experts warns: This new breed of psychotics comes from all classes and even includes professionals in higher socio-economic echelons, highly educated people, people the average person would not suspect were really psychotics, even schizophrenics, passing as normal.

In Facebook forums and call-in support groups, they commiserate over the skepticism of their loved ones and share stories of black vans that circle the block or co-workers conscripted into the campaign.

They are unhappy that their loved ones don’t believe them and they share stories the journalist depicts as bizarre. This emerging psychiatric meta-narrative dramatized by the journalist makes the TIs appear very paranoid, and it seeks to drive a wedge between the TI and her loved ones who will increasingly find the psychiatric metanarrative recounted in the Press — even in the prestigious New York Times.

A T.I. subgenre has blossomed on Amazon. Left, the cover of John Hall’s “Guinea Pigs: Technologies of Control,” and Robert Duncan’s “How to Tame a Demon.”

They have self-published dozens of e-books, with titles like “Tortured in America”and“My Life Changed Forever.”In hundreds of YouTube videos they offer testimonials and try to document evidence of their stalking, even confronting unsuspecting strangers.

All this evidence the expert warns is part of a planned effort — a conspiracy comes to mind, although the psychiatric expert would never call it a conspiracy — to “try to document” evidence that they are not psychotics but victims.

They don’t “try to” document evidence–they do document this. And McPhate chose to ignore it, despite McPhate’s correspondence with TIs and whistle-blowers — as TIs have noted. (See Human Rights Watch3 Blog, The Questionable Reporting of The New York times, accessed August, 2016.) He also does not mention that some of the people documenting the group stalking and the use of neuroweaponry are whistle-blowers or other experts (journalists for alternative blogs) with credentials and backgrounds that help establish their credibility.

Ramola D provides a list of authorities at The Everyday Concerned Citizen/Robert DuncanRamola herself is a prolific writer and TI (since late 2013) who won a Washington Writers’ Publishing House award in 1998 for her poetry collection Invisible Season, and the 2008 AWP Grace Paley Prize in Short Fiction for her collection Temporary Lives & Other Stories — she was for years a professor at George Washington University and is the recipient of a 2005 National Endowment for the Arts Fellowship in Poetry.

Of course, by omitting these credentials, it is easier to convince readers these whistle-blowers are delusional. Dr. Robert Duncan, for example, has multiple graduate degrees from Harvard and Dartmouth. He has worked for the Department of Defense and the CIA on AI and neuroscience projects which seek to stimulate and rewire the human brain. He became a whistle-blower when he discovered this technology was being used in torturous non-consensual experiments on American citizens, just as LSD had been used in non-consensual experiments by the CIA in a previous era in MK ULTRA, as documented by the US Congress’ Church Committee.

Although McPhate corresponded with Duncan, he left all of Duncan’s comments out of the article. McPhate’s manipulation of his readers is further illustrated by the fact that he selects one of Duncan’s relatively unimportant books to mention (“How to Tame a Demon”) — a book with a title (in the context McPhate has established) that makes it appear to the reader that Duncan is a psychotic who is obsessed by (literal) demons.

He could have mentioned Duncan’s seminal book, Project Soul Catcher: Secrets of Cyber and Cybernetic Warfare Revealed — but that title would not have been as likely to make Duncan look paranoid. Just mentioning a few of Duncan’s accomplishments would have undermined the psychiatric metanarrative McPhate promulgates. For example, Duncan writes, “My projects have included algorithms for Echelon and CIA natural-language parsing and classification of document content, IRS formula for red-flagging audits, writing the artificial intelligence code to automate tracking of the Soviet Nuclear Submarine Fleet and all water vessels, work integrating HAARP with SIGINT, SIGCOM, and SPAWAR…” — that is just the beginning of a long list. (See Dr. Robert Duncan.com, not Duncan’s website, accessed 2016.)

Again note that the TIs are presented as a threat: “Unsuspecting strangers” (emphasis added) -– that is, strangers who do not realize that TIs are really psychotics — are alerted they may be “confronted” by these disguised non-compliant psychotics. I have spoken to dozens of TIs. I don’t know any who “confronted” strangers. Many sought to tell their story to mental health professionals — invariably with adverse effects.

“They wanted to basically destroy me, and they did,” a young mother in Phoenix says in one video, choking back tears. She lost custody of her daughter and was sent to a behavioral health hospital, says the woman, whose name is being withheld to protect her privacy. “But I am going to fight back for the rest of my life.”

She adds, “And guess what, I’m not crazy.”

Here is the leitmotif, formulated in different ways, but always the denial of one’s insanity —  woven throughout the narrative. The journalist is trying to persuade the readers that the psychiatric metanarrative with its trope of the (mad and bad) non-compliant patients — here in the guise of the TI — is the truth, beyond doubt. The real problem, he tells us, echoing the psychiatrist, is that the covert psychotic will not admit, or does not realize — as a victim of the delusions of other TIs — that she is psychotic.

The journalist shows no sympathy for this bereaved woman who lost custody of her daughter. Or if he has any sympathy it is because she is, in his mind, a non-compliant psychotic who resists getting psychiatric help. He quotes her remark that she’s not crazy, but if there is any doubt that his intent is to convey that she is crazy, it is dispelled in the succeeding sentence about Dr. Sheridan’s study which found that all of the people who claimed to be victims of group stalking were delusional!

The woman quoted above lost custody of her daughter — probably because she went to an authority and volunteered information. The desire for the recognition for one’s identity, one’s sanity as a human being who is a subject, an equal, a person whose experiences and perspective are regarded as meaningful, leads many TIs — who cannot confide in family and friends — to seek out psychiatrists or therapists under the illusion that they will be understanding.

McPhate’s discussion with several mental health professionals is indicative: they do not hide their disdain for “patients” who refuse to accept they are ill. Although this is not discussed by McPhate, psychiatrists and other mental health professionals are particularly irked by the unwillingness of many patients to take psychiatric drugs. Ever since “psychotics” were released from state mental hospitals, they have been battling with mental health professionals for the right to liberty — a major site of contestation is the bodies of mental patients.

Many patients are reluctant to take “anti-psychotics” (above all other “meds”) because of the extremely discomforting or painful “side effects” typical of the neuro-toxic (see above) brain-damaging “anti-psychotics,” and/or because they are increasingly aware of adverse effects on their health. (See Seth Farber, 2012, The Spiritual Gift of Madness: The Failure of Psychiatry and the Mad Pride Movement, Rochester, Vermont: Inner Traditions.) Yet professionals insist that patients’ unwillingness is based on an irrational refusal to get well. (Yet we saw above that in the long run, these drugs actually impede the recovery process, although professionals are “in denial” about this fact.) Subconsciously, the psychiatrist sees the refusal to “accept one’s illness” as a threat to her authority, her legitimacy, her professional identity. (See Rosenhan experiment discussed above.) It is also a challenge to her socio-economic status, since an exodus of patients from the system would result in a loss of jobs and markets. It should be noted studies have shown mental patients were not significantly more violent than “normal” people.

Dr. Sheridan’s study, written with Dr. David James, a forensic psychiatrist, examined 128 cases of reported gang-stalking. It found all the subjects were most likely delusional.

I discussed this study above. This representation of the study is inaccurate. It did not “find” the subjects were delusional. It found that 2 mental health professionals, a psychiatrist and a psychologist, independently reached the conclusion that 128 subjects had to be delusional because what they reported in their written accounts was either highly unlikely or impossible. But on what basis can one call an event “highly unlikely”? Sheridan and James give examples of such events including hostile operatives being inserted in victim’s workplace and their children’s schools, 24-hour electronic surveillance involving teams of men in black vans, etc.

Scientific studies of the sort published in this journal generally calculate the probability statistically. There is no way for Sheridan and James, or anyone, to measure the likelihood of 24-hour surveillance. The TI reports seem highly unlikely to the professionals because it is an event they have never read about in the newspapers and that seems to lack a rationale. But before they come to convict the TI of being delusional — the diagnosis has very negative social consequences — they should examine the TI’s evidence.

Sheridan and James are like a jury which heard only the argument of the prosecution, and plugged up their ears when the expert witnesses for the defense — for the TI — took the stand.

In the light of this evidence, these allegations are very plausible — Intelligence agencies have behaved this way in the past here and elsewhere. Sheridan and James and McPhate have such strong prejudices that they refuse to examine the evidence — any decent lawyer for TIs would have easily gotten them thrown out of the jury pool. To determine conclusively if a TI is delusional one could hire a private investigator to determine if they are being stalked. (Of course if the perpetrators are canny they would realize an investigator was on the case, and temporarily stop the stalking.) Or one could examine the kind of documentary evidence for the operations of the Deep State I present above. Sheridan and James are not investigators — they are biased mental health professionals. And McPhate is not an investigative journalist — at least not here.

My own conviction as a psychologist who has not abandoned critical thinking is that most of the TIs I have met are not delusional. (In a few cases I have been unsure and a few I thought were delusional.) Certainly their allegations are very plausible and thus these allegations should not be dismissed as delusional. In most cases I have examined there is a clear difference between the “schizophrenic” and the TI. (I do not accept that “schizophrenia” is an incurable disease — I regard it as a emotional-spiritual crisis; its seeming chronicity a result of the iatrogenic drugs and standard practices of mental health professionals.)

“One has to think of the T.I. phenomenon in terms of people with paranoid symptoms who have hit upon the gang-stalking idea as an explanation of what is happening to them,” Dr. James said.

 A mishmash of conspiracy theories

McPhate uses the pejorative term mishmash as if conflict and diversity is not the norm in virtually every intellectual discipline dealing with complex phenomena. I doubt he would say quantum physics is a mishmash of theories.

Perhaps unsurprisingly, the community is divided over the contours of the conspiracy. Some believe the financial elite is behind it. Others blame aliens, their neighbors, Freemasons or some combination.

The movement’s most prominent voices, however, tend to believe the surveillance is part of a mind-control field test done in preparation for global domination. The military establishment, the theory goes, never gave up on the ambitions of MK Ultra, the C.I.A.’s infamous program to control the mind in the 1950s and ’60s.

What is implied here is that MK ULTRA was an anomalous program that ended in the 1960s.

A leading proponent of that view is an anesthesiologist from San Antonio named John Hall.

McPhate lets Hall talk but at this point in the article the framework is now established — the psychiatric metanarrative. So the unwary reader assumes these are the words of a mentally-afflicted man and they ring hollow.

John Hall, an anesthesiologist in San Antonio, has been a leading voice of those who feel targeted.

In his 2009 book, “A New Breed: Satellite Terrorism in America,”Dr. Hall gave his own account of being targeted. Agents bleached his water, he wrote, and bombarded him with voices making murderous threats.

The book made a splash because of the messenger: a licensed member of the medical establishment who was telling those who feel targeted that psychiatrists were misleading them. A janitor knows as much about the human mind, he wrote.

As we saw above, a janitor often does know more about the human psyche than the psychiatrist who cannot even distinguish the sane from the insane. In Rosenhan’s study it was other mental patients who suspected the pseudo-patients were not insane. None of the professionals guessed. Their training and miseducation prevents them from understanding what goes on in persons’ minds.

Dr. Hall, 51, was invited for an interview on “Coast to Coast AM,” a conspiracy-minded radio show based in California that is said to reach millions of listeners. After that, he said,“I had probably three or 4,000 emails from people saying:‘It’s happening to me in this state.’It’s happening to me in Florida.’It’s happening to me in California.’”

The similarities of the cases spoke to a wide-ranging campaign, he said. “If the psychiatrists want to say that this is schizophrenia or delusional disorder, that’s fine,” he said. “But every one of these victims have the same story.”

Dr. Hall discusses gang stalking, psychiatry and MK Ultra.

While Dr. Hall has faced scrutiny from the Texas Medical Board over his mental fitness, he retains his license. Over time, however, many others who identify as gang-stalking victims end up out of work. They are mocked by colleagues, tolerated by family. Friends and spouses fall away.

McPhate reports this outcome as if it is a result of TIs’ psychosis — their intractable attitude, their refusal to get psychiatric treatment.

A pretext for violence

The despair that results has led some to lash out in violence.

Many in the community, for example, are convinced that Aaron Alexis, who killed 12 people at the Washington Navy Yard in 2013, was a victim. Mr. Alexis, a former sailor, left behind a document accusing the Navy of attacking his brain with “extremely low frequency” electromagnetic waves. On the side of his shotgun were etched the words “my elf weapon.”

It was unclear when Myron May’s mental distress began, but by the fall of 2014, it had become too much. He quit his job as a prosecutor in New Mexico and traveled to Florida. There, he videotaped a testimonial about how gang-stalking had ruined his life.

“As you can see right now,” he says into the camera, “I am totally not crazy.”

Myron May: “I’m what’s called a targeted individual.”

Laying out his case, he describes an episode at a gas station where he believed somebody in dark glasses was mimicking his movements. “It was really creepy,” he said. “Everything I did, he did.”

Later in the video, he prays for forgiveness for his future sins. “Father,” he says, “right now I ask that you look down on all the targeted individuals across the globe. Help them to cope with this madness.”

“On Nov. 20, 2014, Mr. May walked into a library at Florida State University, where he had graduated in 2005, and shot three people, leaving one paralyzed. He dared the police to kill him, then fired in their direction before being fatally shot, officials said. He was 31.